0% found this document useful (0 votes)

124 views263 pages

Id-52a e Eng Advanced 1

Uploaded by

Andy Cowley

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

124 views263 pages

Id-52a e Eng Advanced 1

Uploaded by

Andy Cowley

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 263

ADVANCED MANUAL

VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER 1 ATTACHING ACCESSORIES

ID-52A 2 USING a microSD CARD

ID-52E
3 BATTERY CHARGING

4 FM RADIO OPERATION

5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

7 VOICE TX FUNCTION

8 RECORDER FUNCTION

9 MEMORY OPERATION

10 SCAN OPERATION

11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

This manual describes instructions for advanced features and 12 SET MODE
instructions.
See the BASIC MANUAL that come with the transceiver for
precautions and basic operations. 13 Bluetooth® OPERATION

14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

17 OPTIONS
INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing this Icom product. This product is designed and built with Icom’s state of the art technology
and craftsmanship. With proper care, this product should provide you with years of trouble-free operation.

This product combines traditional analog technologies with Digital Smart Technologies for Amateur Radio
(D-STAR), for a balanced package.

ABOUT THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE MANUAL (As of November 2021)

You can use the following manuals to understand and operate this transceiver.
LLIf necessary, you can download a glossary of HAM radio terms from the Icom website.
TIP: You can download each manual and guide from the Icom website:
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
Enter “ID-52A” or “ID-52E” into the Search box on the site.

Basic manual (Comes with the transceiver) CI-V Reference Guide (PDF type)

Instructions for the basic operations and precautions. Describes the control commands used in remote
D-STAR GUIDE that explains registering your call sign control operation (serial communication using CI-V).
to a gateway repeater and D-STAR’s basic operations
is also included.
About the DV Gateway function (PDF type)

Advanced manual (This manual) Instructions for the system requirements or operations
to use the DV Gateway function.
•• Attaching accessories
•• Using a microSD card
Updating the repeater list (PDF type)
•• Battery charging
•• FM Radio operation Instructions for the steps to update the repeater list.
•• D-STAR operation (ADVANCED)
•• GPS operation (ADVANCED)
•• VOICE TX function Using the GPS Logger function (PDF type)
•• Recorder function
•• Memory operation Instructions for operating the GPS Logger function
•• Scan operation that saves location data from a GPS receiver onto a
•• Repeater and duplex operations microSD card as a log.
•• SET mode
•• Bluetooth® operation
•• Share Pictures function
•• Other functions
•• Updating the firmware
•• Options

TRADEMARKS
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the
United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia, Australia, New Zealand, and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Icom Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
APRS® is a registered trademark of Mr. Bob Bruninga in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
Google, the Google Logo, Google Play, the Google Play logo, Android, and the Android logo are trademarks of Google, LLC.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
iPadOS is a trademark of Apple Inc.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
i
INTRODUCTION

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES OF ADOBE® ACROBAT® READER®

The following functions and features can be used with Adobe Acrobat Reader.

•• Keyword search •• Find screen

Click “Find” (Ctrl+F) or “Advanced
Search” (Shift+Ctrl+F) in the Edit
menu to open the search screen.
This is convenient when searching
for a particular word or phrase in this
manual.
•• Advanced search screen
LLThe menu screen may differ,
depending on the Adobe Acrobat
Reader version.

Click to open the find or

search screen or advanced
search screen.

•• Printing out the desired pages. •• Read Out Loud feature.

Click “Find (Ctrl+F)” or “Advanced Search The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in
(Shift+Ctrl+F)” in the Edit menu to open the search this PDF.
screen. Refer to the Adobe Acrobat Reader Help for the
This is convenient when searching for a particular details.
word or phrase in this manual. (This feature may not be usable, depending on your
LLThe menu screen may differ, depending on the Adobe PC environment, including the operating system.)
Acrobat Reader version.
LLSelect the “A4” size to print out the page in the original
manual size.

LLThe screen may differ, depending on the Adobe Acrobat Reader version.
ii
INTRODUCTION

ENTERING AND EDITING TEXT

Controls used for text entry To change the character type
1. When not selecting text, or an entered text is
[DIAL] (Rotate)
Selects a character selected, push [QUICK].
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select the character type, and
then push [ENT].

Selects the character

Cancels Clears
Moves the cursor Moves the cursor to
to the left the right Character Selectable characters and Character
type symbols conversion
[ENT] Opens the Opens the Entry
Sets character Select window ABC A to Z, 0 to 9, (space) A/a
abc a to z, 0 to 9, (space) A/a
•• To insert a text, move the cursor to a place to enter,
123 0 to 9, (space) –
and then rotate [DIAL] or push D-pad().
•• To clear a character, push [CLR]. !“#$%&’()*+,-./:;<=> –
!”#
•• To consecutively clear characters, continuously ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)
hold down [CLR].
TIP: When the character type is “ABC” or “abc,” and
while entering a character, push [QUICK] to select
upper case or lower case letters.

Push [QUICK]

iii
INTRODUCTION

USABLE CHARACTERS
The usable characters and symbols and the maximum characters differ, depending on the item.
See the following list for details.
LLThe usable characters and symbols for each character type are described at the bottom of the page.

Maximum
Category Item Character type Information
characters
Group Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
FM Radio Memory
Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Group name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Memory CH
Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Call CH Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16
Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Your Call Sign
Call Sign A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
Group Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Repeater List Sub Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 8 –
Call Sign A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
GW Call Sign A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
Normally 12 characters
Unproto Address [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 56
(API52,DSTAR*)
The number of characters you can
Comment [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 43 enter differs, depending on the data
GPS TX Mode extension and altitude settings.
Object Name/
[ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 9 –
Item name
GPS Message [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 20 –
Group Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
GPS Memory
Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
P-Scan Edge Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
Program Link Program Link name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 16 –
UR A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
CS screen R1 A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
R2 A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
Includes “/” between the Call sign
My Call Sign Call Sign A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 12 (+1)
and Memo field.
My Station TX Message [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 20 –
DTMF Memory DTMF code 0 to 9, A, B, C, D, *, # 24 –
Illegal characters:
Save Setting [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 23
/:;*<>
SD Card
Illegal characters:
Export [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 23
/:;*<>
Bluetooth Device Name [ABC] [abc] [123] [!”#] 9 Excluding “ICOM BT”
Direct Input (UR) A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –
DR screen
Direct Input (RPT) A to Z, 0 to 9, /, (space) 8 –

[ABC]: A to Z, 0 to 9, (space)
[abc]: a to z, 0 to 9, (space)
[123]: 0 to 9, (space)
[!”#]: ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)

iv
INTRODUCTION

HOW TO ENTER TEXT

Example: Entering “Calling” as a Memory name.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. 11. Rotate [DIAL] to select a character, then push [ENT].
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
MENU screen.
3. Select “Memory CH.”
4. Select a channel group where the memory
channel you want to edit is listed.
5. Rotate [DIAL] to select a Memory channel.

LLInformation
•• To move the cursor forward, push D-pad().
•• To move the cursor backward, push D-pad().
•• To insert a character, move the cursor to a place to
enter, then rotate [DIAL].
•• To clear a character, push [CLR].
•• To consecutively clear characters, continuously hold
down [CLR].
•• When the character type is “ABC” or “abc,” and while
6. Push [QUICK]. entering a character, push [QUICK] to select upper
7. Select “Edit.” case or lower case letters.
12. Repeat steps 9 ~ 11 to enter a name, and push [ENT].

•• The Edit screen is displayed.

8. Select “NAME.” •• Returns to the Edit screen, and the entered name is
displayed.
13. Select “<<OverWrite>>.”

•• A confirmation dialog is displayed.

14. Select “YES.”

9. Push [QUICK].
10. Select the character type.

•• The Memory name is overwritten.

LLTo enter symbols, select “!"#.”
v
Section 1 ATTACHING ACCESSORIES
Attaching the antenna��1-2
Attaching and detaching the battery��1-2
Attaching and detaching the belt clip��1-3
Attaching the hand strap��1-3

1-1
1 ATTACHING ACCESSORIES

Attaching the antenna Attaching and detaching the battery

Insert the antenna into the base of the SMA antenna To attach or detach the battery pack or battery case,
connector and tighten the antenna. see the illustrations below. See page 3-8 for battery
case details.
LLWhen attaching the battery case, slide it, and press firmly
TIP: Third-party high gain antennas may increase until it is fixed with both latches.
transceiver performance. The optional AD-92SMA LLWhen detaching the battery case, turn OFF the
antenna connector adapter enables you to use transceiver.
antennas with a BNC connector. (p. 17-2)
To attach To detach

Antenna

2 1
1
1
2

Battery pack or
battery case

NOTE:
•• Even when the transceiver is turned OFF, a small
current still flows in the transceiver. When not
using the transceiver for a long time, remove the
battery pack or case to prevent the batteries from
becoming exhausted.
•• The battery protection function automatically
reduces power to Low1 power (0.5 W) when the
temperature is around 0°C (32°F) or below. In
addition, High, Mid, and Low2 power selections
are disabled.

1-2
1 ATTACHING ACCESSORIES

Attaching and detaching the belt clip Attaching the hand strap
To attach or detach the belt clip, first remove the Slide the hand strap through the loop on the top of the
battery pack or case, if it is attached. (p. 1-2) See rear panel, as illustrated below.
the illustration below.
To attach the belt clip, slide the belt clip in the
direction of the arrow until the belt clip locks in place,
and makes a ‘click’ sound.
To detach the belt clip, lift the tab up (1) and slide the
belt clip in the direction of the arrow (2).

To detach Hand strap

To attach q
w

Tab
Belt clip
Battery pack or
battery case RRWARNING! NEVER swing the transceiver by
holding the hand strap. This could cause injury to
yourself or others.

1-3
Section 2 USING a microSD CARD
NOTE: See the Basic manual About data saved on a microSD card��2-2
Section 6 for details on how to Saving settings onto a microSD card��2-2
insert or remove a microSD card DD Saving as a new file��2-2
and precautions. Saving with a different file name��2-3
Loading the saved files on the microSD card��2-4
Backing up data saved on the microSD card onto a PC��2-5
DD About the microSD card’s folder��2-5
DD Making a backup file on your PC��2-6
Importing or exporting a CSV format file��2-7
DD Importing��2-7
DD Exporting��2-8
About the SD Card mode��2-9
Check the free space and the recording time on the microSD card��2-10

2-1
2 USING a microSD CARD

About data saved on a microSD card

The following data can be saved onto the card:

•• The transceiver’s settings •• Your (UR) call sign memory

•• Communication/receive log and contents •• Repeater List
•• Automatic answering voice audio in the DV mode •• GPS memory
•• Voice audio for the Voice TX function •• Position data from the GPS receiver
•• Voice recorder •• Pictures for the Share Pictures function
•• Captured screens •• Transmitted and received log of Share Picture
•• Memory channel contents •• Pictures for the Opening Picture setting
•• FM Radio memory

Saving settings onto a microSD card

The Memory channels, settings on the MENU screen, 5. Push [ENT].
and the Repeater List can be saved on a microSD
card.
Saving data on the card enables you to easily restore
the transceiver to its previous configuration, even if
you perform an All Reset.
You can save settings data as a new file, or you can
overwrite a current file. •• The confirmation screen is displayed.
6. Select “YES.”
D
DSaving as a new file
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Save Setting
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.

•• While saving, a progress bar is displayed. When saving

is completed, the SD CARD screen is displayed.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

3. Select “Save Setting.” Overwriting a current file:

To overwrite data in a current file, select the file you
want to overwrite in step 4 to the left.

4. Select “<<New File>>.”

TIP:
•• Data is saved in the “icf” file format. You can copy the icf
data on a PC and edit it using the CS-52 programming
software.
•• If “Save Form” is set to the earlier firmware version, the
•• The file is named in the following format: confirmation window is displayed after step 4. To save
Setyyyymmdd_xx the data in the earlier firmware version, select “YES.”
(yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day, xx: file number).
LLTo change the file name, see page 2-3.

2-2
2 USING a microSD CARD

Saving with a different file name

[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Save Setting
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.

3. Select “Save Setting.”

4. Select “<<New File>>.”

5. Hold down [CLR] to delete the characters.

6. Enter a file name, and then push [ENT].

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

7. Select “YES.”

•• While saving, a progress bar is displayed. When saving

is completed, the SD CARD screen is displayed.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
2-3
2 USING a microSD CARD

Loading the saved files on the microSD card

The saved Memory channels, settings on the MENU 6. Select “YES” or “NO.”
screen, and Repeater List can be copied to the
transceiver.
This makes it easy to copy Memory channels or the
Repeater List, to another ID-52A/ID-52E and operate
with the same data.
NOTE: Saving the current data is recommended
before loading other data into the transceiver.
•• YES:
Example: L
oading all the data in the The skip settings of the Repeater List are
“Set20211101_01” file retained.
•• NO:
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Load Setting The skip settings of the Repeater List are
1. Push [MENU]. cleared.
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu. 7. Select “YES.”

3. Select “Load Setting.” •• Starts checking and loading the data file.
•• After loading, “COMPLETED!” is displayed.

4. Select a data file to load into the transceiver.

8. Restart the transceiver to operate with the new
setting.

5. Select the loading content.

•• ALL:
Loads all Memory channels, settings on the
MENU screen, and the Repeater List into the
transceiver.
•• Except My Station:
Loads all Memory channels, setting on the
MENU screen except MY call signs, and the
Repeater List into the transceiver.
•• Repeater List Only:
Loads only the Repeater List into the transceiver.
2-4
2 USING a microSD CARD

Backing up data saved on the microSD card onto a PC

A backup file enables easy restoration, even if the •• GpsMemory folder
data on the microSD card is accidentally deleted. The GPS Memory in the “csv” format.
•• MemoryCh folder
D
DAbout the microSD card’s folder The Memory channel contents in the “csv” format.
The folder in the microSD card contains the following: •• RadioMemory folder
The FM Radio memory contents in the “csv” format.
•• RptList folder
ID-52 Capture GpsMemory
The Repeater List in the “csv” format.
•• YourMemory folder
Csv MemoryCh
The Your (UR) call sign memory in the “csv” format.
•• Gps folder
RadioMemory
The GPS logging data in the “log” format.
•• OpeningPicture folder
RptList
The pictures in the “bmp” format that are used for
the Opening Picture setting.
Gps YourMemory
•• Picture folder
The pictures in the “jpg” format that are used with
OpeningPicture the Share Pictures function.
•• Private folder
Picture Private Rx The RX Picture History and TX Picture History.
•• Rx folder
QsoLog Tx
The RX Picture History in the “dat” format.
LLThe RX Picture History contents are not displayed on
the PC.
Reply
•• Tx folder
The TX Picture History in the “dat” format.
RxLog LLThe TX Picture History contents are not displayed on
the PC.

Setting •• QsoLog folder

The QSO log data in the “csv” format.
Voice yyyymmdd •• Reply folder
The automatic reply data in the “wav” format.
yyyymmdd •• RxLog folder
The RX record log data in the “csv” format.
VoiceRec yyyymmdd •• Setting folder
The transceiver’s setting data in the “icf” format.
VoiceTx yyyymmdd •• Voice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders.

•• ID-52 folder •• VoiceRec folder

The folders created in the transceiver are contained The recorded Voice recorder audio date folders.
in this folder. •• yyyymmdd folder
•• Capture folder The recorded QSO audio data and the recorded
The captured screen data in the “png” or “bmp” Voice recorder audio data is saved in the “wav”
format. format.

•• Csv folder •• VoiceTx folder

The Repeater List, Your (UR) call sign memory, The recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX
GPS Memory folders, and so on. function in the “wav” format.

2-5
2 USING a microSD CARD

Backing up data saved on the microSD card onto a PC

D
DMaking a backup file on your PC
5. Open a folder to copy a backup file, then right-
Windows® 10 is used for these instructions.
click, and then click “Paste.”
•• Copies the card data onto your PC.
1. Insert the microSD card into the microSD card
(Example: Copying into the “Backup” folder on the
drive or a memory card reader on your PC.
C drive)
2. Click the “Open folder to view files” option to

access the card.

Click
Click

•• ‘ID-52’ folder is displayed.

3. Right-click “Removable disk.”
4. Click “Copy.”

6. To remove the card, click the remove media icon

(“ ” in the screenshot shown below) in the
taskbar. Then, click “Eject Removable Disk.”

Right-Click
Click

7. When “Safe To Remove Hardware” is displayed,

remove the card.

Click

TIP: When “USB Connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,”

and the transceiver is connected to the PC through a
USB data cable, you can directly access the microSD
card that is set in the transceiver from the PC.
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)

2-6
2 USING a microSD CARD

Importing or exporting a CSV format file

Read this section before importing or exporting a 6. Select the CSV file to import.
Comma Separated Values (CSV) format file from the
microSD card.
You can import or export the following data:
•• Memory CH
•• FM Radio Memory
•• Your Call Sign
•• Repeater List
•• GPS Memory
•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
D
DImporting TIP: When importing a Repeater List, “Keep
NOTE: ‛SKIP’ settings in Repeater List?” is displayed.
•• Before importing, make a backup file of all the See step 6 on page 2-4 for details.
transceiver’s data to the card in case of data loss.
•• The transceiver cannot display files that have a file 7. Select “YES.”
name 24 or more characters. If necessary, rename
them using 23 characters or less. When exporting CSV
format files using the CS-52, BE SURE the names are
23 characters or less.

Example: Importing the Your Call sign memory.

[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export > Import
•• Starts importing.
1. Push [MENU]. •• After importing ends, “COMPLETED!” is displayed.
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.

8. To complete importing, restart the transceiver.

3. Select “Import/Export.”

4. Select “Import.”

5. Select “Your Call Sign.”

2-7
2 USING a microSD CARD

Importing or exporting a CSV format file

D
DExporting 6. Select “<<New File>>.”
Saving as a new file:
Example: Exporting the Your Call sign memory.
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export > Export
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.

•• Displays the FILE NAME screen.

LLThe file is named in the following format:
Your*yyyymmdd_xx
(yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day, xx: file number).
* When you select the other items, each file is named
as shown below.
3. Select “Import/Export.” Memory CH: “Mch”
FM Radio Memory: “Radio”
Repeater List: “Rpt”
GPS Memory: “Gps”

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

7. Push [ENT].

4. Select “Export.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

8. Select “YES.”

5. Select “Your Call Sign.”

•• Exports the setting data.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

Overwriting the current file:

When you overwrite data in a current file, select the
file you want to overwrite in step 6 to the left.

2-8
2 USING a microSD CARD

About the SD Card mode

When “USB connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,” and NOTE: Before connecting the transceiver in the SD
the transceiver is connected to the PC through a USB Card mode to a PC with a USB cable, a microSD
data cable, you can transfer the files between the card must be inserted.
micoSD card set in the transceiver and a PC. LLIf the microSD card is not inserted, insert it with the
You can back up the setting data and recording data transceiver turned OFF, and then reconnect the USB
saved on the microSD card to a PC, and save the cable.
image data for the Share Pictures function and the
firmware data to the microSD card without inserting or TIP: In the SD Card mode, the transceiver works
removing it. not as a transceiver but as a data storage device. It
temporarily stops some functions as follows:
•• Stops recording
[MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect •• Pauses the GPS Logger function and the RX History
1. Connect the transceiver to a PC using a USB Log function
cable. •• Disconnects a Bluetooth device
2. Push [MENU]. •• Disables the Auto Power OFF function
3. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.
To exit the SD Card mode
4. Select “USB Connect.”
LLThis instruction manual is based on Windows 10.
1. Click “ ” in the task tray.
2. Click “Eject Device.”
3. After “Safe to Remove Hardware” is displayed,
remove the USB cable from the PC.

5. Select “SD Card Mode.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

6. Select “Yes.”

2-9
2 USING a microSD CARD

Check the free space and the recording time on the microSD card
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > SD Card Info
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “SD Card Info.”

•• The free space and the recording time on the

microSD card are displayed.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

2-10
Section 3 BATTERY CHARGING
Battery information��3-2
DD Battery life��3-2
DD Battery icon��3-2
Charging information��3-3
DD Charging through the [DC IN] jack��3-3
DD Charging with a USB cable��3-4
Charging with the BC-202IP2 optional rapid charger��3-5
Charging with the BC-202IP3L optional rapid charger��3-6
Connecting BC-202IP3L together��3-7
External DC power operation��3-7
About the optional battery case��3-8
DD Battery life��3-8
DD About the battery replacement��3-8
Specifications for the battery charger and battery packs��3-9
DD BP-271 Li-ion battery pack (optional)��3-9
DD BP-272 Li-ion battery pack (supplied)��3-9
DD BP-307 Li-ion battery pack (optional)��3-9
DD BC-202IP2 rapid charger (optional)��3-9
DD BC-202IP3L rapid charger (optional)��3-9

3-1
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Battery information
D
DBattery life D
DBattery icon
The approximate battery life (operating time) as The “ ” battery icon is displayed when the battery
shown below is calculated under the following pack is attached to the transceiver.
assumptions:
•• Power save setting: Auto (Short) Icon Battery status
•• Duty cycle: TX : RX : Standby = 1 : 1 : 8
(based on operating style) The battery is being charged.
The battery has sufficient capacity.
The approximate battery life:
The battery is exhausted a little.
Battery pack FM mode
BP-271 4.25 hours The battery is nearing exhaustion.
(green)
BP-272 7.25 hours
The battery is almost fully exhausted.
BP-307 12 hours
LLImmediately charge the battery pack.
LLSee page 3-8 for the optional BP-273 battery Otherwise, the icon will soon start
case battery life. (red) blinking, “LOW BATTERY” will be
displayed, and the transceiver will
NOTE: BE SURE to replace the battery pack with automatically turn OFF.
a new one approximately five years after purchase, When an external DC power supply (12
even if it still holds a charge. The material inside the V DC) is connected, the battery is not
battery cells will become weak after a period of time, No icon being charged because:
even with little use. •• The battery is completely charged.
The estimated number of times you can charge the •• “Charging (Power ON)” is set to “OFF.”
pack is between 300 and 500. Even when the pack
appears to be fully charged, the operating time of the LLThe battery icon for the BP-273 cannot display the
capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery icon always
transceiver may become short when:
displays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true battery
•• Approximately five years have passed since the
capacity.
pack was manufactured.
•• The pack has been repeatedly charged.
To display the correct battery status
TIP: Keep the battery terminals clean. It’s a good Select the attached battery pack in the following
idea to clean them occasionally. item. (Default: BP-271/BP-272)
([MENU] > SET > Function > Battery Pack Select)
To display the Battery Pack Select dialog every time you
attach the battery pack, set the following item to “ON.”
([MENU] > SET > Function > Battery Pack Confirmation)

3-2
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Charging information
NOTE:
•• Prior to using the transceiver for the first time, the
battery pack must be fully charged for optimum
life and operation.
•• BE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver while
charging with the supplied battery charger.
Otherwise, the battery pack will not charge.

LLWhile charging, the charging icon “ ” and

“Charging....” are displayed.
LLThe icon and “Charging....” disappear when the
battery pack is fully charged.

D
DCharging through the [DC IN] jack
The approximate battery life (operating time) as To charge the battery pack:
shown below is calculated under the following •• Use the supplied battery charger or optional cable.
assumptions: •• Use a USB cable (User supplied). (p. 3-4)
•• When using the optional CP-12L or OPC-254L, the •• Use the optional rapid charger. (p. 3-6)
battery pack can be charged with the power ON.
(p. 3-7) Charging note
LLTo connect, see the illustration below. •• CAUTION: BE SURE to attach the battery pack
•• The BP-273 battery case has no charging capability before connecting the DC cable.
or socket. •• Turn OFF the transceiver when using the BC-167S.
•• DO NOT charge the fully charged battery pack.
Approximate charging time This may cause a shorter battery life.
•• BP-271: 3 hours
•• BP-272: 5 hours
•• BP-307: 8 hours

BC-167S*1

To an AC outlet

CP-12L

To a cigarette
lighter socket
(12 V DC)
To [DC IN]
OPC-254L
Turn OFF*2 To a 12 V DC
power source

Black: _ *1 The shape is different, depending on the version.

White: + *2 When using the BC-167S, turn OFF the transceiver.

3-3
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Charging information

D
DCharging with a USB cable
You can charge the battery pack with a USB cable (micro B type) while operating the transceiver.

Power adapter
or external battery
USB cable
(User supplied)

To the [USB] port To a USB port

PC,
Mobile device

NOTE: TIP:
•• BE SURE to attach the battery pack to the transceiver. •• When a USB cable is connected, the charging is
•• To use a mobile device or a PC as an external power stopped when the battery is fully charged.
source, set the following item to “ON” (default). After that, the charging will resume when a certain
([MENU] > SET > Function amount of capacity is consumed while connecting the
> USB Power Input (Phone, Tablet, PC)) USB cable.
•• The battery pack is used as a power source while •• You can change the operation when the transceiver is
transmitting, even when an external power source is connected to a PC through a USB cable.
connected. ([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)
Therefore, you cannot transmit if the battery pack is
exhausted.
•• You may not be able to charge:
- Depending on your USB cable or power adapter.
- When using a USB hub or connecting to a low output
USB port.
•• Charging time may differ, depending on the USB port.
•• The S-meter may appear, or the noise may occur, due
to the influence of the USB power supply’s noise.
In that case, unplug the USB cable to disconnect the
transceiver from the USB power supply.
•• When operating the transceiver while charging, the
charging may not be sufficient, and the battery pack
may be consumed, depending on the power adapter.

3-4
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Charging with the BC-202IP2 optional rapid charger

The optional BC-202IP2 rapidly charges a battery Charging note
pack. RRDANGER! NEVER use a battery pack that is not
LLWhen about 90% of the battery capacity is charged, manufactured or approved by Icom.
the BC-202IP2 stops charging and the charging •• CAUTION: DO NOT connect anything to the
indicator lights green. Therefore, the battery life [DC IN] jack or the [USB] port on the side of the
will be a little shorter than when charging with the transceiver when placing the transceiver to the
transceiver. rapid charger. This may cause the charger’s
malfunction. If the charging indicator blinks
Approximate charging time orange, disconnect the power adapter from the
•• BP-271: 1.5 hours charger, and then reconnect it.
•• BP-272: 2.5 hours •• BE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver. When the
•• BP-307: 4 hours transceiver power cannot be turned OFF because
LLThese are the time when the battery is exhausted, and of the battery exhaustion, detach the battery pack
charging with the transceiver power off.
from the transceiver. Then charge the battery pack
by itself.
The following item is required.
•• The BC-202IP2 rapid charger can only charge
•• BC-123S (L-shaped type plug)
the BP-271, BP-272, or BP-307 Li-ion battery
(A different type, or no power adapter is supplied,
pack. Other types of rechargeable batteries, Ni-
depending on the charger versions.)
Cd, or Ni-MH cannot be charged.
•• If the charging indicator blinks orange, there may
be a problem with the battery pack or charger.
Contact your dealer if you have problems charging
a new battery pack.

Transceiver + battery pack

Battery pack
BP-271, BP-272, or BP-307

Guide
AC outlet rail
Turn OFF

Tabs

Screws
(Self-tapping screws: 3.5 × at least 30 mm)
Purchase separately. Using screws is
BC-123S
recommended to secure the charger.
(L-shaped type plug)

The CP-23L or OPC-515L BC-202IP2 Charging indicator

can also be used instead •• Lights orange: While charging
of the power adapter. •• Lights green: Charging is completed.
•• Blinks orange: A charging error has occurred.

3-5
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Charging with the BC-202IP3L optional rapid charger

The optional BC-202IP3L rapidly charges a battery Charging note
pack. RRDANGER! NEVER use a battery pack that is not
LLWhen about 90% of the battery capacity is charged, manufactured or approved by Icom.
the BC-202IP3L stops charging and the charging •• CAUTION: DO NOT connect anything to the
indicator lights green. Therefore, the battery life [DC IN] jack or the [USB] port on the side of the
will be a little shorter than when charging with the transceiver when placing the transceiver to the
transceiver. rapid charger. This may cause the charger’s
malfunction. If the charging indicator blinks
Approximate charging time orange, disconnect the power adapter from the
•• BP-271: 2 hours charger, and then reconnect it.
•• BP-272: 3 hours •• BE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver. When the
•• BP-307: 5 hours transceiver power cannot be turned OFF because
LLThese are the time when the battery is exhausted, and of the battery exhaustion, detach the battery pack
charging with the transceiver power off.
from the transceiver. Then charge the battery pack
by itself.
The following item is required.
•• The BC-202IP3L rapid charger can only charge
•• BC-123S (straight type plug)
the BP-271, BP-272, or BP-307 Li-ion battery
pack. Other types of rechargeable batteries, Ni-
Cd, or Ni-MH cannot be charged.
•• If the charging indicator blinks orange, there may
be a problem with the battery pack or charger.
Contact your dealer if you have problems charging
a new battery pack.

Battery pack
BP-271, BP-272, Transceiver + battery pack
or BP-307
AC outlet

Turn OFF

BC-123S
(straight type plug)
LLThe CP-25H can also be
used instead of the power BC-202IP3L
adapter.

Charging indicator

LLTo connect the power adapter to the

charger, remove the charger’s left cover.

3-6
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Connecting BC-202IP3L together

You can connect up to 6 BC-202IP3L together.
1. Remove the charger’s right cover. (1)
2. Snap the DC power plug to the another charger’s
2 DC power jack. (2)
RRWARNING! NEVER connect more than 6
chargers together. It may result in an electric shock,
1 cause a fire, overheating, or damage the chargers.
RRWARNING! NEVER use other than the BC-228
AC adapter when connecting multiple BC-202IP3L
units. It may result in an electric shock, cause a fire,
overheating, or damage the chargers.

External DC power operation

Operating note
•• DO NOT connect over 16 V DC directly into the
[DC IN] jack of the transceiver. The power source
voltage must be between 10.0 V ~ 16.0 V DC.
•• DO NOT transmit at high power for a long period CP-12L
of time. The transceiver becomes hot, and it may
cause a burn.
•• Use the optional CP-12L or OPC-254L when using
the external DC power.
•• Confirm the correct polarity of the OPC-254L To a cigarette
supply connection. Connect the OPC-254L to an lighter socket
external power source (user supplied). (12 V DC)
•• Use an external DC-DC converter to connect the OPC-254L
transceiver through the optional CP-12L or OPC- To a 12 V DC
To [DC IN]
254L to a 24 V DC power source. Ask your dealer power source
for details.
•• When the external power is used, the Power Save Black: _
function (p. 12-18) is automatically turned OFF. White: +
•• Depending on the external power voltage,
the battery pack may be used to operate the
transceiver, and the battery pack capacity is CAUTION: BE SURE to attach the battery pack
consumed. before connecting the DC cable.

TIP: The battery pack can be charged even if the LLThe BC-167S cannot be used for external DC
transceiver is ON when “Charging (Power ON)” is power operation.
set to “ON” (default).
This operation may generate certain spurious
signals, and the S-meter may appear, or noise may
be heard.
When you operate the transceiver while charging,
and if you cannot receive signals correctly, set
“Charging (Power ON)” to “OFF.”
([MENU] > SET > Function > Charging (Power ON))

3-7
3 BATTERY CHARGING

About the optional battery case

The BP-273 uses three AA (LR6) size alkaline D
DBattery life
batteries.
The approximate battery life (operating time), as
1. Remove the battery case top, as shown below.
shown below, is calculated under the following
2. Install three AA (LR6) size alkaline batteries.
assumptions:
LLInstall only alkaline batteries.
LLBE SURE to observe the correct polarity.
•• Power save setting: Auto (Short)
3. Attach the battery case. (p. 1-2) •• Duty cycle: TX : RX : Stand-by = 1 : 1 : 8
(based on operating style)

The approximate battery life:

FM mode
4.5 hours
LLThe battery life may differ, depending on your
operating style, or the installed alkaline batteries.

BP-273 Alkaline battery D

DAbout the battery replacement
When the alkaline batteries are almost exhausted,
“LOW BATTERY” is displayed, and the battery icon
Batteries cautions starts to blink. After 10 seconds, the transceiver power
•• When installing batteries, confirm that they are all is automatically turned OFF. In that case, replace all 3
the same brand, type, and capacity. Do not mix batteries with new alkaline batteries.
new and old batteries together. LLThe battery icon for the BP-273 cannot display the
capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery icon always
•• DO NOT incinerate used battery cells since the
displays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true battery
internal battery gas may cause them to rupture.
capacity.
•• DO NOT expose a detached battery case to
water. If the battery case gets wet, BE SURE to
wipe it dry before using it.
•• DO NOT use batteries whose insulated covering
is damaged.
•• Keep the battery terminals clean. It’s a good idea
to clean them occasionally.
•• Remove the alkaline batteries when the battery
case is not used. Otherwise, the installed alkaline
batteries will be exhausted due to the built-in step-
up converter.

TIP:
•• A built-in step-up converter in the BP-273
increases the voltage to 5.5 V DC. Approximately
100 mW of output power is possible using the
case. Also, the transmit output power selection is
disabled.
•• The transceiver meets IPX4 requirements
for waterproof protection when the BP-273 is
attached.
•• The batteries may seem to have low capacity
when used in low temperatures, such as –10°C
(+14°F) or below. Keep the batteries warm in this
case.

3-8
3 BATTERY CHARGING

Specifications for the battery charger and battery packs

D
DBP-271 Li-ion battery pack (optional)
•• Voltage: 7.4V
•• Discharge Capacity: 1150 mAh (minimum)
•• Usable temperature range: –20°C ~ +60°C, –4°F ~ +140°F
•• Charging temperature range: 0°C ~ 40°C, 32°F ~ 104°F
•• Storage temperature range: –20°C ~ +50°C, –4°F ~ +122°F (within a month)
–20°C ~ +35°C, –4°F ~ +95°F (within 3 months)
–20°C ~ +20°C, –4°F ~ +68°F (within a year)
•• Dimensions: 58 (W) × 86.9 (H) × 9.1 (D) mm, 2.3 (W) × 3.4 (H) × 0.4 (D) inches
(projections are not included)

D
DBP-272 Li-ion battery pack (supplied)
•• Voltage: 7.4V
•• Discharge Capacity: 1880 mAh (minimum)
•• Usable temperature range: –20°C ~ +60°C, –4°F ~ +140°F
•• Charging temperature range: 0°C ~ 40°C, 32°F ~ 104°F
•• Storage temperature range: –20°C ~ +50°C, –4°F ~ +122°F (within a month)
–20°C ~ +35°C, –4°F ~ +95°F (within 3 months)
–20°C ~ +20°C, –4°F ~ +68°F (within a year)
•• Dimensions: 58 (W) × 86.9 (H) × 14.2 (D) mm, 2.3 (W) × 3.4 (H) × 0.6 (D) inches
(projections are not included)

D
DBP-307 Li-ion battery pack (optional)
•• Voltage: 7.2V
•• Discharge Capacity: 3050 mAh (minimum)
•• Usable temperature range: –20°C ~ +60°C, –4°F ~ +140°F
•• Charging temperature range: 0°C ~ 40°C, 32°F ~ 104°F
•• Storage temperature range: –20°C ~ +50°C, –4°F ~ +122°F (within a month)
–20°C ~ +40°C, –4°F ~ +104°F (within 3 months)
–20°C ~ +20°C, –4°F ~ +68°F (within a year)
•• Dimensions: 58 (W) × 86.9 (H) × 22.4 (D) mm, 2.3 (W) × 3.4 (H) × 0.9 (D) inches
(projections are not included)

D
DBC-202IP2 rapid charger (optional)
•• Power source requirement: 12 V ~ 16 V DC or the specified Icom power adapter
•• Charging temperature range: 10°C ~ 40°C, 50°F ~ 104°F
•• Weight: Approximately 105 g, 3.7 oz (without power adapter)
•• Dimensions: 88.0 (W) × 47.5 (H) × 72.5 (D) mm, 3.5 (W) × 1.9 (H) × 2.9 (D) inches
(projections are not included)

D
DBC-202IP3L rapid charger (optional)
•• Power source requirement: 12 V ~ 15 V DC or the specified Icom power adapter
•• Charging temperature range: 10°C ~ 40°C, 50°F ~ 104°F
•• Weight: Approximately 120 g, 4.2 oz (without power adapter)
•• Dimensions: 106.5 (W) × 52.5 (H) × 78.0 (D) mm, 4.2 (W) × 2.1 (H) × 3.1 (D) inches
(projections are not included)

3-9
Section 4 FM RADIO OPERATION
Basic operation��4-2
DD Description��4-2
DD Turning ON the FM Radio��4-2
DD Selecting the FM Radio mode��4-3
DD Selecting the group in the Memory mode��4-3
DD Searching for an FM Radio signal��4-4
DD Using the Attenuator function��4-4
DD Setting a squelch level��4-5
DD Using the Monitor function��4-5
FM Radio memory��4-6
DD Using the FM Radio Memory��4-6
DD Add an FM Radio memory��4-6
DD Editing an FM radio memory��4-8
DD Deleting an FM Radio memory��4-9
DD Rearranging the display order of the FM Radio memories��4-10
DD Skip setting for the FM Radio memory�� 4-11
Using the FM Radio mode��4-12
FM RADIO items��4-13

4-1
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

Basic operation
D
DDescription TIP:
You can listen to FM Radio broadcasts. To turn OFF the FM Radio
While using the Dualwatch function, you can still listen Push [QUICK], and then select “<<FM Radio OFF>>.”
to the FM Radio on the pop up window.
Up to 500 FM Radio Memory channels can be To listen to the FM Radio while monitoring the
separately stored in the 26 groups for easy memory A/B bands
management. Push [CLR] to close the FM RADIO window.
You can standby listening to FM Radio. Also, the •• You can standby listening to FM Radio.
transceiver has the exclusive FM Radio mode, where
only the FM Radio functions. In this mode, the other
functions are disabled.

TIP: The FM Radio Memory channel contents,

described in this manual, may differ from your
transceiver’s preloaded contents.
LLTo open the FM RADIO window again, push [QUICK],
and select “<<FM Radio>>.”
The frequency range for the FM Radio
FM: 76.0 MHz* to 108.0 MHz
* The usable frequency range differs, depending on the
transceiver’s version.

D
DTurning ON the FM Radio
1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “<<FM Radio ON>>.” NOTE: If you turn ON the Band Scope function while
•• Returns to the standby screen, and the FM RADIO using the Dualwatch function, the FM Radio audio
window is displayed. output may be interrupted due to the AF Output
•• “ ” is displayed.
(DUAL/AIR Band) function.
In that case, set “Auto Mute” to OFF, or set “AF
Output (DUAL/AIR Band)” to OFF.
LLWhen “AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band)” is set to ON, the
received audio is momentarily heard during a sweep,
and you will know that a signal is received without
looking at the display.
([MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Set > Auto Mute)
([MENU] > SET > Scope > AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band))
Displayed when the FM
Radio is ON.

4-2
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

Basic operation

D
DSelecting the FM Radio mode D
DSelecting the group in the Memory
mode
1. When the FM RADIO window is displayed, Up to 50 FM Radio Memory channels can be assigned
push [MR] to select between the Tuning and the to each group for easy memory management.
Memory modes. If you change the group, other area channels can be
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select a frequency or a memory selected.
channel.
1. Push [MR] to select the Memory mode.
•• Tuning mode
The FM Radio Tuning mode is used to set the desired
FM Radio frequency.
When the Tuning mode is selected, “ ” is
displayed.
To save the selected frequency, hold down [MR] for 1
second.
•• Enters it into the lowest memory channel of the selected •• “ ” and the selected memory channel number is
group. displayed.
2. Push [QUICK].
3. Select “Group Select.”

Tuning mode
4. Select the desired group.

•• Memory mode
The FM Radio Memory mode is very useful to quickly
select often-used frequency settings.
When the Memory mode is selected, “ ” and the
selected memory channel group (A ~ Z) and number
are displayed.

Memory mode
•• Returns to the standby screen, and the memory
channel in the selected group is displayed.
TIP: Push [QUICK], and select “VFO” to select the 5. Rotate [DIAL] to select a memory channel.
Tuning mode, or select “MR” to select the Memory
mode.

4-3
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

Basic operation

D
DSearching for an FM Radio signal D
DUsing the Attenuator function
While in the Tuning mode, hold down D-pad() to The Attenuator prevents a desired signal from
start searching the broadcast signal. becoming distorted when a very strong FM Radio
signal is near the frequency, or when a very strong
electric field, such as from a broadcasting station, is
near your location.
While searching, the frequencies are
sequentially displayed. 1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “ATT.”

When a signal is received 3. Select “ON.”

•• When you hold down D-pad(), a down scan starts, and

when you hold down D-pad(), an up scan starts.
•• When a signal is received, the scan stops on the
frequency.
•• To cancel the scan, push D-pad() or [CLR].

Displayed when
the Attenuator is ON.

•• “ATT” is displayed.

4-4
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

Basic operation

D
DSetting a squelch level D
DUsing the Monitor function
The squelch enables the audio to be heard only while The Monitor function is used to listen to weak FM
receiving a signal that is stronger than the set level. A Radio signals without changing the squelch setting.
higher level blocks weak signals, which enables you
to receive only stronger signals. A lower level enables While holding down [SQL], the transceiver monitors
you to hear weak signals. weak signals on the frequency.
The squelch level that is set on the FM RADIO •• The squelch opens.
window is only for the FM Radio.

While holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] to select the

squelch level.

The first segment blinks.

Automatic squelch Maximum squelch level TIP: You can set the Monitor Hold function on the
MENU screen. The transceiver opens or closes the
LLInformation squelch each time you push [SQL].
•• Options: “OPEN,” “AUTO” (default), and “LEVEL 1” ~ ([MENU] > SET > Function > Monitor)
“LEVEL 3”
•• “LEVEL 1” is loose squelch (for weak signals), and
“LEVEL 3” is tight squelch (for strong signals).
•• “AUTO” is an automatic level adjustment using a noise
pulse counting system.
•• “OPEN” is the continuously open setting.

4-5
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory
D
DUsing the FM Radio Memory D
DAdd an FM Radio memory
A total of 26 groups are selectable for FM Radio
Step 1. Adding an FM Radio memory and entering
memory.
the edit mode
You can assign up to 50 FM Radio memory channels
to each group, for easy memory management. (A [MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory
maximum of 500 memories can be assigned to the FM
1. Push [MENU].
Radio memory.)
2. Select “FM Radio Memory” in the “FM RADIO” menu.
Some area stations are preloaded into the FM Radio
memory for easy memory management.

TIP: The FM Radio memory contents, described

in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s
programmed memory.

3. Select a desired group.

LLIf there is no memory, “-- Blank --” is displayed.

4. Push [QUICK].
5. Select “Add.”

•• The FM RADIO MEM EDIT screen is displayed.

TIP: To change the group name, push [QUICK], and

then select “Edit Name” in step 4.

4-6
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory

DDAdd an FM Radio memory

Step 2. Entering an FM Radio Memory name Step 4. Selecting the skip setting
1. Select “NAME.” 1. Select “SKIP.”

2. Select “OFF” or “SKIP.”

2. Enter a name.

•• OFF: You can select the memory in the Memory mode.

•• SKIP: The memory is not displayed in the Memory
mode.
Step 5. Saving the FM Radio Memory
1. Select “<<Add Write>>.”
LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.
3. After entering, push [ENT].

TIP: To change the FM Radio memory group, select

“GROUP,” then select the desired group.
2. Select “YES.”
Step 3. Entering a frequency
1. Select “FREQUENCY.”

2. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the frequency.

•• The entered contents are saved in the FM Radio

memory, and the display returns to the selected
group screen.
LLPush D-pad() to move the cursor.
LLThe usable frequency range differs, depending on the TIP: How to cancel the entered data:
transceiver’s version. 1. Push [CLR].
3. After entering, push [ENT]. 2. Select “YES.”

•• Cancels the entry, and returns to the selected group

screen.

4-7
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory

D
DEditing an FM radio memory
This function edits FM Radio memory contents. This
is useful when already-entered data is incorrect, has
changed, or new data should be added to the list.

[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory

1. Push [MENU]. 8. After editing, select “<<Overwrite>>.”
2. Select “FM Radio Memory” in the “FM RADIO” menu.

9. Select “YES.”
3. Select a group that includes the memory you want
to edit.

•• The memory contents are overwritten, and returns to

the selected group screen.

4. Select the memory to be edited.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Edit.”

7. Select an item, then edit it.

LLSee page 4-7 for details.

4-8
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory

D
DDeleting an FM Radio memory
All the contents of an FM Radio memory can be
deleted.

NOTE: Deleted memories cannot be restored.

[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory

1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select “YES.”
2. Select “FM Radio Memory” in the “FM RADIO” menu.

3. Select a group that includes the memory you want

to delete.

•• The selected FM Radio memory is deleted.

4. Select the memory to be deleted.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Delete.”

4-9
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory

D
DRearranging the display order of the
FM Radio memories
You can move the entered FM Radio memories to
rearrange their display order in the selected FM Radio
memory group.

[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory

1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select a memory to insert the repeater you want to
2. Select “FM Radio Memory” in the “FM RADIO” menu. move above it.

3. Select a group that includes the memory you want

to move.

•• The selected memory is inserted above the

destination memory.
4. Select the memory to be moved.
LLIf you select “<<Move End>>,” the memory is moved
to the bottom of the group.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Move.”

4-10
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM Radio memory

D
DSkip setting for the FM Radio
memory
You can set memories as skip memories. The
selected memories are not displayed in the Memory
mode.

[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory

1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select “SKIP.”
2. Select “FM RADIO.”
3. Select “FM Radio Memory.”

4. Select a group that includes the memory you want

to set the skip setting on.

•• “SKIP” is displayed on the selected memory.

LLPush [QUICK], and then select “SKIP” again to
cancel the skip setting.

5. Select the memory to be skipped.

TIP: When displaying the FM RADIO window in the
Memory mode, push [QUICK], and selecting “SKIP”
also sets the skip setting.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].

4-11
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

Using the FM Radio mode

The transceiver has an exclusive FM Radio mode
where only the FM Radio functions.

1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “<<FM Radio Mode>>.”

•• The FM Radio mode screen is displayed.

TIP: To cancel the FM Radio mode

1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “<<Normal Mode>>.”
LLIn the exclusive FM Radio mode, the other modes
are in a sleep state. To operate the transceiver in a
normal way, cancel the FM Radio mode.

4-12
4 FM RADIO OPERATION

FM RADIO items
FM Radio Memory Earphone Antenna (Default: Not Used)
[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Memory [MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Set >
A total of 26 groups are selectable for FM radio Earphone Antenna
Memories. Selects whether or not to use the earphone antenna
You can assign up to 50 memories to each group, for FM radio.
for easy memory management. (A maximum of 500 •• Not Used: An earphone antenna is not used.
memories can be assigned to the FM Radio Memory.) •• Use: An earphone antenna is used.

FM Radio memory contents Power Save (FM Radio) (Default: ON)

The name of an FM Radio memory
channel
[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Set >
NAME Power Save (FM Radio)
LLEnter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters for each memory. Sets the power save function to reduce the current
GROUP The group letter and the name of the group drain and conserve battery power when the FM Radio
Entered frequency is ON.
FREQUENCY LLThe usable frequency range differs, •• OFF: The power save function is OFF.
depending on the transceiver’s version. •• ON: When the FM Radio is ON, and no signal is
received for 5 seconds, this function is activated in
Shows the skip status. a 1:3 ratio (300 : 900 milliseconds).
SKIP LLThe Skip channels are not displayed in
the Memory mode. NOTE: This function is disabled when an external
power source is used.

Auto Mute (Default: 2sec)

<<FM Radio ON>>
[MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Set > Auto Mute
Selects whether or not to mute the FM Radio audio in [MENU] > FM RADIO > <<FM Radio ON>>
the background* while receiving a signal on the A or B Turns ON the FM Radio.
band. When the transceiver receives on the MAIN band and
LLThe FM Radio audio is muted while transmitting, SUB band, you can still listen to the FM Radio.
regardless of this setting. When the FM Radio is ON, <<FM Radio OFF>> is
* See “To listen to the FM Radio while monitoring the A/B
displayed on the FM RADIO screen. To turn OFF the
bands” on page 4-2 for details.
FM Radio, select <<FM Radio OFF>>.
LLIn the Quick Menu window, selecting <<FM Radio OFF>>
•• OFF: The Auto Mute function is OFF. The FM Radio
also turns OFF the FM Radio.
audio is not muted even if the transceiver
receives a signal on the A or B band. The FM
Radio audio is muted when the transceiver <<FM Radio Mode>>
transmits.
•• 0 to 10sec: The FM Radio audio is automatically muted [MENU] > FM RADIO > <<FM Radio Mode>>
when the transceiver transmits or receives The transceiver enters an exclusive FM Radio mode
on the A or B band. After transmitting or
where only the FM Radio functions.
receiving, the Auto Mute timer starts. After the
While in the FM Radio Mode, <<Normal Mode>> is
timer period ends, you can listen to FM Radio
again. displayed on the FM RADIO screen. To exit from the
The FM Radio audio is muted when a FM Radio mode, select <<Normal Mode>>.
signal is received during a sweep by the LLIn the Quick Menu window, selecting <<Normal Mode>>
Band Scope function. also exits from the FM Radio mode.

4-13
Section 5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)
NOTE: See D-STAR GUIDE on the “FROM” (access repeater) setting��5-3
Basic manual for details on how to DD Using your transceiver’s repeater list��5-4
register your call sign to a gateway DD Using the DR scan��5-5
repeater and the basic operations. DD Using the Near Repeater Search function��5-6
DD Using TX History��5-7
“TO” (Destination) setting��5-8
DD Making the “Local CQ” (Local Area call)��5-9
DD Making a “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)��5-9
DD Using “Your Call Sign”��5-10
DD Using RX History��5-10
DD Using TX History�� 5-11
DD Directly entering (UR)�� 5-11
DD Directly entering (RPT)��5-12
REPEATER DETAIL screen��5-13
Connecting to a reflector��5-14
DD What is a reflector?��5-14
DD Unlinking a reflector��5-14
DD Linking to a reflector��5-15
DD Using a reflector��5-16
DD Reflector Echo testing��5-16
DD Requesting repeater information��5-16
Message operation��5-17
DD Entering a TX message��5-17
DD Transmitting a message��5-17
DD Deleting a TX message��5-18
Viewing received call signs��5-19
DD Viewing the call signs on the RX History screen��5-19
BK mode communication��5-21
EMR communication��5-22
DD Adjusting the EMR AF level��5-22
Automatic DV detection��5-23
Automatic Reply function��5-24
DD Recording an Auto Reply message��5-25
DD Auto Position Reply function��5-26

5-1
Section 5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)
Data communication��5-27
DD Connection��5-27
DD Data communication application setting��5-27
DD Sending data��5-27
DD DV Fast Data function��5-28
About the display type��5-28
Digital squelch functions��5-29
DD The Digital Call Sign squelch setting��5-29
DD The Digital Code Squelch setting��5-29
Repeater list��5-30
DD Repeater list contents��5-30
Entering new information into the repeater list��5-31
DD Required items for the communication cases��5-31
DD Entering new information into the repeater list��5-32
Repeater list operation��5-36
DD Editing repeater data��5-36
DD Deleting repeater data��5-36
DD Rearranging the display order of the repeaters��5-37
DD Adding new repeater information from RX History��5-38
DD Skip setting for the DR scan��5-39
DD Entering or editing a repeater group name��5-40
Your Call Sign��5-41
DD Entering Your Call Sign��5-41
DD Deleting Your Call Sign��5-42
DD Rearranging the display order of Your Call Signs��5-43
Are your settings correct?��5-44

IMPORTANT!
•• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
•• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters
are different from other country’s. BE SURE to add the repeater node letter in the 8th digit of the call sign,
according to the frequency band shown below.
1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)
430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
144 MHz: C (no repeaters in Japan)

To begin the Digital mode communication using other than the D-STAR Repeater (DR) function
To begin Digital mode communication using other For a Local area call or Gateway call:
than the DR function, you can use the VFO mode, 1. Set the access repeater’s frequency. (p. 11-2)
Memory mode, or Call Channel mode. 2. Set the Duplex direction and frequency offset.
This manual description focuses on the DR function (p. 11-4)
operation, which can be easily set up. If you want to 3. Set the call signs (UR/R1/R2). (p. 12-8)
use other than the DR function, see the procedures
as described to the right, or select the repeater in a For a Simplex call:
Memory channel. 1. Set the operating frequency.
2. Set the call signs (UR/R1/R2). (p. 12-8)
5-2
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (access repeater) setting

Your access repeater must be set in “FROM” when you make a call on the DR screen.
You have 5 ways to select the access repeater.

By rotating [DIAL]
Select the preset repeater on the DR screen by rotating [DIAL].
Displayed while
rotating [DIAL]

•• When you know your access repeater

From the repeater list (p. 5-4)

When your access repeater is in your transceiver’s repeater list, you can
select it by selecting the repeater area and name, if entered, or call sign.

•• When you do not know which repeaters you can access

Search for a repeater using the DR scan (p. 5-5)

The Normal DR scan searches for output repeater frequencies of nearby
repeaters. The scan stops when a signal is detected. The scan also stops
on Simplex signals.
Scan items
The Near Repeater scan searches for output repeater frequencies of
nearby repeaters by using your location and the repeater’s location, if it
is entered in the Repeater List. The DR scan starts scanning and stops
when a signal is detected.
You can also find only FM repeaters using the Near Repeater (FM) scan.

Search for near repeaters (p. 5-6)

The transceiver scan searches for near repeaters by using your location
and the repeater’s location, if it is entered in the Repeater List.
The nearest repeaters in your transceiver’s repeater list are displayed as
selectable options.
You can select the nearby DV or FM repeater type.

•• When “FROM” data is saved in the TX History.

Select from the TX History (p. 5-7)

Select a repeater that you have accessed before from the TX History
record.

5-3
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (access repeater) setting

D
DUsing your transceiver’s repeater list
When your access repeater is in your transceiver’s
repeater list, you can select it from the list. By just
selecting the repeater from the list, the repeater call
sign, its frequency, duplex setting, and frequency
offset are automatically set, for easy operation.

Example: S
electing the “Kirkland (IA)” repeater in
Washington state in the USA from the
repeater list.

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR 5. Select your access repeater.
screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push
[ENT].

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater

name is displayed in “FROM.”
LLThe repeater list, described in this manual, may differ
3. Select “Repeater List.” from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.

TIP:
When you select an FM repeater:
4. Select the repeater group where your access When an FM repeater is in your transceiver’s
repeater is listed. repeater list, you can select it from the list.
When selecting an FM repeater, the “TO” setting is
not necessary, and a “––––” is displayed in “TO.”

When selecting an FM repeater.

How to change the repeater group:

To change the repeater group on the DR screen,
push [QUICK], then select “Group Select.”

5-4
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (access repeater) setting

D
DUsing the DR scan
The DR scan scans frequencies to find a signal on a Example: Selecting an active repeater using the DR
repeater, or on a simplex frequency. scan.
You can use 2 kinds of DR scans, Normal scan and 1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
Near Repeater scan. screen.
2. Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
Normal scan
To quickly find a repeater, the Normal scan skips
repeaters that are not set as an access repeater.
LLThe “USE (FROM)” setting (p. 5-33) is set to “NO” on the
repeater list.
([MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List)

Near Repeater scan

•• The DR scan setting window is displayed.
The Near Repeater scan searches for up to 20 nearby
3. Select the scan type.
repeaters within 160 kilometers (100 miles) by using •• Normal:
your location and the repeater’s entered position data, Searches for repeaters whose “USE (FROM)” setting
and then lists the repeaters. is set to “YES.”
LLThe Near Repeater scan continues, even if you turn OFF •• Near Repeater (ALL):
the transceiver, and then turn it ON again during the scan. Searches for up to 20 each of nearby DV or FM
LLIf your own position data is not being received from GPS repeaters. (Total 40 repeaters)
satellites, the last received position data is used. •• Near Repeater (DV):
Searches for up to 20 nearby DV repeaters.
NOTE: Even if your transceiver receives a repeater •• Near Repeater (FM):
Searches for up to 20 nearby FM repeaters.
signal, the repeater may not receive your signal,
because the repeater’s output power is higher than
•• The selected scan starts.
your transceiver’s, and your signal does not reach •• In the DR scan, the repeaters are sequentially
the repeater. displayed by distance, in descending order.
LLThe scan resumes the same as other scans. (p. 12-5)
TIP: The DR scan scans the simplex frequencies in
the repeater list, in addition to D-STAR repeaters.

The repeaters are

sequentially displayed.

4. When the transceiver receives a signal from a

repeater, the scan stops. Push [SCAN].

•• The DR scan is canceled, and the repeater is set to

“FROM.”

5-5
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (access repeater) setting

D
DUsing the Near Repeater Search function
The transceiver searches for the nearest repeaters by 4. Select the type of nearby repeater to display.
using your location and the repeater’s entered position
data.
The nearest repeaters in your transceiver’s repeater
list are displayed as selectable options.
NOTE:
•• When using the Near Repeater Search function, BE
SURE first to receive your own GPS position data, or •• Near Repeater (ALL):
manually enter your position data. Displays up to 20 nearby DV and FM repeaters.
•• If no repeater is found within a 160 kilometers (A total 40 repeaters)
(100 miles) range, “No Repeater Found” is displayed. •• Near Repeater (DV):
•• If the last received position data can be used, “GPS is Displays up to 20 nearby DV repeaters.
invalid. Search by last valid position” is displayed. •• Near Repeater (FM):
Displays up to 20 nearby FM repeaters.
Example: S
electing a nearby repeater from the Near 5. Select the repeater to use as your access
Repeater list. repeater, considering the distance from your
Step 1: Receiving your own location from the GPS location to the repeater.
satellite
Confirm the GPS receiver is receiving the satellite
signals. “FM” is displayed for the FM
•• The GPS icon blinks when searching for satellites. repeaters.
→ → →
•• The GPS icon stops blinking when the minimum needed Repeater call sign
number of satellites is found.

Distance and direction from

LLIt may take only a few seconds to receive, or it may take your location to the repeater*
a few minutes, depending on your operating environment.
If you have difficulties receiving, we recommend that you * When the “POSITION” setting (p. 5-34) is set to
try a different location. “Approximate” on the repeater list, the direction data
LLIf your own location is not being received, the last is not displayed if the distance to the repeater is less
received position is used for your location. than 5 kilometers.
•• Returns to the DR screen and the selected repeater
Step 2: Selecting the access repeater from the is set in “FROM.”
Near Repeater list
1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push
[ENT].

3. Select “Near Repeater.”

5-6
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (access repeater) setting

D
DUsing TX History
The TX History saves up to 10 of the latest access TIP: When you push [QUICK] in step 5, you can
(From) repeaters you transmitted on. You can select a display the REPEATER DETAIL screen or delete the
repeater from TX History as your access repeater. TX HISTORY screen’s repeater information.

Example: S
electing the “Hirano” repeater from TX
History.

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR

screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push
[ENT].

3. Select “TX History.”

4. Select the TX History (DV) or TX History (FM).

•• TX History (DV): D
isplays the TX History of the DV
repeaters.
•• TX History (FM): D
isplays the TX History of the FM
repeaters.
5. Select the repeater to use it as your access repeater.

•• Returns to the DR screen and the selected repeater

is set in “FROM.”

5-7
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

“CQCQCQ,” the destination repeater, or station call TIP: After you receive the individual station or
sign must be set in “TO” when you make a DV mode repeater’s signal, the call sign can be captured by
call. You have 9 ways to set the destination. holding down the Call Sign Capture key ([RX→CS]),
and you can quickly and easily reply to a call.
By rotating [DIAL]
Rotate [DIAL] to select the repeater or Your Call
Sign displayed on the DR screen. (This operation is
disabled when “CQCQCQ” is set.)

To make a Local Area CQ call

Set “CQCQCQ” in “TO” (Destination). (p. 5-9)

To make a Gateway CQ call

Select a repeater from the Repeater List, if you
want to make a Gateway call. (p. 5-9)

To make a call to a specific station

Select the station call sign in the Your Call Sign list.
(p. 5-10)

TIP: How to change the repeater group:

When “Local CQ” or “Gateway CQ” is
To make a call through a Reflector selected, you can change the repeater
Select a reflector you want to call through. (p. 5-14) group.
To change the repeater group on the DR
screen, push [QUICK], then select “Group
Select.”
To select from RX History
When you receive a call, repeater or caller station
data is saved in RX History.
Select the destination from the record. (p. 5-10)

To select from TX History

When you make a call, the destination repeater or
called station data is saved in TX History.
Select the destination from the record. (p. 5-11)

To directly enter the destination station call sign

Directly enter the destination station’s call sign.
(p. 5-11)

To directly enter the destination repeater call sign

Directly enter the destination repeater’s call sign.
(p. 5-12)

5-8
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

D
DMaking the “Local CQ” (Local Area DDMaking a “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)
call) When “Gateway CQ” is selected on the TO SELECT
screen, you can select the repeater to make a
When “Local CQ” is selected on the TO SELECT
gateway call to.
screen, “CQCQCQ” is set in “TO.”
Example: Making a Gateway CQ call to the “Hirano”
Example: M
aking a Local area call by accessing the
repeater from the “Kirkland (IA)” repeater.
“Kirkland (IA)” repeater.
1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].

3. Select “Gateway CQ.”

3. Select “Local CQ.”

4. Select the repeater group where your destination

repeater is listed.
•• Returns to the DR screen, and “CQCQCQ” is
displayed in “TO.”

5. Select the destination repeater.

LLEach repeater has a correct node (A, B, or C band)

that you want to transmit on. See page 5-2,
“IMPORTANT” for band letter details.
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
name is displayed in “TO.”
TIP: After selecting a destination repeater, you can
select another repeater preset in your repeater List
by rotating [DIAL].

5-9
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

D
DUsing “Your Call Sign” D
DUsing RX History
The “Your Call Sign” memory saves individual or When a call is received in the DV mode, the call data
repeater station call signs. When you select the call is saved in the RX History.
sign for the “TO” (Destination) setting, you can make Up to 50 callers, and only the last called call signs, a
a Gateway call. When you call an individual station total of 51 histories can be saved.
through a gateway, the signal is automatically sent to
the last repeater that the individual station accessed. Example: Selecting “Rick” in the RX History.
Therefore, even if you do not know where the
individual station is located, you can make a call. 1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
NOTE: If the repeater, set in “FROM” (access
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
repeater), has no Gateway call sign, you cannot
make a gateway call.

Example: Selecting “Rick” from “Your Call Sign.”

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR

screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
3. Select “RX History.”

3. Select “Your Call Sign.”

4. Select a destination name or call sign.

4. Select a destination name or call sign. •• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is
displayed in “TO.”
LLThe “*” (asterisk) is displayed at the beginning of the
called station’s call sign. (p. 5-19)

TIP: To add an RX HISTORY data to the “Your Call

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is Sign” memory, push [QUICK], then select “Add To
displayed in “TO.” Your Memory.”

TIP: After selecting a destination, you can select
another station preset in your transceiver by rotating
[DIAL].

5-10
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

D
DUsing TX History D
DDirectly entering (UR)
TX History saves the repeater and station name and The destination station call sign can be directly entered.
call sign of up to 20 “TO” (Destination) settings used
when you made the calls. Example: Directly entering the call sign “JM1ZLK.”
NOTE: Until you make a call in the DV mode, you
1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
cannot select “TO” (destination) from the TX History.
screen.
Example: S
electing the “Kirkland (IA)” repeater in the 2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
TX History.

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR

screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].

3. Select “Direct Input (UR).”

3. Select “TX History.”

4. Enter a call sign of up to 8 characters, including

spaces.

4. Select a destination repeater.

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

5. After entering, push [ENT].

The Sub name is

displayed when a
repeater is selected.
•• Returns to the DR screen and the entered call sign is
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater displayed in “TO.”
name is displayed in “TO.” LLAfter entry, you can edit the call sign in the DIRECT
INPUT (UR) screen.
TIP: You can add the TX HISTORY data to memory, LLThe entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
or delete it from the TX HISTORY screen. (UR) screen until you enter a new call sign.
Push [QUICK], then select the option. TIP: If the entered call sign is duplicated in the “Your
Call Sign” memory, the name is displayed.
(Only when the name has been entered.)

5-11
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

D
DDirectly entering (RPT)
The destination repeater call sign can be directly
entered.
NOTE: BE SURE to include a node letter as the 8th
digit. See page 5-2 “IMPORTANT” about the node
letters.

Example: Directly entering the call sign “JP3YDH A.”

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR

screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].

3. Select “Direct Input (RPT).”

4. Enter a call sign of up to 8 characters, including

spaces.

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

5. After entering, push [ENT].
•• Returns to the DR screen and “JP3YDH A” is
displayed in “TO.”
LLAfter entry, you can edit the call sign in the DIRECT
INPUT (RPT) screen.
LLThe entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
(RPT) screen until you enter a new call sign.

TIP:
•• If the entered call sign is duplicated in the repeater list,
the name is displayed in “TO” (Only when the name has
been entered).
•• When directly entering the repeater call sign, including a
“/” at the beginning is also correct.

5-12
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

REPEATER DETAIL screen

Depending on the content, such as position data or The REPEATER DETAIL screen
UTC offset, the distance between your location and
the repeater, or the repeater time can be displayed on Repeater frequency
the REPEATER DETAIL screen.
The detail screen can also be entered from the FROM Repeater
Repeater name
SELECT screen. type
Sub name
Example: D isplaying the “Hirano/Icom” repeater detail
Call sign
screen
Group number Duplex
1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
setting
screen. Direction from
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO” then push [ENT]. your position* Distance from
your position
Repeater time

* When the “POSITION” setting (p. 5-34) is set to

“Approximate” on the repeater list, the direction data
is not displayed if the distance to the repeater is less
than 5 kilometers.
3. Select “Gateway CQ.” LLIf there is no position data, the distance and direction
from your position are not displayed. See page 6-3 to
confirm your position.
LLWhen selecting an FM repeater, either of “FM” or “FM-N”
and the tone setting are displayed.
TIP: You can display the REPEATER DETAIL screen
when the DR screen is displayed.
When you set the repeater as shown below, push
4. Select “13: Japan.” [QUICK], then select “Repeater Detail.”

5. Select “Hirano/Icom.”
LLDO NOT push [ENT].

•• The REPEATER DETAIL screen is displayed.

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Detail.”

8. Push [ENT].
•• Returns to the previous screen.

5-13
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Connecting to a reflector
D
DWhat is a reflector?
A reflector is a special server connected to the Internet and running a version of the D-Plus software. If the D-Plus
software is installed on your access repeater, it provides various functions including gateway and reflector linking
capabilities (It is known as the D-STAR reflector system). The D-STAR reflector system enables a number of
D-STAR repeaters anywhere to link to a reflector. This means that when you transmit through a D-STAR repeater
linked to a reflector, your voice can be heard on other repeaters linked to the reflector, and you can hear other
stations that are connected to the reflector.

D-STAR reflector system

Reflector
Access
repeater

CAN

UK
USA

AUS

D
DUnlinking a reflector
Before trying to link to another reflector, BE SURE to
unlink the currently connected to the repeater.
NOTE: If a reflector is already connected, ask on the
air whether or not you can change reflectors and wait
for responses. BE SURE to reconnect back to the
same reflector when you finish your conversation.

4. Select “Unlink Reflector.”

1. Hold down [DR] for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
•• Displays the TO SELECT screen.
3. Select “Reflector.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Unlink Reflector” and

“U” are displayed in “TO.”

•• Displays the REFLECTOR screen.

5. Hold down [PTT] to unlink the reflector.

•• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

5-14
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Connecting to a reflector

D
DLinking to a reflector 6. Push [ENT].
If your repeater is not currently linked to a reflector, or
if you want to change it to another reflector, follow the
steps below. Before linking to another reflector, BE
SURE to unlink the current reflector. (p. 5-14)
Direct inputting a reflector
Example: Directly enter “REF030CL.”
•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Link to Reflector” and
1. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT]. “REF030CL” are displayed in “TO.”
7. Hold down [PTT] to link to the Reflector.
Using TX History
TX History saves up to 5 reflectors that your access
repeater linked to before.
Example: Select “REF030CL” in TX History.
1. Push D-pad() to select “TO” then push [ENT].

2. Select “Reflector.”

•• The TO SELECT screen is displayed.

2. Select “Reflector.”
3. Select “Link to Reflector.” The REFLECTOR screen is displayed.
3. Select “Link to Reflector.”
The Link to Reflector screen is displayed.
4. Select the Reflector that you want to link to.

4. Select “Direct Input.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Link to Reflector” and

“REF030CL” are displayed in “TO.”

5. Push D-pad to move the cursor, and select the

reflector type, reflector number, or module letter.

5. Hold down [PTT] to link to the Reflector.

5-15
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Connecting to a reflector

D
DUsing a reflector D
DRequesting repeater information
1. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT]. When you send the repeater information command,
•• The TO SELECT screen is displayed. an ID message is sent back.
2. Select “Reflector.”
The REFLETOR screen is displayed. 1. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
3. Select “Use Reflector.” •• The TO SELECT screen is displayed.
2. Select “Reflector.”
•• The REFLECTOR screen is displayed.
3. Select “Repeater Information.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Use Reflector” and

“CQCQCQ” are displayed in “TO.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Repeater

Information” and “I” are displayed in “TO.”

4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.

D
DReflector Echo testing
To confirm that your signal is correctly getting into the 4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit the repeater
repeater, you can transmit a short message as a trial. Information command.
After releasing [PTT], your message will be played back. 5. Release [PTT] to hear the repeater ID message.
1. Push D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push [ENT].
•• The TO SELECT screen is displayed.
2. Select “Reflector.”
The REFLECTOR screen is displayed.
3. Select “Echo Test.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Echo Test” and “E”

are displayed in “TO.”

4. Hold down [PTT] and speak into the microphone.

5. Release [PTT] to hear your message.

5-16
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Message operation
You can save up to 5 short messages in the D
DTransmitting a message
transceiver’s memory to transmit in the DV mode.
You can transmit a preset TX message by pushing
Each message can be up to 20 characters.
[PTT] in the DV mode. First, select a TX message which
D
DEntering a TX message also turns ON the Message Transmission function.
[MENU] > SET > My Station > TX Message
[MENU] > SET > My Station > TX Message
1. Push [MENU].
Example: E ntering “JAPAN TOM” into TX message
2. Select “My Station” in the “SET” menu.
memory number 1.
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “My Station” in the “SET” menu.

3. Select “TX Message.”

4. Select a TX Message memory number.

LLTo not transmit any message, select “OFF.”

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK]. LLInformation
6. Select “Edit.” •• The message is transmitted with your voice signal.
•• The message is transmitted each time you push [PTT].
•• When continuously transmitting, the selected TX
message is transmitted every 30 seconds.

TIP: RX call sign and message display

As the default, the received call sign and message
are automatically displayed and scrolled.
7. Enter a message of up to 20 characters. To not display and scroll them, set RX Call Sign to
“OFF.”
([MENU] > SET > Display > RX Call Sign)

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

8. After entering, push [ENT].
•• Returns to the TX MESSAGE screen.

5-17
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Message operation

D
DDeleting a TX message
[MENU] > SET > My Station > TX Message
Example: D eleting the entered TX message “JAPAN
TOM” from TX message memory number 1.
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “My Station” in the “SET” menu.

3. Select “TX Message.”

4. Select a TX Message memory number.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Clear.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

7. Select “YES.”

•• The entered message is cleared.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5-18
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Viewing received call signs

When you receive a DV call, the calling station and the repeater call signs are saved. Up to 50 calls can be saved.
When you receive the 51st call, the oldest call history is deleted.
LLEven if the transceiver is turned OFF, the RX records are not deleted.

D
DViewing the call signs on the RX History screen
1. Hold down [CD] for 1 second. 3. Push [ENT].
2. Select an RX history memory to view the details. •• Displays the RX history detail screen.
LLPush D-pad() to view the content.
LLInformation
•• The first page of the “RX HISTORY” screen displays the
latest RX record of the MAIN band. The second page or later <1st page>
displays the record according to the received date and time, •• CALLER: Displays the caller station’s call
regardless of the band it was received on. sign*2, and any note entered after
•• The RX history number, the caller’s name (or call the call sign.
sign), destination, RX message, RX date and time, •• CALLED: Displays the called station’s call
“GW,” and “GPS” are displayed.
sign*2.
•• “GW” is displayed when the Gateway call is received.
LL“CQCQCQ” is displayed when receiving
•• “GPS” is displayed when the received call includes
a Local Area call or Gateway call.
position data.
•• “UP” is displayed when the repeater uplink signal is
received.
•• In the Quick Menu window, you can select the
following options.
RX>CS: Temporarily enters the received
call sign into “TO.”
Call Sign Display: The received data is displayed in
the Call Sign Display mode. <2nd page>
Name Display: The received data is displayed in •• RX RPT1: Displays the repeater’s call sign*2
the Name Display mode. that was accessed by the caller
Delete: Deletes the selected RX history.
station.
Delete All: Deletes all RX history.
If the received call was a Gateway
call, this item displays the gateway
call sign of the repeater you
RX HISTORY screen (RX01) received the call from.
•• RX RPT2: Displays the repeater’s call sign*2
D-PRS TX
Displayed when you received the call from.
format icon*1
a Gateway call is LLThe operating frequency is displayed instead of the
Called station above items when the call was not through a repeater
received. (“CQCQCQ” is (Simplex call).
History displayed if you

number received a CQ call.)

RX message

Caller station*2 Received date

LLA note may be and time
displayed after “/.”

*1 The displayed icon differs, depending on the D-PRS

TX format.
GPS: Position OBJ: Object
ITEM: Item WX: Weather
*2 When a name is entered in the MEMORY, the name
is also displayed.

5-19
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Viewing the received call signs

DDView the call signs on the RX History screen TIP: To delete RX HISTORY data
<3rd page> On the RX HISTORY or the detail screen, push
•• RX MESSAGE: Displays any message [QUICK], then select “Delete” or “Delete All.”
included in the received call if
entered.
•• RX TIME: Displays the date and time
the call was received.

TIP: “RX RPT1” setting may differ, depending on the

way the call was made.

<4 ~ 6th page> Example 1: When a Local area call is received.

Displays position data of the caller station. If a
received signal has no data, then no position data JM
1
JM1ZLK
calling you...
call ZLK
is displayed. ing
you
...

RXRPT2 RXRPT1
CALLER

CALLED ZLK .
JM1 g you..
callin

YOUR STATION

Example 2: When a Gateway call is received.

JM1ZLK calling from
JP1YIU port A...
JM RXRPT2
JP 1ZLK
1Y
IU callin
por g
t A from
... GW
RXRPT1
INTERNET

CALLED
g fro
m CALLER
callin ...
ZLK A
JM1 IU port
Y
JP1

YOUR STATION

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5-20
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

BK mode communication
The Break-in (BK) function enables you to break into a 4. Select “BK.”
conversation, where the 2 stations are communicating
with Digital Call Sign squelch (DSQL) enabled.
LLThe BK function is automatically turned OFF when you
turn OFF the transceiver.
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > BK
1. While 2 stations are communicating in the DV
mode, hold down [RX→CS] for 1 second.
5. Select “ON.”
•• After releasing [RX→CS], the calling station’s
call sign or the repeater’s call sign is set to “TO”
(Destination).
•• Beeps sound, and the calling station’s call sign is
announced.
LLWhen a call sign is not received correctly, error beeps
sound, and no call sign is set.
2. Push [MENU].
3. Select “DV Set” in the SET menu. 6. Push [MENU].

•• Returns to the Standby screen and “BK” is displayed.

7. When both stations are in standby, push [PTT] to
transmit.
LL“BK” blinks when receiving a Break-in call.
LLTo cancel the BK mode, select “OFF” in step 5, or
turn OFF the transceiver.

How to use Break-in?

While using the Digital Call Sign squelch (DSQL), the squelch never opens (no audio is heard) even if a call is
received, unless the call is addressed to your call sign.
However, when a call including the “BK ON” signal (break-in call) is received, the squelch opens, and audio is
heard even if the call is addressed to another station.

Station C calling to Station A with “BK OFF” Station C calling to Station A with “BK ON”
Station A and B are communicating using the Digital Station A and B are communicating using the Digital
Call Sign squelch. Call Sign squelch.

Station A Station B Station A Station B

Station C Station C

Station B does not hear that Station B also hears that

Station C is calling Station A. Station C is calling Station A.

5-21
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

EMR communication
The Enhanced Monitor Request (EMR) communication D
DAdjusting the EMR AF level
function can be used in only the DV mode. Using the
The audio output level when an EMR signal is
EMR function, no call sign setting is necessary.
received is adjustable between 0 and 39.
LLInformation When an EMR signal is received, the audio is heard at
•• All transceivers that can receive an EMR signal the preset level, or the [VOL] control level, whichever
automatically receive the signal. DO NOT use this function is higher.
except in the case of an emergency. To turn OFF the setting, set to “0.”
•• When an EMR signal is received, the audio (voice) is
heard at the set level, even if the volume setting level is
set to the minimum level. [MENU] > SET > DV Set > EMR AF Level
•• The EMR communication function is automatically turned 1. Push [MENU].
OFF when you turn OFF the transceiver. 2. Select “DV Set” in the “SET” menu.

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > EMR

Example: Transmitting from the “Hirano” repeater
using the EMR function.
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “DV Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “EMR AF Level.”

3. Select “EMR.”

4. Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the EMR audio output level

between 0 (OFF) and 39 (maximum). (Default: 19)

4. Select “ON.”

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5. Push [MENU].

•• Returns to the Standby screen and “EMR” is displayed.

Push [PTT].
•• The TX/RX indicator lights red while transmitting.
LL“EMR” blinks on a station that receives the EMR
signal. The audio (voice) is heard at the set level, or
the [VOL] level, whichever is higher.
LLTo cancel the EMR mode, select “OFF” in step 4, or
turn OFF the transceiver.

5-22
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic DV detection
If you receive an FM signal while in the DV mode, the [MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Auto Detect
“DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink to indicate the
1. Push [MENU].
received signal is FM.
2. Select “DV Set” in the “SET” menu.
When the DV Auto Detect function is ON, the
transceiver automatically selects the FM mode to
monitor it temporarily. (Default: OFF)
LLRegardless of this setting, the “DV” and “FM” icons
alternately blink if you receive an FM signal while in the
DV mode.
NOTE: When Digital Call Sign squelch (DSQL),
or Digital Code squelch (CSQL) is selected, the 3. Select “DV Auto Detect.”
transceiver does not receive FM signals, even if this
function is ON. You can silently wait for calls from
others.

4. Select “ON.”

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

LLWhen an FM signal is received while in the DV mode,
the “DV” and “FM” icons sequentially blink, and the
transceiver receives the signal in the FM mode.

When an FM signal is received while in the DV mode

DV Auto Detect function: OFF DV Auto Detect function: ON
The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, but the The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, and the
audio cannot be heard. audio can be heard.

Thanks for
● ● ● the nice QSO!

The icons The icons

alternately blink. alternately blink.
You cannot hear You can hear the
the audio. audio!

5-23
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

When a call addressed to your call sign is received,
the Automatic Reply function sounds beeps and
automatically replies with your call sign.
(Default: OFF)
Depending on the setting, a recorded message may
be transmitted with the call sign.
NOTE: The Automatic Reply function temporarily
sets the received call sign to “TO” (destination).

TIP: To record the Auto Reply message

You can record the Auto Reply message. See page
5-25 for details.
([MENU] > RECORD > DV Auto Replay)

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Auto Reply

1. Push [MENU]. 5. Push [MENU].
2. Select “DV Set” in the “SET” menu. •• Returns to the Standby screen, and displays “ .”
LLWhen “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the Automatic
Reply function is automatically turned OFF when you
push [PTT].
When “Position” is selected, the Automatic Reply
function remains ON, when you push [PTT].

Example: After receiving a call from “JM1ZLK,” beeps

sound, and the transceiver automatically
3. Select “Auto Reply.”
sends a reply call.

4. Select an option.
The “TO” setting does not change, but “UR:
JM1ZLK (Caller’s call sign)” is displayed.

•• ON: Automatically replies with your own

call sign. (No audio reply is sent)
•• Voice: Automatically replies with your own
call sign and an Auto Reply message
recorded on the microSD card (up to
10 seconds).
LLIf no SD card is inserted, or no message
is recorded, replies with only your own
call sign (No audio reply is sent).
•• Position: Automatically replies with your call
sign and your position data using the
internal GPS receiver.
LLWhen “GPS Select” is set to “OFF” or
“Manual,” the internal GPS receiver is
temporarily turned ON.

5-24
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

D
DRecording an Auto Reply message The DV AUTO REPLY screen
You can record the Auto Reply message that is saved
on a microSD card to reply to the call with your voice.
NOTE: Confirm a microSD card is in the card slot.

[MENU] > RECORD > DV Auto Reply

1. Push [MENU].
Audio level is Adjust the Mic gain so that the REC
2. Select “DV Auto Reply” in the RECORD menu.
displayed Level does not reach to this range
([MENU] > SET > Function > MIC Gain
(Internal), MIC Gain (External))

TIP: To delete the recorded message, push [QUICK]

on the DV AUTO REPLY screen, then select “Clear.”

3. Hold down [PTT] to start a recording, release it to
stop recording.

LLInformation
•• The maximum recording time is 10 seconds.
•• Hold the microphone 5 ~ 10 cm (2 ~ 4 inches) from your
mouth, then speak at your normal voice level.
•• Only 1 message can be recorded. The current contents are
overwritten if you record again.
4. To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU] twice.

5-25
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

D
DAuto Position Reply function
1. A call addressed to your
When you receive a call addressed to your call sign, call sign.
but are in a situation that makes it difficult to operate
the transceiver, this function sounds beeps and
automatically replies with your call sign and transmits
your position data. JA3YUA
Destination
2. Your position data (ID-52A/E)
After receiving the Auto Position Reply call, the is automatically
Your station transmitted.
caller’s position data is displayed in a window.
LLIcom transceivers* display the position after receiving a
call.
LLYou can turn OFF the caller’s position display. (p. 12-26) 3. After receiving, the position data
([MENU] > SET > Display > Reply Position Display) is displayed on the
* Except for the ID-31A/E, IC-9100, ID-880H/E880, IC- destination’s transceiver.
80AD/E80D, IC-92AD/E92D, IC-2820H/E2820, ID-800H,
IC-91AD/E91, IC-V82, IC-U82

Scrolls your call sign or the TX message.

LLYour status message may be displayed.

When no valid position data is received

After receiving a call addressed to your call sign,

the internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned ON
for approximately 5 minutes to receive your position
data, even if “GPS Select” is set to “OFF” or “Manual.”
Then, the transceiver automatically replies with a
message, as described below.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
LLWhen the internal GPS receiver is temporarily ON, and
valid position data is received, the transceiver transmits
your position data if a call addressed to your call sign is TIP:
received again. •• The position data is transmitted according to the
“GPS TX Mode.” (p. 6-12)
Reply message list when no valid position data is •• When the “GPS TX Mode” settings are incorrect
received for the Automatic Reply function, the transceiver
Message Status automatically corrects them to reply to a call.
•• When “GPS TX Mode” is set to “OFF,” “D-PRS” is
When no position data is
No Position automatically selected.
received.
2 minutes or more has passed
Old Position
since receiving position data.
The internal GPS receiver is
temporarily turned ON but has
No Posi & GPS Start
not received your position data
yet.
The internal GPS receiver is
temporarily turned ON, and 2
Old Posi & GPS Start
minutes or more have passed
since receiving position data.

5-26
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Data communication
In addition to digital voice communication, you can D
DData communication application
send and receive data. Also, you can use the DV Fast
Data function for data communication (p. 5-28) setting
To send and receive data, a USB cable (purchase Set the communication software, as shown below.
separately or user supplied), and a data
communication software (user supplied) are required. •• Port: The COM port number that is used by the
ID-52A/E *
NOTE: “DV Data TX” is set to “Auto” as the •• Baud rate: Your desired speed
default setting. When you enter text data into your •• Data: 8 bit
communication software, the transceiver may •• Parity: none
automatically transmit it, depending on the software •• Stop: 1 bit
and the software settings. •• Flow control: Xon/Xoff
* Depending on the PC environment, the COM port number
used by the ID-52A/E may be higher than 5. In that case,
D
DConnection use an application that can set it to higher than 5.
Connect the transceiver to your PC using a USB
cable, as shown below.
D
DSending data
1. Set your call sign, the destination call sign, and
Tranceiver the repeater call sign.
2. Follow the instructions of your data communication
application software.
3. When you enter text data into your communication
PC software, the transceiver may automatically
To the transmit it, depending on the software and its
To the
[USB] port settings.
USB port
LLWhen “DV Data TX” is set to “PTT,” pushing [PTT]
transmits the text data and a voice signal. (p. 12-10)
([MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Data TX)
USB cable LLBefore transmitting the data, the transceiver sends a
carrier sense signal approximately 500 milliseconds.
NOTE: Before you start sending data, BE SURE to NOTE:
set the following items. •• Only ASCII code can be used for data
•• Set “GPS Out (USB Port)” to “OFF ” communication.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Out (USB Port))
•• The transceiver also has the Message
•• Set “USB Connect” to “Serialport,”
Transmission function that transmits up to 20
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)
•• Set “USB Serialport Function” to “DV Data.” characters. (p. 5-17)
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Serialport Function) •• Depending on the combination of your PC and
your communication software, some data may be
lost.
•• While receiving voice or data through the Internet,
some packets may be lost due to network error
(poor data throughput performance) In such a
case, an “L” is displayed on the screen to indicate
that packet loss has occurred.

5-27
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Data communication About the display type

D Fast Data function
DDV You can enlarge the characters, such as the repeater
name displayed by the DR function.
To send data using the DV Fast Data function, follow
LLThis setting can be used only when the Single band
the instructions below. display is selected.
LLDV Fast Data communication can be made by only the
1. Display the Main screen that you want to change
following Icom transceivers:
(As of November 2021) in the Single band display.
•• IC-705
•• IC-9700
•• ID-31A/E PLUS
•• ID-4100A/E
•• ID-5100A/E*
•• ID-51A/E (PLUS, PLUS2, 50th Anniversary model)
•• ID-52A/E
* Usable only when firmware versions CPU M 1.10,
S 1.00, C 1.10, and DSP 1.10 or later are installed.
2. Push [QUICK].
NOTE: If you want to send GPS data to other 3. Select “Display Type.”
transceivers that can receive only slow-speed data,
set “GPS Data Speed” to “Slow.” (p. 6-4)
([MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Fast Data > GPS Data Speed)

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Fast Data > Fast Data
1. Push [MENU]
2. Select “DV Set” in the “SET” menu.
4. Select “Large.”

3. Select “DV Fast Data.”

4. Select “Fast Data.” •• The characters, such as the repeater name, are
displayed larger.

5. Select “ON.”

•• To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5-28
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Digital squelch functions

The digital squelch opens only when you receive a D
DThe Digital Code Squelch setting
signal addressed to your own call sign or a signal that
1. Push [QUICK].
includes a matching digital code.
2. Select “D.SQL.”
You can silently wait for calls from others.
You can independently set the Digital squelch function
in the VFO mode, Memory mode, Call channel mode,
or DR function.

D
DThe Digital Call Sign squelch setting
1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “D.SQL.” 3. Select “CSQL.”

3. Select “DSQL.”

“DSQL” is displayed.

4. Push [MENU].
5. Select “DUP/TONE...” in the “SET” menu.
“DSQL” is displayed. 6. Select “Digital Code.”

•• When the received signal includes a matching call

sign, the squelch opens, and you can hear the audio.
LLWhen the received signal does not include a 7. Rotate [DIAL] to select a digital code.
matching call sign, the digital call sign squelch does
not open. However, the S/RF meter displays the
received signal level.
NOTE:
•• DO NOT use the Digital Call Sign Squelch
function when communicating with 2 or more
stations, because it opens only when receiving a
signal addressed to your call sign. Therefore the •• When the received signal includes a matching code,
function can be used when communicating with the squelch opens, and you can hear the audio.
only 1 station. LLWhen the received signal does not include a matching
•• Even if the squelch is closed by the Digital Call code, the digital code squelch does not open.
Sign Squelch function, you can receive data in the However, the S/RF meter displays the signal level.
DV mode. LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
NOTE: Even if the squelch is closed by the Digital
Code Squelch function, you can receive data in the
DV mode.

5-29
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list
You can save repeater information for quick and Example: “Hirano” repeater information
simple communication in up to 2500 repeaters
(repeater list) in up to 50 Groups.
Data must be in the repeater list to use the DR
function.
You can add and edit repeater content and groups in
the repeater list.
You can enter 4 types of frequencies into the repeater
list, as shown below:
•• DV Repeater
•• DV Simplex
•• FM Repeater
•• FM Simplex
TIP:
•• For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded
into your transceiver. However, if you do an
All Reset, the CPU deletes all setting data, the
Memory channels, and the repeater list. We
recommend that you back up the memory data to
a microSD card or save it to a PC using the CS-52
programming software.
•• The repeater list can be downloaded from the Icom
website. See “Updating the repeater list” that can
be downloaded from the Icom website about how
to update the repeater list using a microSD card.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

D
DRepeater list contents
The following contents are included in the repeater list:
•• TYPE: Communication type (p. 5-32)
•• NAME: Repeater name (p. 5-32)
•• SUB NAME: Repeater sub name (p. 5-32)
•• CALL SIGN: Repeater call sign and port letter
(p. 5-32)
•• GW CALL SIGN: Gateway repeater’s call sign and port “G”
(p. 5-32)
•• GROUP: Repeater group (p. 5-33)
•• USE (FROM): access repeater use (p. 5-33)
•• FREQUENCY: access repeater’s frequency (p. 5-33)
•• DUP: Duplex direction (p. 5-33)
•• OFFSET FREQ: Frequency offset (p. 5-33)
•• MODE: Operating mode (p. 5-34)
•• TONE: Tone setting (p. 5-34)
•• REPEATER TONE: Repeater tone (p. 5-34)
•• POSITION: Position data accuracy level (p. 5-34)
•• LATITUDE: Latitude of the repeater (p. 5-34)
•• LONGITUDE: Longitude of the repeater (p. 5-35)
•• UTC OFFSET: UTC Offset (p. 5-35)

5-30
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

This section describes how to manually enter new
repeater information into the repeater list.
The required setting items differ, depending on your
communication usage. Confirm the required items, as
shown below.
NOTE: To enter repeater information into the
repeater list, the repeater’s call sign must be entered
first.

D
DRequired items for the communication cases
Repeater list Used as an access Used as a Used as an FM
Simplex (FROM)
contents repeater destination repeater repeater
TYPE DV Repeater DV Repeater FM Repeater DV Simplex FM Simplex
NAME ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SUB NAME ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CALL SIGN ● ● ○ N/A N/A

GW CALL SIGN ● ● N/A N/A N/A

(For a Gateway call)

GROUP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USE(FROM) ● ○ ● ● ●
FREQUENCY ● ○ ● ● ●
DUP ● ○ ● N/A N/A

OFFSET FREQ ● ○ ● N/A N/A

MODE N/A N/A ○ N/A ○

TONE N/A N/A ○ N/A ○
REPEATER
TONE
N/A N/A ○ N/A ○
POSITION ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LATITUDE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LONGITUDE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
UTC OFFSET ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
●: Must be entered
○: Possible to enter
N/A: Not Applicable

5-31
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

D
DEntering new information into the repeater list
Step 1. Selecting the repeater group Step 4. Entering the repeater sub name
[MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List 1. Select “SUB NAME.”
2. Enter a sub name of up to 8 characters.
1. Push [MENU]. LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the 3. After entering, push [ENT].
MENU screen.
3. Select “Repeater List.” Step 5. Entering the repeater call sign
LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type
is set to “DV Simplex” or “FM Simplex,” go to Step
7. Changing the repeater group.
1. Select “CALL SIGN.”
2. Enter the repeater call sign of up to 8 characters,
including spaces and the node letter.

4. Select a repeater group to add a repeater to.

NOTE: BE SURE to add the repeater node letter

in the 8th digit of the call sign, according to the
•• Displays the repeater list of the selected repeater group. frequency band shown below. Note that there
are almost always different node letters between
Japanese D-STAR repeaters and repeaters in
other countries.
Cross band operation between different nodes at
the same repeater site can be made.
•• 1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)
•• 430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
5. Push [QUICK]. •• 144 MHz: C (no repeaters in Japan)
6. Select “Add.”
3. After entering, push [ENT].
Step 6. Entering the gateway repeater call sign
LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the
communication type is set to “DV Repeater.”
LLThe 8th digit in the call sign entered in Step 5.
Entering the repeater call sign is automatically
set to “G” as the gateway port, so you can skip this
•• The REPEATER LIST EDIT screen is displayed. setting and go to the next item.
Step 2. Selecting the communication type 1. Select “GW CALL SIGN.”
1. Select “TYPE.” 2. Enter a gateway repeater call sign of up to 8
2. Select the communication type. characters, including spaces.
•• DV Repeater: Repeater operation in the DV mode. LLOnly a space or “G” can be entered in the 8th digit.
•• DV Simplex: Simplex operation in the DV mode.
•• FM Repeater: Repeater operation in the FM mode.
•• FM Simplex: Simplex operation in the FM mode.
Step 3. Entering the repeater name
1. Select “NAME.”
2. Enter a name of up to 16 characters.
LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.
3. After entering, push [ENT].
3. After entering, push [ENT].
5-32
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEntering new information into the repeater list

Step 7. Changing the repeater group Step 10. Selecting the Duplex direction
LLThe repeater group that is selected in Step 1. LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type
Selecting the repeater group is displayed. You can is set to “DV Simplex” or “FM Simplex,” this item is
skip this setting and go to the next item. To change not displayed.
the group, follow the steps described below. LL“DUP–” is automatically set when the access
1. Select “GROUP.” repeater frequency is entered in Step 9. Entering
2. Select the repeater group. (01 ~ 50) the access repeater frequency. If necessary, you
can change the Duplex direction.
1. Select “DUP.”
2. Select a Duplex direction.

Step 8. S etting “USE(FROM)” to be used as an

access repeater
LLYou can use the entered repeater as an access
repeater when using the DR function. When not •• OFF: Turn the duplex function OFF.
•• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the
using as an access repeater, select “NO,” and go
receive frequency by the offset amount.
to Step 15. Selecting the position data accuracy •• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the
level. In that case, the entered repeater is not receive frequency by the offset amount.
displayed in “FROM” on the DR screen.
Step 11. Entering the frequency offset
1. Select “USE(FROM).”
2. Select “YES” to use the repeater as an access LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type
repeater. is set to “DV Simplex” or “FM Simplex,” this item is
not displayed.
LLThe offset value* is automatically set when the
access repeater frequency is entered in Step
9. Entering the access repeater frequency. If
necessary, you can change the frequency offset.
* The default value differs, depending on the transceiver
version.
1. Select “OFFSET FREQ.”
Step 9. Entering the access repeater frequency
2. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the frequency offset
1. Select “FREQUENCY.” (0.000.00 ~ 59.995.00 MHz).
2. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the repeater frequency.

LLPush D-pad() to move the cursor.

LLPush D-pad() to move the cursor. 3. After entering, push [ENT].
3. After entering, push [ENT].

5-33
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEntering new information into the repeater list

Step 12. Setting the FM mode Step 15. Selecting the position data accuracy level
LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type LLWhen the Near Repeater Search function is not
is set to “DV Repeater” or “DV Simplex,” this item is used, or the distance between your location and
not displayed. a repeater is not needed, select “OFF,” and go to
1. Select “MODE.” Step 18. Setting the UTC offset.
2. Select “FM” or “FM-N.” 1. Select “POSITION.”
2. Select the position data accuracy level.

Step 13. Setting the tone

•• None: Select when the repeater has no
LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type
position data.
is set to “DV Repeater” or “DV Simplex,” this item is
•• Approximate: Select when the entered position data
not displayed. is approximate.
1. Select “TONE.” •• Exact: Select when the entered position data
2. Select an option. is exactly correct.
Step 16. Entering the latitude
LLThis item is displayed only when Step 15.
Selecting the position data accuracy level is set
to “Approximate” or “Exact.”
1. Select “LATITUDE.”
2. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the latitude.
•• OFF: Turn OFF the Tone function.
•• TONE: Select when the repeater requires an access
tone.
•• TSQL: Select when you want to use the tone
squelch in simplex operation.
Step 14. Selecting the repeater tone frequency
LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type
LLPush D-pad() to move the cursor.
is set to “DV Repeater” or “DV Simplex,” this item is
LLTo enter a north latitude, select “N,” and to enter a
not displayed. south latitude, select “S.”
LLThis setting is required when Step 13. Setting the 3. After entering, push [ENT].
tone is set to “TONE” or “TSQL.”
1. Select “REPEATER TONE.”
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select the repeater tone
frequency, and then push [ENT].

5-34
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEntering new information into the repeater list

Step 17. Entering the longitude Step 19. Saving the repeater list
LLThis item is displayed only when Step 15. 1. Select “<<Add Write>>.”
Selecting the position data accuracy level is set •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
to “Approximate” or “Exact.” 2. Select “YES.”
1. Select “LONGITUDE.”
2. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the longitude.

•• The entered contents are saved to the repeater list,

and the display returns to the selected repeater group
LLPush D-pad() to move the cursor. screen.
LLTo enter an east longitude, select “E,” and to enter a TIP: To cancel the entered data
west longitude, select “W.”
1. Push [CLR] to display the “Cancel edit?” window.
3. After entering, push [ENT].
2. Select “YES.”
Step 18. Setting the UTC offset
LLUniversal Time Coordinated (UTC) offset is the time
difference between UTC and repeater local time.
This is a useful function to know the repeater’s local
time before you make a call. (p. 5-13)
1. Select “UTC OFFSET.”
2. Rotate [DIAL] to set the time difference between
UTC and the local time, then push [ENT]. •• Cancels the entry and returns to the selected
repeater group screen.

5-35
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list operation

D
DEditing repeater data D
DDeleting repeater data
You can edit repeater data. This is useful when [MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List
already-entered data is incorrect, has changed, or
some data needs to be added to the list. 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
[MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List MENU screen.
1. Push [MENU]. 3. Select “Repeater List.”
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
MENU screen.
3. Select “Repeater List.”

4. Select a repeater group where the repeater you

want to delete is listed.

4. Select a repeater group where the repeater you

want to edit is listed.

5. Select the repeater to be deleted, and then push

[QUICK].
6. Select “Delete.”
5. Select a repeater you want to edit, and then push
[QUICK].
6. Select “Edit.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

7. Select “YES.”

7. Select an item, and then edit it.

LLSee pages 5-32 ~ 5-35 for details.
8. After editing, select “<<Overwrite>>.”

•• The selected repeater contents are deleted from the

repeater list and return to the selected repeater group
screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
9. Select “YES.” NOTE: The currently selected repeater on the DR
screen cannot be edited or deleted. To edit or delete
the repeater, select another repeater on the DR screen.

•• The edited contents are saved to the repeater list and

return to the selected repeater group screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
5-36
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list operation

D
DRearranging the display order of the repeaters
You can move the entered repeaters to rearrange their
display order in the selected repeater group.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List
1. Push [MENU]. 8. Select the position to insert the repeater you want
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the to move the repeater above.
MENU screen.
3. Select “Repeater List.”

LLWhile moving, “DESTINATION” blinks at the top left

of the screen.
4. Select a repeater group where the repeater you
want to move is listed.

5. Select the repeater to be moved. •• The selected repeater is inserted above the
destination repeater name.
LLIf “<<Move End>>” is selected, the repeater is moved
to the bottom of the group.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Move.”

5-37
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list operation

D
DAdding new repeater information from RX History
1. Hold down [CD] for 1 second. 8. Select “YES.”
•• The RX HISTORY screen is displayed.
2. Push D-pad() to display the repeater you want to
add to the repeater list, then push [ENT].

•• The repeater contents are added to the repeater list,

and the display returns to the RX HISTORY screen.
LLTo exit the RX HISTORY screen, push [MENU].
•• Displays the RX history detail screen.
3. Push D-pad() to display “RXRPT1” and “RXRPT2.”

4. Push [QUICK].
5. Select “Add To RPT List.”

6. Select the repeater call sign that you want to add

to the repeater list.

•• Displays the REPEATER LIST EDIT screen. The

selected repeater call sign is automatically entered.
LLIf the selected repeater is already in the repeater list,
“Duplicate Call Sign” is displayed.
LLSee pages 5-32 ~ 5-35 to edit the contents.
7. Select “<<Add Write>>.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

5-38
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list operation

D
DSkip setting for the DR scan
You can set repeaters as scan skip repeaters. The
selected repeaters are skipped for faster scanning.
You can set the skip setting to all repeaters in the
selected repeater group or individual repeaters.
LLWhen a repeater is set as a skip repeater, its “USE
(FROM)” setting is automatically set to “NO.” In that
case, the repeater cannot be selected in “FROM” (access
repeater) on the DR screen.

<Individual skip setting> <Group skip setting>

[MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List 1. On the REPEATER GROUP screen, select a
repeater group, as described to the left.
1. Push [MENU]. 2. Push [QUICK], then select “SKIP All ON” to skip
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the the group’s repeaters during the DR scan.
MENU screen. LLTo cancel the skip settings in the group, select “SKIP
3. Select “Repeater List.” All OFF.”

TIP:
•• When you select “Repeater List” on the FROM SELECT
screen, you can set the skip setting as described to the
left.
•• When “FROM” is selected on the DR screen, push
[QUICK] to set the skip setting, as shown below.
4. Select a repeater group where the repeater you
set the skip setting is listed.

5. Select the repeater to be skipped, and then push

[QUICK].
6. Select “SKIP.”

LLDisplays “SKIP” in the “FROM” field.

LLDisplays “SKIP” by the selected repeater.

LLSelect “SKIP” again to cancel the skip setting.

LLSelect “SKIP All ON” to set the skip setting to all
repeaters in the group.

5-39
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list operation

D
DEntering or editing a repeater group name
[MENU] > MEMORY > Repeater List
1. Push [MENU]. 8. After entering [ENT].
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
MENU screen.
3. Select “Repeater List.”

•• Sets the entered name.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

4. Select a Repeater group that you edit the name.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

LLIf you select an already named group, the name is
overwritten.
5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Edit Name.”

7. Enter a group name of up to 16 characters.

Selectable characters and symbols

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ?
@ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

5-40
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Your Call Sign

D
DEntering Your Call Sign 9. Select “CALL SIGN.”
You can manually enter a Your (destination) Call Sign.
When a Your Call Sign is entered into “TO,” you can
make a call to the station, even if you do not know
where the station is currently located.
Up to 300 “Your Call Signs” can be entered.

[MENU] > MEMORY > Your Call Sign 10. Enter a call sign of up to 8 characters, including
Example: E
ntering “Rick/JM1ZLK” to the Your Call spaces.
Sign memory.

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
MENU screen.
3. Select “Your Call Sign.”

11. After entering, push [ENT].

12. Select “<<Add Write>>.”

4. Push [QUICK] on the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.

5. Select “Add.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

13. Select “YES.”

6. Select “NAME.”

7. Enter a station name of up to 16 characters.

•• “Rick JM1ZLK” is entered into the Your Call Sign

memory.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

8. After entering, push [ENT].

5-41
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Your Call Sign

DDEntering Your Call Sign D

DDeleting Your Call Sign
TIP: [MENU] > MEMORY > Your Call Sign
To cancel the entered call sign
1. Push [CLR] to display the “Cancel edit?” window. 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “YES” to cancel the entry and return to 2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
the YOUR CALL SIGN screen. MENU screen.
3. Select “Your Call Sign.”

4. Select a call sign you want to delete.

To edit the entered call sign

To edit the entered call sign, select “Edit” in step 5.
This is useful when already-entered data is incorrect,
has changed, or some data needs to be added to the
list.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].
5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Delete.”

•• A confirmation dialog is displayed.

7. Select “YES.”

•• The selected call sign is deleted from the Your Call Sign
list and the returns to the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
NOTE: The currently selected Your Call Sign on the
DR screen cannot be edited or deleted. To edit or
delete the Your Call Sign, select another Your Call
Sign on the DR screen
5-42
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Your Call Sign

D
DRearranging the display order of
Your Call Signs
You can move Your Call Signs to rearrange their
display order.
If the stations you often communicate with are moved
to the top of the list, it is easy to find them.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Your Call Sign
Example: Moving “Rick” above “Eddy.”
1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select the position to insert the Your Call Sign you
2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the want to move the call sign above.
MENU screen.
3. Select “Your Call Sign.”

LLWhile moving, “DESTINATION” blinks at the top left

of the screen.
4. Select a Your Call Sign to be moved.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK]. •• The selected call sign is inserted above the
6. Select “Move.” destination call sign.
LLIf “<<Move End>>” is selected, the Your Call Sign is
moved to the bottom of the group.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5-43
5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Are your settings correct?

If you make a Local Area call with a gateway repeater
still selected in “TO,” the destination repeater will be
busy while you transmit.
The stations that want to use the repeater as their
access repeater cannot access it, as shown below.

BE SURE to set CQCQCQ in “TO” on the DR screen

when you intend to make a Local Area call or finish a
Gateway call.

Example: JA3YUA wants to make a Local Area call.

CQ D-STAR Hirano, this is JA3YUA

through JP3YHH port A for a local call��
His setting is wrong!
I can’t access the repeater!

Caller INTERNET
(JA3YUA) CQ
D
JA3 -STAR
Y
is i
s
ort
A for a UA thr Hirano
loca ough , this
, th H p is
i r ano 3YH l ca
ll�� JP3YH
RH JP Hp
ort
TA ugh A
Q D-S A thro ll�� Called
C YU l ca
3 a
JA a loc
for

Hirano area Hamacho area

JA3YUA’s setting NOTE: With this setting, you can make a Local Area
call, but the destination Repeater, selected in “TO,”
is also busy while you transmit.
The stations that want to use the repeater as their
Access Repeater cannot access it.

The destination (“TO”) setting is incorrect.

Correct setting

To make a Local Area call, set the destination (“TO”)

to “CQCQCQ.” See page 5-9 for details.

5-44
Section 6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)
GPS operation features��6-2
Before starting GPS operation��6-3
DD Confirming the GPS signal receiving��6-3
GPS TX mode and TX format types��6-4
Difference between older models��6-4
When a received signal contains position data��6-5
Checking your location��6-5
DD Displaying Position Data��6-5
DD GPS POSITION screens and their meanings��6-6
DD About the RX screen��6-7
DD Setting the display type (MAIN/SUB)��6-8
DD About the Course��6-8
DD About the Grid Locator��6-9
DD Changing the GPS Memory or Alarm��6-9
DD Changing the Compass Direction��6-10
DD Saving your own or a received station’s position��6-10
Checking GPS information (Sky view screen)�� 6-11
Transmitting D-PRS data��6-12
DD D-PRS��6-12
DD Operating in the D-PRS mode��6-12
DD Displayed items��6-13
DD Setting D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base)��6-14
DD Setting D-PRS Object/Item��6-15
DD Setting D-PRS Weather��6-16
DD Weather station transmission��6-17
DD Application setting��6-17
DD Confirming the weather data input��6-17
DD About the weather data content��6-17
DD Displaying your location using mapping software��6-18
Transmitting NMEA data��6-20
DD Setting the GPS data sentence��6-20
DD Setting a GPS message��6-21
GPS Automatic Transmission��6-21
GPS Memory��6-22
DD Adding a GPS Memory��6-22
DD Entering the GPS Memory group name��6-25
DD Deleting the GPS Memory��6-25
DD Rearranging the display order of the GPS data��6-26
GPS Alarm��6-27
DD Setting the GPS Alarm function to All Memories (all GPS Memories)��6-28
DD Setting the GPS Alarm function to RX (a caller station)��6-29
GPS items��6-30

6-1
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS operation features

D-PRS Extension function (p. 6-4)
The D-PRS Extension function enables you to transmit or receive Object, Item, and Weather information in addition
to Position data. With this extension, you can simultaneously transmit or receive earthquake information, traffic
accident information, emergency information, or weather information, and so on, along with voice audio in the DV
mode.

GPS Memory (p. 6-22)

You can enter up to 300 GPS Memories in the transceiver. By adding destination position information in a GPS
Memory, you can effectively use the GPS Alarm function. The position information that you acquired can also be
entered in a GPS Memory.

Editing GPS Memories using

a PC is easier than using
I can enter the location information
the transceiver!
of the mountain I’m going to hike!

GPS Alarm function (p. 6-27)

When a target station comes into the set alarm area, or when you approach an entered GPS Memory position, the
function can sound an alarm. With this function, you can know that you are approaching the destination.

GOAL!

I’m almost there!

GPS Logger function

The GPS Logger function enables you to save the position data from a GPS receiver into a microSD card as a log.
If you use this GPS Logger while driving, you can check your driving history on a mapping software program.

I can track my GPS log in a

mapping software program.
This is how I traveled...interesting!

See “Using the GPS Logger function” that can be downloaded from the Icom website about using the function.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
6-2
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Before starting GPS operation

NOTE: Before using the GPS function, read “IMPORTANT NOTES” about the GPS receiver in the Basic manual.

The transceiver has a built-in internal GPS receiver. NOTE: Continuously using the Internal GPS mode
The GPS receiver’s position data can be received in causes the transceiver’s battery to be exhausted
any mode. quickly. Turn ON the Power Save mode if needed.
NOTE: Transmit or receive position data that can be See page 6-30 for details.
transmitted in only the DV mode. ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option
> Power Save)

D
DConfirming the GPS signal receiving TIP: To prolong the battery life in the GPS mode
Confirm the GPS receiver is receiving satellite signals. Manually update your location with the received GPS
The GPS icon blinks when searching for satellites. data.
→ → →
The GPS icon stops blinking when the minimum 1. Set “GPS Select” to “ON,” and receive your
number of satellites needed is found. position from the internal GPS receiver.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
2. Open the MANUAL POSITION screen, and then
push [QUICK].
LLInformation ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set> Manual Position)
•• It may take only a few seconds to receive, or it may take 3. Select “Capture From GPS.”
a few minutes, depending on your operating environment.
If you have difficulties receiving, we recommend that you
try a different position.
•• When “GPS Select” is set to “Manual,” the icon is not
displayed.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

•• Your current position is now memorized and

displayed on the MANUAL POSITION screen.
4. Set “GPS Select” to “Manual.”
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

6-3
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS TX mode and TX format types

GPS position data has 2 TX modes, D-PRS, and Example: When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS
NMEA. Moreover, with the D-PRS mode data, 5 Position (Mobile)
position formats, Position (Mobile station/Base ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Position)
station), Object, Item, and Weather, are selectable.

D-PRS is a function that simultaneously sends position data received from the
D-PRS
internal GPS receiver, using the slow speed data packet space, along with voice.
A station operating from a vehicle, or other position, away from its normal base
Position (Mobile)
position.
Position (Base) A station operating at home or in a building.
Transmitting Object data such as earthquake information, satellite tracking
Object information, and so on.
An Object contains a time stamp.
Transmitting Item data such as a traffic accident, lighthouse, antenna, or DV
Item access point position, and so on.
An Item does not contain a time stamp.
Weather A station transmitting weather information received from a weather device.
A station transmitting position data (NMEA0183) received from the internal GPS
NMEA
receiver.

Difference between older models

(As of November 2021)
•• The GPS TX mode, “GPS (DV-G)” and “GPS-A (DV-A),” are now called as “NMEA (DV-G)” and “D-PRS (DVA).”
GPS (DV-G) → NMEA (DV-G)
GPS-A (DV-A) → D-PRS (DV-A)
•• For users who have one of the following models:
ID-800H, IC-91AD/E91, IC-U82, IC-V82, IC-7100, ID-51A/E, ID-31A/E, IC-9100, IC-80AD/E80D, ID-880H/E880,
IC-92AD/E92D, IC-2820H/E2820
When you receive a D-PRS position (Base), Object, Item, or Weather information, their data is not displayed.
•• Only the ID-51A/E PLUS, ID-51A/E PLUS2, ID-31A/E PLUS, ID-5100A/E, ID-4100A/E, IC-R30, IC-9700, IC-705,
and ID-52A/E can receive Power, Height, Gain, and Directivity data.
•• For users who have one of the following models:
IC-9100, IC-80AD/E80D, ID-880H/E880, IC-92AD/E92D, IC-U82, IC-V82
If you transmit with the Altitude setting ON, the character string is included in a comment on the products that
cannot display the altitude.
•• Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the GPS message to conventional digital transceivers (IC-2820H/
E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD/E91, IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H). The GSV sentence is incompatible with them.
They will not display GPS messages properly if sent as a GSV sentence from the ID-52A/E.

6-4
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

When a received signal Checking your location

contains position data
You can check your current location.
When a received signal contains position data, the This section is described using received position data.
caller’s position data is displayed on the RX position LLThe screens are just examples.
screen.
See to the right for details.
D
DDisplaying Position Data
1. Push [QUICK].
Example: W
hen the signal from JM1ZLK contains 2. Select “GPS Position.”
position data. •• Opens the GPS POSITION screen.
3. Rotate [DIAL].
•• Changes between the MY (My position), RX
(Received position), MEM (GPS Memory position), or
ALM (GPS Alarm position) screen.

When you receive the signal, the RX

position data is displayed in the RX position
window.
The displayed icon depends on the type of
screen (MY, RX, MEM, or ALM).
After a few seconds, the window
disappears.
4. To close the GPS POSITION screen, push
[MENU].

NOTE: Latitude, longitude, and altitude data may

RX position icon differ, depending on your received GPS signal.

TIP:
•• If you transmit with the GPS POSITION screen open,
When the received signal contains position the screen closes. To check the location, push [QUICK],
and then select “GPS Position” while transmitting.
data, the RX position icon is displayed, as
•• On the MY screen or RX screen, you can enter the
shown above. displayed position information in a GPS Memory by
pushing [QUICK] and select “GPS Memory.”
LLYou can turn OFF the caller’s position data display. •• See page 6-22 about the GPS Memory function and
([MENU] > SET > Display > RX Position Display) see page 6-27 about the GPS Alarm function.
LLYou can turn OFF the RX position icon indication.
([MENU] > SET > Display > RX Position Indicator)

6-5
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

D
DGPS POSITION screens and their meanings
LLInformation Example for the GPS POSITION screens:
•• Pushing to [QUICK], change the compass direction.
(p. 6-10) GPS Memory:
•• About the Course (p. 6-8) Tokyo Skytree
•• About the Grid Locator (p. 6-9)
251 mi
GPS Alarm:
248 mi Tokyo Big Sight
107 mi

Your station Call station

Course: 0 degrees (D-PRS: mobile)
Speed: 2.3 mph Course: 95 degrees
MY screen (Your position information) Speed: 5.6 mph

When “GPS Select” is set to “Manual,” the compass

heading and course direction are not displayed.
(p. 6-30) ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select) MEM screen (GPS Memory’s information)

Your course Latitude

heading Longitude
Course direction Grid Locator
Direction from your
Altitude location
Speed
Received
time

*
RX screen (Callerʼs position information)
Depending on the callerʼs GPS TX Mode and TX
format, the displayed itemʼs meanings may differ, and ALM screen (GPS Alarm’s information)
some data may not be displayed. (p. 6-7)
Example: The caller stationʼs GPS TX Mode is “D-PRS,”
and its TX format is “Position (Mobile).”

Distance from your

position
Direction from
your location

D-PRS symbol
Distance from
*
your location

Caller’s call sign with SSID

Caller’s Course
direction Caller’s speed * When a name is not entered in the GPS Memory
Time the caller channel, date and time are displayed instead of the
acquired the name. You can change the GPS Memory or GPS
position data Alarm in the GPS POSITION screen in the Quick
Menu window. (p. 6-9)
6-6
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

D
DAbout the RX screen

TX format:
D-PRS

Position (Mobile) Position (Base)

Moving symbol For a mobile station, Base station symbol For a base station, Output
Course and Speed power, Antenna height,
are displayed. Antenna gain, and Antenna
direction are displayed.

Object Item

Time that the caller LLFor an Item station, Time is not displayed.
sent the Object’s data.

Weather

Time that the caller

acquired the weather data.

LLCall sign is displayed with an SSID.

LLWhen the Object or Item is disabled, “KILLED” is displayed.

TX format:
NMEA

LLA symbol or SSID is not displayed when the TX format is NMEA.

6-7
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

D
DSetting the display type (MAIN/SUB) D
DAbout the Course
You can select the display type of the RX screen. The course displayed on the GPS POSITION screens
is indicated in degrees.
1. Push [QUICK] when the RX screen is displayed.
2. Select “Display Select (MAIN/SUB).” 0°

315° N 45°

270° W E 90°

3. Select the item you want to switch.

225° S 135°

180°

•• Latest (MAIN/SUB): Displays the target station’s

latest location information
regardless of the MAIN band or
the SUB band.
•• MAIN: Displays only the latest location
information of the target station
received in the MAIN band.
•• SUB: Displays only the latest location
information of the target station
received in the SUB band.

6-8
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

D
DAbout the Grid Locator D
DChanging the GPS Memory or Alarm
Grid Locator (GL) is a position compressed into a 6 You can change the GPS Memory or GPS Alarm in
character code, calculated by the longitude and the the GPS POSITION screen.
latitude.
The locator is simply calculated by dividing the earth’s 1. While selecting the MEM screen or ALM screen,
surface into squares. push [QUICK].
It is used to find the location of a transceiver station. 2. Select “GPS Memory Select,” or select “Alarm
Select.”

Field
MEM screen

PM74SO
Square Subsquare

The grid locator map of Japan

140°
44 54 64 74 84 94 04 14 24
ALM screen
PN
43

QN
53 63 73 83 93 03 13 23
42 52 62 72 82 92 02 12 22
41 51 61 71 81 91 01 11 21
40 50
49 59
60 70 80 90 00 10 20 40°
69 79 89 99 09 19 29
48 58 68 78 88 98 08 18 28
47

PM
57 67 77 87 97 07 17 27
46 56 66 76

QM
86 96 06 16 26
45 55 65 75 85 95 05 15 25
44 54 64 74 84 94 04 14 24
43 53 63 73 83 93 03 13 23
42 52 62 72 82 92 02 12 22
41 51 61 71 81
3. Select the GPS Memory or GPS Alarm to display
91 01 11 21

on the GPS POSITION screen.

LLAdding or editing a GPS Memory: p. 6-22
LLSetting the GPS Alarm: p. 6-27

6-9
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

D Changing the Compass Direction DSaving your own or a received
You can set the compass direction to Heading station’s position
Up, North Up, or South Up� You can save the position of your station or the
position of the caller station�
1� While displaying the GPS POSITION screen, push The transceiver has 300 GPS memories, and the
[QUICK]� memories can be assigned to one of 27 banks, A ~ Z,
2� Select “Compass Direction�” and (No Group)�

1� Select the screen that you want to save�

L To save your own position: MY screen
L To save a received position: RX screen
2� Push [QUICK]�
3� Select “Add To GPS Memory�”

3� Select the compass direction�

L See pages 6-22 ~ 6-24 for entering details�

4� Select “<<Add Write>>�”

Heading Up North Up South Up

The top is always The top is The top is L To select the destination group to be saved, select
your course direction� always north� always south� “GROUP�”
5� Select “YES�”

• Saves the data in the GPS Memory, then returns to

the GPS POSITION screen�
6� To close the GPS POSITION screen, push
[MENU]�

TIP: The position is saved in the selected group in

the GPS MEMORY EDIT screen� (Step 4)
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory)

6-10
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking GPS information (Sky view screen)

This screen is used to view GPS satellite information
when the GPS icon does not stop blinking for a long
time.
The GPS Information displays the quantity, signal
power, and position of the satellites.
The sky view screen displays the position of the
satellites. The screen also displays each satellite’s
direction, elevation angle, satellite numbers, and their
receiving signal strength status.
Tracking
1. Push [QUICK].
satellite
2. Select “GPS Information.” Sky view screen quantity

Altitude
Latitude
Longitude

About the display Satellite

•• : Untracking satellite. number 19’s
Untracking satellite
•• : Tracking satellite with a weak signal, shown signal is weak.
by the satellite number.
•• : Tracking satellite with a strong signal, shown
by the satellite number. Satellite Elevation angle
•• SAT: The quantity of tracking satellites. number 06’s 0 degree line
•• Altitude: The altitude of your station. The altitude is signal is strong.
only displayed when 4 or more satellites Elevation angle
are tracked. When 3 or less satellites are 30 degree line
tracked, “------ft” is displayed.
Elevation angle
•• Longitude/Latitude:
60 degree line
Longitude and Latitude of your station.
Elevation angle
90 degree line
TIP: The following satellite number is assigned to (Zenith)
the each satellite system.
•• GPS: 01 ~ 32
•• SBAS: 33 ~ 71
•• GLONASS: 65 ~ 96 The image of satellite number 06
•• QZSS: 193 ~ 202
Elevation angle
90 degree line (Zenith) Elevation angle
3. To close the GPS INFORMATION screen, push 60 degree line
[MENU]. Elevation angle
E 30 degree line
N
Elevation angle
0 degree line
Satellite
number 06

S
W

6-11
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

When D-PRS is selected as the GPS TX mode, you NOTE:
can transmit D-PRS data� • If “GPS select” is set to “Manual,” the manually entered
When operating in the D-PRS mode, the following position data in “Manual Position” is changed to the
codes are transmitted to the PC� D-PRS data format to transmit�
D-PRS code is based on APRS® code� ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
(APRS®: Automatic Packet Reporting System) • Note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other setting than
“OFF,” it is transmitted according to the set time�
DD-PRS ([MENU] > GPS > GPS Auto TX)
D-STAR Packet Reporting System (D-PRS) is a mode
that simultaneously sends position data received from
the internal GPS receiver, using the slow speed data
packet space, along with voice audio in the DV mode�
In the Analog mode, you can transmit or receive only
voice audio or data at one time� However, a D-PRS
capable radio can transmit or receive message data
or GPS position data simultaneously when voice is
being transmitted or received� An I-GATE is required
to send position data to the APRS server�

The image of D-PRS

D-STAR Repeater
Voice, Messages, and
D-PRS positions D-PRS positions
APRS server

Information from
an APRS network

Voice, Messages, and

D-PRS positions
D-PRS
positions
PC

JA3YUA-Z

<Simplex>
INTERNET

You can check the

Voice, Messages, and position on a map site!
D-PRS positions
D-PRS positions
Voice, Messages, and
D-PRS positions
I-GATE

DOperating in the D-PRS mode TIP: In the D-PRS mode, you can transmit
To transmit D-PRS data, follow the steps below� earthquake or weather information, in addition to
For more details, see the pages listed along with the position data�
steps� ([MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > TX Format)
1� Enter “MY” (Your own call sign)� TX format of D-PRS
(Basic manual D-STAR GUIDE) • Position (Mobile/Base):
2� Confirm the GPS signal is receiving� Used to transmit position data�
3� Set GPS TX mode to “D-PRS�” (p� 6-14) • Object: Used to transmit specific position data�
4� Set TX information� (Contains a time stamp�)
L You must set “SSID” and “Symbol�” • Item: Used to transmit specific position data�
([MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS) (Does not contain a time stamp�)
↓ • Weather: Used to transmit weather information�
Complete! You can transmit in the D-PRS mode�

6-12
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DDisplayed items
Depending on the TX format, the setting items and displayed order of the items differ.

D-PRS
Position Object Item

Data extension: Power/Height/Gain/Directivity

Data extension: Course/Speed

Data extension: OFF

Weather
Mobile

Base

Unproto Address ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Comment ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Altitude ✓ ✓
Object Name/
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Item Name
Data Type ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Position information
(Latitude/Longitude/ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Altitude)
Data Extension ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Course ✓ ✓
Speed ✓ ✓
Power ✓ ✓ ✓
Height ✓ ✓ ✓
Gain ✓ ✓ ✓
Directivity ✓ ✓ ✓
Symbol ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SSID ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Time stamp ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓: Displayed

6-13
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DSetting D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base)
Set to transmit as a D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base).
LLSee page 6-31 for details.
1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS 9. Setting the Data Extension
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS Set the data extension of your station’s information.
LLSet “Data Extension” to “Course/Speed” to transmit as a
2. Checking the Unproto Address mobile station.
LLSet “Data Extension” to “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity” to
You should use the default address, and editing is not transmit as a base station.
recommended.
3. Setting the TX format to “Position” When you set “Data Extension” to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity”:
Set “TX Format” to “Position.”
9-1. Setting the TX power
4. Selecting the Symbol
Select the TX power level of the base station to
Select the Symbol that indicates your operating
transmit along with the position data.
situation.
LLSee page 6-31 to directly enter the Symbol. 9-2. Setting the antenna height
5. Selecting the SSID Select the height of the base station’s antenna to
transmit along with the position data.
To help identify your station’s type, select the APRS®
(Automatic Packet Reporting System) based SSID 9-3. Setting the antenna gain
after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 6-32) Select the gain of the base station’s antenna to
6. Entering a comment transmit along with the position data.
Enter a comment, and transmit it with the D-PRS 9-4. Setting the antenna directivity
position data. Select the direction the base station’s antenna was
LLThe number of characters you can enter differs, pointing to transmit along with the position data.
depending on the data extension and altitude settings.
(p. 6-32) 10. Exiting the POSITION screen
1. Select “Comment.”
To close the POSITION screen, push [MENU].
2. Push [QUICK]. •• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
3. Select “Edit.” displayed.
4. Enter a comment.
5. After entering, push [ENT].
6. Push [ENT] again.

7. Setting the Time Stamp

Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
(p. 6-32)
8. Setting the Altitude
Set whether or not to transmit the altitude data
acquired from the GPS receiver. (p. 6-33)
NOTE: If you transmit with the altitude setting ON,
the character string is included in a comment on the
products that cannot display the altitude. (p. 6-4)

6-14
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DSetting D-PRS Object/Item
Set to transmit as a D-PRS Object or Item.
LLSee page 6-31 for details.
1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS 9. Setting the Data Extension
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS Set the data extension of an Object or Item’s
information.
2. Checking the Unproto Address LLSet “Data Extension” to “Course/Speed” to transmit as a
mobile station.
You should use the default address, and editing is not LLSet “Data Extension” to “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity” to
recommended. transmit as a base station.
3. Setting the TX format to “Object” or “Item”
When you set “Data Extension” to
Set “TX Format” to “Object” or “Item.”
“Course/Speed”:
4. Entering Object name or Item name
9-1. Entering the Course
Enter an Object or Item name, such as event information or
location. Enter the Object or Item’s course when the station
moves.
5. Selecting Data type
9-2. Entering the Speed
Set the Object or Item’s status.
LLFor example, if you want to transmit finished event Enter the Object or Item’s speed.
information as an Object, set the Date type to “Killed
Object.” When you set “Data Extension” to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity”:
6. Setting the Symbol
Select the Symbol that indicates an Object or Item. 9-3. Setting the TX power
LLSee page 6-31 to directly enter the Symbol. Select the Object or Item’s TX power level if the
station is a repeater, node, access point, and so on,
7. Entering a comment
and an antenna is installed.
Enter a comment to transmit as an Object or Item.
LLThe number of characters you can enter differs, 9-4. Setting the antenna height
depending on the data extension and altitude settings. Select the height of the Object or Item’s antenna.
(pp. 6-34, 6-36)
1. Select “Comment.” 9-5. Setting the antenna gain
2. Push [QUICK]. Select the gain of the Object or Item antenna.
3. Select “Edit.” 9-6. Setting the antenna directivity
4. Enter a comment.
5. After entering, push [ENT]. Select the direction the base Object or Item’s
6. Push [ENT] again. antenna is pointing.

10. Selecting the SSID

8. Entering the Position data To help identify your station’s type, select the APRS®
Enter the position data of an Object or Item. (Automatic Packet Reporting System) based SSID
LLFor example, if you want to transmit traffic accident after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 6-32)
information as an Item, enter the position data where the
accident happened.
11. Setting the Time Stamp
If the position data is in the GPS memory, you can easily LLThis item is displayed when the TX format is
set the position data from the memory. “Object.”
Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
(p. 6-35)
12. Exiting the OBJECT or ITEM screen
To close the OBJECT or ITEM screen, push [MENU].
•• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
displayed.

6-15
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DSetting D-PRS Weather
Set to transmit as a D-PRS Weather station.
LLSee page 6-31 for details.
1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS

2. Checking the Unproto Address

You should use the default address, and editing is not
recommended.
3. Setting the TX format to “Weather”
Set “TX Format” to “Weather.”
4. Selecting the Symbol
Select the Symbol that indicates the weather station.
LLSee page 6-31 to directly enter the Symbol.
5. Selecting the SSID
To help identify your station’s type, select the APRS®
(Automatic Packet Reporting System) based SSID
after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 6-32)
6. Entering a comment
Enter a comment to transmit as a D-PRS Weather
station.
1. Select “Comment.”
2. Push [QUICK].
3. Select “Edit.”
4. Enter a comment.
5. After entering, push [ENT].
6. Push [ENT] again.

7. Setting the Time Stamp

Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
(p. 6-38)
8. Exiting the WEATHER screen
To close the WEATHER screen, push [MENU].
•• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
displayed.

6-16
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DWeather station transmission D
DConfirming the weather data input
When you transmit as a weather station, you should You can confirm whether or not the weather data is
set the weather station’s settings and input the input into the [USB] port.
weather data into the [USB] port. 1. Set “GPS TX Mode” to “D-PRS,” and “TX format”
You can input the weather data from a third party’s to “Weather.” (p. 6-16)
weather device by converting it to the APRS weather 2. On the Standby screen, push [QUICK].
format in your PC or microcomputer. 3. Select “Weather Information.”
LLDisplays the WEATHER INFORMATION screen if the
After completing the weather station’s settings and weather data is entered correctly.
inputting the weather data, you can transmit as a LLWhen the weather information is displayed, you can
weather station. transmit as a weather station. If “-” is displayed on the
screen, the weather data is not entered. In that case,
check the entered data settings.
NOTE: To input the Weather data into the [USB]
port, set “USB Connect” to “Serialport,” and set “USB
Serialport function” to “DV Data.”
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Serialport function)
If the weather data is not input into the [USB] port,
you cannot transmit as a weather station.

PC
D
DAbout the weather data content
The weather data should be input according to the
USB cable format (based on the APRS® Weather Data), shown
(User supplied) below.
or
Example:
To the [USB] 220/004 g005 t077 r000 p000 P000 h50 b09900 End code
port Weather
device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Microcomputer No. Item Value Unit
1 Wind direction 000 to 360 °
D
DApplication setting 2 Wind speed 000 to 999 mph
Configure the communication software as follows. 3 Gust speed g000 to g999 mph
•• Port: The COM port number that is used by the
transceiver.* Temperature t-99 to t-01, °F
4
•• Baud rate: Your desired speed t000 to t999
•• Data: 8 bit 5 Rainfall r000 to r999*1 inch
•• Parity: none 6 Rainfall (24 Hours) p000 to p999*1 inch
•• Start: 1 bit
•• Stop: 1 bit 7 Rainfall (Midnight) P000 to P999*1 inch
•• Flow control: none Humidity h00, h01 to h99 %
8
* Depending on the PC environment, the COM port number (h00 indicates 100%.)
used by the ID-52A/E may be higher than 5. Barometric pressure b00000 to b99999*2 hPa,
In that case, use an application that can set it to higher 9
mb
than 5.
*1 The last two digits indicate the one decimal place and the
two decimal places.
*2 The last digit indicates the one decimal place.
LLIf you have no data, enter a space or “.” (period) instead
of a number.
(Example: “.../...g...t077r000p...P...h50b.....”)
LLEnter <CR>, <LF>, or <CR><LF> for an end code.

6-17
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

D
DDisplaying your location using mapping software
If you transmit to an I-GATE station, and then enter You can check it on the Internet!
the call sign information on the Internet map website,
the selected symbol is displayed. PC Smartphone

Example: Check your location on the APRS.fi site.

1. Display a free APRS® related map site on the

Internet. (Example: http://aprs.fi/ )
2. Enter your call sign in the “Track callsign” field.
3. Click <Search>.
•• The icon (D-PRS symbol) is displayed on the map site. Enter your call sign,
and then click <Search>.

← Your symbol and your call sign

6-18
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

TIP:
D-PRS data content
D-PRS data content are shown below�

DPosition (Mobile)
(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API52,DSTAR*:/002338h3437�38N/13534�29E>090/002/A=000012ID-52 OP�SATOH
q w e r u i !0 !1 !3 !4
o o
DPosition (Base)

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API52,DSTAR*:/002338h3437�38N/13534�29E-PHG5132OP�SATOH
q w e r u i !0 !2 !4
o o
DObject

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API52,DSTAR:;HAM FESTA012345z3437�38N\13534�29Eh2021�11�01 am10-pm4

q w e r t y u i !0 !4
o o
DItem

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API52,DSTAR*:)REPEATER!3454�00N/13536�00ErPHG5132439�39MHｚDV RPT JP3YHH A

q w e r t y i !0 !2 !4
o o

DWeather

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API52,DSTAR*:/012345z3454�00N/13536�00E_220/004g005t077r000p000P000h50b09900
q w e r u i !0 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2
o o

!2Data Extension(PHG codes)

qCall sign
PHG codes definitions
wSSID
eUnproto Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
rD-PRS Data type First: Power 0 1 4 9 16 25 36 49 64 81 (W)
/ Position with time stamp Second: Height 10 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 (feet)
! Position without time stamp
Third: Gain 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (dB)
; Object
Fourth: Directivity omni 45°NE 90°E 135°SE 180°S 225°SW 270°W 315°NW 360°N − −
) Item
tObject Name/Item Name
yData Type !3Altitude !9Rainfall (24 Hours)
* Live Object −99999 ~ 999999 feet 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
! Live Item !4Comment @0Rainfall (Midnight)
_ Killed Object/Killed Item !5Wind direction/Wind speed 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
uTime Stamp (UTC) Wind direction:0 ~ 360° @1Humidity
h Hour Minute Second Wind speed: 0 ~ 999 mph 1 ~ 99%, 00=100%
z Day Hour Minute !6Gust speed @2Barometric pressure
iLatitude 0 ~ 999 mph 0�0 ~ 9999�9 hPa
oSymbol !7Temperature
!0Longitude −99 ~ 999ƒ
!1Data Extension (Course/Speed) !8Rainfall
Course:0 ~ 360° 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
Speed:0 ~ 999 knots

6-19
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting NMEA data

Set a GPS sentence to transmit GPS data in the DV
mode.

D
DSetting the GPS data sentence
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA > GPS Sentence

1. Push [MENU]. 6. Repeat step 5 to set the GPS sentence.

2. Select “GPS TX Mode” in the “GPS” menu. LLUp to 4 GPS sentences can be set at a time.
3. Select “NMEA.” 7. To close the “GPS Sentence” screen, push [MENU].
4. Select “GPS Sentence.” •• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
displayed.

NOTE:
•• Set “GSV Sentence” to “OFF” when sending the GPS
message to conventional digital transceivers. (p. 6-4)
•• If “GPS Select” is set to “Manual,” the transceiver
automatically sets the NMEA sentence and transmits
5. Select the GPS Sentence. it along with the manually entered position data in
“Manual Position.”
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position)
•• Note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other option
than “OFF,” data is automatically transmitted according
to the set time.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Auto TX)
LLIf “GPS Select” is set to “OFF” or “Manual,” the GPS
•• Displays “ ” when the sentence is set to ON. Automatic Transmission function is not activated.
LLThe selectable GPS sentences are RMC, GGA, GLL,
VTG, GSA, and GSV. The GGA sentence is set to
ON as the default GPS sentence.
LLTo reset to the default setting, push [QUICK], and
then select “Default.”

Contents of GPS sentence

Lon Date 2D COG SOG
Sentence Alt UTC Status Others
/Lat (UTC) /3D (True) (knot)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Magnetic variation, Mode Indicator
Number of satellites in use, HDOP,
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Geoidal separation, Age of Differential
GPS data, Differential reference station ID
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator
COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h),
VTG ✔ ✔
Mode Indicator
PRN number of satellites used in
GSA ✔ ✔
solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence
number, Total number of satellites in
GSV
view, Satellite information (ID, Elevation,
Azimuth, S/N)

6-20
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting NMEA data GPS Automatic Transmission

D
DSetting a GPS message NOTE:
Enter a GPS message to be transmitted with the •• Use the GPS Automatic Transmission function in only
position data. the Simplex mode.
•• Using the function through a Repeater may interfere
with other communications.
Example: Entering “OSAKA Suzuki”
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA > You can set the GPS Automatic Transmission function
GPS Message in the following menu.
1. Push [MENU]. [MENU] > GPS > GPS Auto TX
2. Select “GPS TX Mode” in the “GPS” menu.
3. Select “NMEA.”
4. Select “GPS Message.” If you set this function, GPS data is automatically
transmitted according to the set time.
LLThis function is not activated if your call sign (MY) is not
entered in the transceiver.
LLIf “GPS Select” is set to “OFF” or “Manual,” this function is
not activated.
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Edit.”

7. Enter a GPS message of up to 20 characters.

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

8. After entering, push [ENT].

•• You can confirm the entered message.

9. To close the “GPS Message” screen, push
[MENU].

6-21
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory
You can add GPS data to GPS Memory. GPS Memory Group names are just
You can add your own position, other station’s example.
position, or any entered positions manually. (No Group)
You can save up to 300 GPS memories, and
conveniently saved in up to 27 groups, from A ~ Z and A: ICOM Icom Osaka HC
“(No Group).” The A to Z groups can also be named.
Icom America

B: HAM festa Tokyo Big Sight

C: Railroad Dayton Hamventio

Friedrichshafen

D
DAdding a GPS Memory
Example: Add “HOME” into (No Group).
1. Adding a GPS Memory and entering the edit mode 2. Entering a GPS Memory name
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory 1. Select “NAME.”
2. Enter a GPS Memory name of up to 16
1. Push [MENU]. characters. (Example: HOME)
2. Select “GPS Memory” in the “GPS” menu.

•• The previously added GPS Memories are displayed LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.
on the GPS MEMORY screen. 3. After entering, push [ENT].
3. Select “(No Group).”

4. Push [QUICK].
5. Select “Add.”

•• The GPS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed.

TIP: To edit the previously saved GPS Memory,
select “Edit” in step 5. You can enter the content in
the same way as described above.

6-22
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DDAdding a GPS Memory (Continued)

3. Entering the GPS Memory date 5. Entering the GPS Memory latitude
1. Select “DATE.” 1. Select “LATITUDE.”
2. Push D-pad() to move the cursor. 2. Push D-pad() to move the cursor.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the date. 3. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the latitude.
LLSet between 2000/01/02 and 2099/12/30.
LLInformation
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the date. •• Set between 0°00.00′ and 90°00.00′.
•• You can change the unit.
([MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit >
Latitude/Longitude)
•• To enter a north latitude, select “N,” and to enter a
south latitude, select “S.”
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the latitude.

5. After entering, push [ENT].

4. Entering the GPS Memory time

1. Select “TIME.”
2. Push D-pad() to move the cursor.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the date.
LLSet between 00:00:00 and 23:59:59.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the time. 6. Entering the GPS Memory longitude
1. Select “LONGITUDE.”
2. Push D-pad() to move the cursor.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the longitude.
LLInformation
•• Set between 0°00.00′ and 180°00.00′.
•• You can change the unit.
([MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit >
5. After entering, push [ENT]. Latitude/Longitude)
•• To enter an east longitude, select “E,” and to enter a
west longitude, select “W.”
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the longitude.

5. After entering, push [ENT].

6-23
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DDAdding a GPS Memory (Continued)

7. Entering the GPS Memory altitude 9. Writing the GPS Memory
1. Select “ALTITUDE.” 1. Select “<<Add Write>>.”
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select plus or minus.
3. Push D-pad() to move the cursor.
4. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the altitude.
LLSet between –32808 and +32808 feet.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the altitude.

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

LLIf you edit a previously added GPS Memory, select
“<<Overwrite>>.”
2. Select “YES.”

6. After entering, push [ENT].

8. Selecting a GPS Memory group

1. Select “GROUP.”

•• The data is added to the GPS memory, and then the

selected GPS Memory group screen is displayed.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
TIP:
To view the entered content:
Select the GPS Memory channel. Rotate [DIAL] to
2. Select the group between (No Group) and A ~ Z.
check the whole content.

LLYou can save up to 300 Memories in each group. To cancel the entered data:
While entering or editing the GPS Memory, push [CLR]
to display the confirmation dialog, as shown below.
Select “YES” to cancel entering, and the display
returns to the GPS Memory group screen.

6-24
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

D
DEntering the GPS Memory group name D
DDeleting the GPS Memory
You can enter a name for each GPS Memory group. You can delete the GPS Memories.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory There are 2 ways to delete the Memories:
•• Deletes all GPS Memory in a group.
1. Push [MENU]. •• Deletes a specific GPS Memory.
2. Select “GPS Memory” in the “GPS” menu.
NOTE: Deleted GPS Memories cannot be restored.

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory

Example: Deleting all in Group E.
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “GPS Memory” in the “GPS” menu.
3. Select the group where the GPS Memory to delete
3. Select the group that the name to be entered. is saved.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

LLDO NOT push [ENT]. 4. Push [QUICK].
4. Push [QUICK]. 5. Select “Delete All In Group.”
5. Select “Edit Name.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

6. Enter a group name of up to 16 characters. 6. Select “YES.”

•• All GPS Memory in the selected group are deleted,

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters. then returns to the GPS MEMORY screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
7. After entering, push [ENT].
TIP: Deleting a specific GPS Memory
1. Select the GPS Memory to delete, then push
[QUICK].
2. Select “Delete.”

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

3. Select “YES.”
•• The selected GPS Memory is deleted.

6-25
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

D
DRearranging the display order of the GPS data
You can move the entered GPS Memories to
rearrange their display order in the selected GPS
Memory group.
LLTo move the GPS Memory out of their assigned Memory
group, select the Memory group in the GPS MEMORY
EDIT screen, and then save.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory
1. Push [MENU]. 6. Select the position to insert the Memory you want
2. Select “GPS Memory” in the “GPS” menu. to move.

3. Select the group where the GPS Memory you

want to move is saved.

•• The selected Memory is inserted above the

destination Memory name.
4. Select the GPS Memory to move, and then push
LLIf you select “<<Move End>>,” the Memory is moved
[QUICK]. to the bottom of the group.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5. Select “Move.”

•• “DESTINATION” blinks at the top left of the screen.

6-26
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm
The transceiver can sound a GPS Alarm when a target station or position comes into the alarm area.
This function can be set to a caller station, all GPS Memories, a selected GPS Memory group, or a selected GPS
Memory.

Alarm Area (Group) (Setting plural stations)

When “All Memories” or a GPS Memory group is selected:

N
Point A 0�25′ 0�25′

0�25′

Your location
0�25′

Point B

Point C
Sounds 3 beeps�

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Setting specific station)

When a specific GPS Memory is selected:

Extended range N
approximately 1 km, 1094 Y

Limited range
approximately 500 m, 547 Y

Your location

Target
station

Sounds a beep� Sounds 3 beeps�

6-27
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm

D
DSetting the GPS Alarm function to All Memories (all GPS Memories)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm
1. Push [MENU]. LLInformation
2. Select “GPS Alarm” in the “GPS” menu. •• When either one of the group’s stations enters the set
range, the alarm sounds 3 times.
•• When the transceiver sounds a GPS Alarm, “GPS
ALARM” is displayed on the screen, and “ ” blinks.
See the illustration below.
•• To cancel the GPS Alarm function, select “OFF” in step
4 to the left.
Blinks
3. Select “Alarm Select.”

GPS ALARM

“GPS ALARM” is displayed on the screen

4. Select “Group.” and the alarm sounds 3 times.
TIP: When selecting “All Memories,” “No Group,” or
a GPS Memory group (A ~ Z) in step 5 to the left,
you also have to set “Alarm Area (Group)” to use the
GPS Alarm function. (p. 6-43)
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Area (Group))

5. Select “All Memories.”

•• Returns to the GPS ALARM screen.

LLIf you want to set the alarm to a specific GPS
Memory group, select “(No Group)” or “A” to “Z.”
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

6-28
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm

D
DSetting the GPS Alarm function to RX (a caller station)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm
1. Push [MENU]. LLInformation
2. Select “GPS Alarm” in the “GPS” menu. •• When a station with its GPS Alarm set enters within an
approximate 1 kilometer (1094 yards) range, it sounds
once. When it enters within an approximate 500
meters (547 yards) range, the alarm sounds 3 times.
•• When the transceiver sounds a GPS Alarm, “GPS
ALARM” is displayed on the screen, and “ ” blinks.
See the illustration below.
•• To cancel the GPS Alarm function, select “OFF” in step
3. Select “Alarm Select.” 4 to the left.

Blinks

GPS ALARM

4. Select “RX.”

“GPS ALARM” is displayed on the screen

and the alarm sounds 3 times.
NOTE: Even if “RX” is selected in step 4, when the
received signal has no position data, the GPS Alarm
does not sound.

TIP: When selecting “RX” or a specific GPS Memory

in step 4 to the left, you also have to set the “Alarm
Area (RX/Memory)” to use the GPS Alarm function.
(p. 6-44)
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Area (RX/Memory))

•• Returns to the GPS ALARM screen.

LLIf you want to set the alarm to a specific GPS
Memory group, select “Memory” and then select a
GPS Memory in a GPS Memory group.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

6-29
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items
NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA transceiver version. The default settings may differ,
depending on your transceiver version. To return to your transceiver version’s default settings, push [QUICK] and
select “Default.”

GPS Select (Default: ON) Power Save (Default: Auto)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select [MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option >
Selects how to capture position data. Power Save
LLWhen “GPS Time Correct” is set to “Auto,” set this item to Selects whether or not to use the Power Save function
“ON” to automatically correct the time by a received GPS for the internal GPS receiver.
sentence. (p. 12-30) When this function is ON, and if the GPS receiver
•• OFF: A GPS receiver is not used. does not receive signals from a satellite for 5 minutes,
•• ON: Position data of the internal GPS receiver the function turns OFF the GPS receiver for this set
is used for the GPS functions. period of time.
•• Manual: Manually enter the current Latitude, •• OFF: The GPS receiver is always turned ON.
Longitude, and Altitude in “Manual •• 1, 2, 4, 8min:
Position.” When the receiver cannot receive signals
SBAS (Default: OFF) from a satellite for 5 minutes, the GPS
receiver is turned OFF for the selected
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option > SBAS period of time. (1, 2, 4, or 8 minutes).
Turns the SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation After this period, the receiver resumes
System) function ON or OFF. receiving.
LLWhen turning ON this function, the GPS position accuracy •• Auto: When the receiver cannot receive signals
can be improved, but the transceiver’s battery is quickly from a satellite for 5 minutes, the GPS
exhausted. receiver is turned OFF for 1 minute.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. After this period, the receiver resumes
•• ON: Turns ON the function. receiving. The Power Save interval time
GLONASS (Default: OFF) extends to 2, 4, and then 8 minutes
when receiving no signals for another 5
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option > GLONASS minutes, respectively.
Selects whether or not to use the data from Satellite Information Out
the GLONASS (GLObal’naya NAvigatsionnaya (Default: GPS/QZSS/GLONASS)
Sputnikovaya Sistema) satellites.
LLWhen turning ON this function, the GPS position accuracy [MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option >
can be improved, but the transceiver’s battery is quickly Satellite Information Out
exhausted. Selects whether or not to output the data from the
•• OFF: Does not use the data from the QZSS (Quasi-Zenith Satellite System) satellites and
GLONASS satellites. the GLONASS satellites.
•• ON: Uses the data from the GLONASS •• GPS/QZSS/GLONASS:
satellites. Outputs the data from the GPS satellites,
the QZSS satellites, and the GLONASS
satellites.
•• GPS Only: Outputs the data from only the GPS
satellites.
Manual Position
(Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
LONGITUDE:0°00.00′W, ALTITUDE: ------ft)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position
Manually enter the latitude, longitude, and altitude of
your current position.
LLYou can capture position data from the GPS receiver if
“Capture From GPS” is selected.

6-30
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Out (USB Port) (Default: OFF) Symbol (Default: Person)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Out (USB Port) [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
Selects whether or not to output the position TX Format > Position > Symbol
information to the USB port. Selects the symbol that indicates your operating
•• OFF: Does not send the position information to situation. The selected symbol channel’s symbols (1 ~
the USB port. 4) are transmitted with position data.
•• ON: Send the position information to the USB
port. <Editing a symbol with a 2 character symbol code>
1. Select a symbol channel.
GPS TX Mode (Default: OFF)
LLDO NOT push [ENT].
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode 2. Push [QUICK].
3. Select “Edit Symbol.”
Selects a GPS transmission mode to send GPS
4. Push [QUICK].
position data while in the DV mode.
5. Select “Direct Input.”
•• OFF: Does not transmit GPS data.
6. Rotate [DIAL] to edit the first digit.
•• D-PRS: Transmits GPS data in the D-PRS format.
7. Push D-pad() to select the second digit.
•• NMEA: Transmits GPS data in the NMEA format.
8. Rotate [DIAL] to edit the second digit.
Unproto Address (Default: API52,DSTAR*)
Selectable characters and symbols
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > <For the first digit> /, \, 0 to 9, A to Z
Unproto Address
<For the second digit> A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! “ #
Displays an unproto address of up to 56 alphanumeric $%&’()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}˜
characters.
9. After editing, push [ENT].
NOTE: You should use the default address, and •• Sets the symbol into the symbol channel selected in
editing is not recommended. step 1.

<Selecting a preset symbol>

1. Select a symbol channel.
LLDO NOT push [ENT].
2. Push [QUICK].
3. Select “Edit Symbol.”
4. Select a symbol.
•• Sets the symbol into the symbol channel selected in
step 1.

6-31
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

SSID (Default: ---) Comment

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Position > SSID TX Format > Position > Comment
Selects an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS
sign, to show your operating style to other stations. position data.
LLThe SSID’s additional methods differ, depending on You can enter up to four comments.
whether the call sign includes a space or not. The number of characters you can enter differs,
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.” depending on the Data Extension and Altitude settings.
LLIf no text is entered after space, space will
be deleted, and space is not converted to Characters
“-.” Data Extension Altitude entered
Example: J A3YUA → JA3YUA (maximum)
JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-A OFF OFF 43 (Default)
•• (-0): No SSID is added. OFF ON 35
LLIf a call sign includes a space, any text or
digit after space will be deleted. Course/Speed OFF 36
Example: J A3YUA → JA3YUA Course/Speed ON 28
JA3YUA A → JA3YUA Power/Height/Gain/Directivity OFF 36
•• -1~-15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity ON 28
LLExample: S
SID is “-9.”
JA3YUA → JA3YUA-9 The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment
JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-9 range. Note that the characters that exceed the range
•• -A~-Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign. will not be transmitted.
LLExample: S
SID is “-Z.”
JA3YUA → JA3YUA-Z
JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-Z

TIP: About the SSID

According to a common guideline, to help identify a
station’s type, designated call sign SSIDs are used
in D-PRS (or APRS®). Transmittable comment range display
The guideline may be changed when the (Example: up to 28 characters)
infrastructure environment, such as a product or
network, is changed. Check the latest guideline Time Stamp (Default: OFF)
in the web site related to D-PRS and APRS® and [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
correctly set. TX Format > Position > Time Stamp
http://aprs.org/aprs11/SSIDs.txt
Selects the transmitting time stamp type.
The time stamp is transmitted with the position
data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated) time is used.
LLWhen your position is manually set, time stamp data is
not transmitted.
•• OFF: Does not transmit the time information.
•• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day,
Hour, and Minute format.
•• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour,
Minute, and Second format.

6-32
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Altitude (Default: OFF) Height (Default: 10ft)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Position > Altitude TX Format > Position > Height
Selects whether or not to transmit altitude data with Selects the height of the base station’s antenna to
the position data in the D-PRS mode. transmit along with the position data.
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
settings. •• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
•• OFF: No altitude data is transmitted. 5120 feet.*
•• ON: Transmits altitude data with position data. * If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12,
24, 49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters.
Data Extension (Default: OFF)
Gain (Default: 0dB)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Position > Data Extension [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed TX Format > Position > Gain
data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the Selects the gain of the base station’s antenna to
position data in the D-PRS mode. transmit along with the position data.
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
settings. •• Select between 0 and 9 dB.
•• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
•• Course/Speed: Directivity (Default: Omni)
Transmits the course and speed data [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
with the position data. TX Format > Position > Directivity
LLThe course and speed data are not transmitted
when your location is manually set. Selects the direction the base station’s antenna was
LLWhen transmitting with this setting, your pointing to transmit along with the position data.
station is regarded as a mobile station. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
•• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity: “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
Transmits the TX power level, height, •• Select Omni, 45° NE, 90° E, 135° SE, 180°S, 225°
antenna gain, antenna direction, and SW, 270° W, 315° NW, or 360° N.
position data. Object Name
LLThe Power, Height, Gain, and Directivity
data are transmitted even if your location is [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
manually set. TX Format > Object > Object Name
LLWhen transmitting with this setting, your
station is regarded as a base station.
Sets an Object’s name of up to 9 characters.

Power (Default: 0W) Data Type (Default: Live Item)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Position > Power TX Format > Object > Data Type

Selects the TX power level of the base station to Selects the Object’s status.
transmit along with the position data. •• Live Item: The Item station is valid.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to •• Killed Item: The Item station is invalid.
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.” Symbol (Default: Transceiver)
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Object > Symbol
The symbol is an icon that indicates the Object’s
means of transportation or location. The saved symbol
is transmitted along with the position data while in the
D-PRS mode.
LLSee page 6-31 for details of editing a symbol.

6-33
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Comment Position
(Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > LONGITUDE:0°00.00′W, ALTITUDE: ------ft)
TX Format > Object > Comment
Enters a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
position data. TX Format > Object > Position
You can enter up to four comments. Displays the position information of the Object.
The number of characters you can enter differs, Push [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu window shown
depending on the Data Extension and Altitude settings. below.
Characters
Data Extension Altitude entered
(maximum)
OFF — 43 (Default)
OFF Entered 35
Course/Speed — 36
Course/Speed Entered 28 TIP: When you select “Capture From GPS” or “Set
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity — 36 From GPS Memory,” you can capture the position
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity Entered 28 from the GPS or set the Item’s position from the
GPS memory.
The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment
range. Please note that the characters that exceed the Entering the position information manually
range will not be transmitted. 1. Select “Edit” on the Quick Menu window.
•• The POSITION EDIT screen is displayed.
2. Select “LATITUDE.”
3. Enter a latitude.
LLSelect “N/S” to switch the north latitude and the
southern latitude.
4. Select [ENT].
5. Select “LONGITUDE.”
Transmittable comment range display 6. Enter a longitude.
(Example: up to 28 characters) LLSelect “E/W” to switch the east longitude and the
west longitude.
7. Select [ENT].
8. Select “ALTITUDE.”
9. Enter an altitude.
LLAfter entering, select [+/−] to switch “+” and “−.”
10. Select [ENT].
11. Select “<<Write>>.”
12. Select “YES.”
•• The position information is entered.

6-34
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Data Extension (Default: OFF) Gain (Default: 0dB)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Object > Data Extension TX Format > Object > Gain
Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed Selects the gain of the Object’s antenna to transmit
data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the along with the position data.
position data in the D-PRS mode. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” •• Select between 0 and 9 dB.
settings.
Directivity (Default: Omni)
•• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
•• Course/Speed: [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
Transmits the course and speed data TX Format > Object > Directivity
with the position data.
Selects the direction the Object’s antenna was
•• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity:
pointing to transmit along with the position data.
Transmits the TX power level, height,
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
antenna gain, antenna direction, and “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
position data. •• Select Omni, 45° NE, 90° E, 135° SE, 180°S, 225°
Course (Default: 0°) SW, 270° W, 315° NW, or 360° N.

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > SSID (Default: ---)
TX Format > Object > Course [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
Sets the Object’s course to between 0° and 360° TX Format > Object > SSID
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
Selects an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call
“Course/Speed.”
sign, to show your operating style to other stations.
Speed (Default: 0mph) LLThe SSID’s additional methods differ, depending on
whether the call sign includes a space or not.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > LLSee page 6-32 for details of the SSID.
TX Format > Object > Speed •• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
Sets the Object’s speed to between 0 and 1150 mph.* •• (-0): No SSID is added.
* If the Speed unit is set to “km/h,” set to between 0 to •• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call
1850 km/h, or set to “knots,” set to between 0 and sign.
999 knots. •• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to sign.
“Course/Speed.”
Time Stamp (Default: OFF)
Power (Default: 0W)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > TX Format > Object > Time Stamp
TX Format > Object > Power Selects the transmitting time stamp type.
Selects the TX power level of Object to transmit along The time stamp is transmitted with the position
with the position data. data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to Coordinated) time is used.
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.” LLWhen your position is manually set, time stamp data is
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W. not transmitted.
Height (Default: 10ft) •• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day,
Hour, and Minute format.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > •• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour,
TX Format > Object > Height Minute, and Second format.
Selects the height of the Object’s antenna to transmit
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
5120 feet.*
* If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12,
24, 49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters. 6-35
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Item Name Position

(Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > LONGITUDE:0°00.00′W, ALTITUDE: ------ft)
TX Format > Item > Item Name
Sets the Item station’s name of up to 9 characters. [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Position
Data Type (Default: Live Item)
Displays the position information of the Item.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > Push [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu window shown
TX Format > Item > Data Type below.
Selects the Item station’s status.
•• Live Item: The Item station is valid.
•• Killed Item: The Item station is invalid.
Symbol (Default: Transceiver)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Symbol
TIP: When you select “Capture From GPS” or “Set From
Selects the symbol that indicates the Item’s means GPS Memory,” you can capture the position from the
of transportation or location. The selected symbol GPS or set the Item’s position from the GPS memory.
channel’s symbols are transmitted with position data
while in the D-PRS mode. LLSee page 6-34 when you want to enter the position
LLSee page 6-31 for details of editing a symbol. information manually.

Comment Data Extension (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Comment TX Format > Item > Data Extension
Enters a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed
position data. data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the
The number of characters you can enter differs, position data in the D-PRS mode.
depending on the Data Extension and Altitude settings. LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment”
differs, depending on the settings.
Characters •• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
Data Extension Altitude entered •• Course/Speed:
(maximum) Transmits the course and speed data
OFF — 43 (Default) with the position data.
OFF Entered 35 •• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity:
Transmits the TX power level, height,
Course/Speed — 36
antenna gain, antenna direction, and
Course/Speed Entered 28 position data.
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity — 36
Course (Default: 0°)
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity Entered 28
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment TX Format > Item > Course
range. Please note that the characters that exceed the
range will not be transmitted. Sets the Item’s course to between 0° and 360°
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Course/Speed.”
Speed (Default: 0°)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Speed
Sets the Item’s speed to between 0 and 1150 mph.*
Transmittable comment range display * If the Speed unit is set to “km/h,” set to between 0 to
(Example: up to 28 characters) 1850 km/h, or set to “knots,” set to between 0 and
999 knots.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Course/Speed.”
6-36
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Power (Default: 0W) SSID (Default: ---)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Power TX Format > Item > SSID
Selects the TX power level of Item, to transmit along Selects an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call
with the position data. sign, to show your operating style to other stations.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to LLThe SSID’s additional methods differ, depending on
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.” whether the call sign includes a space or not.
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W. LLSee page 6-32 for details of the SSID.
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
Height (Default: 10ft)
•• (-0): No SSID is added.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > •• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call
TX Format > Item > Height sign.
•• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call
Selects the height of the Item’s antenna to transmit
sign.
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
5120 feet.*
* If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12,
24, 49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters.
Gain (Default: 0dB)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Gain
Selects the gain of the Item’s antenna to transmit
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select between 0 and 9 dB.
Directivity (Default: Omni)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Item > Directivity
Selects the direction the Item’s antenna was pointing
to transmit along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select Omni, 45° NE, 90° E, 135° SE, 180°S, 225°
SW, 270° W, 315° NW, or 360° N.

6-37
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Symbol (Default: WX Station)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Weather > Symbol
The symbol is an icon that indicates the weather
station’s means of transportation or location.
The saved symbol is transmitted along with the
position data while in the D-PRS mode.
LLSee page 6-31 for details of editing a symbol.
SSID (Default: ---)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Weather > SSID
Selects an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call
sign, to show your operating style to other stations.
LLThe SSID’s additional methods differ, depending on
whether the call sign includes a space or not.
LLSee page 6-32 for details of the SSID.
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
•• (-0): No SSID is added.
•• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call
sign.
•• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call
sign.
Comment
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Weather > Comment
Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS
position data, up to 43 characters.
Time Stamp (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
TX Format > Weather > Time Stamp
Selects the transmitting time stamp type.
The time stamp is transmitted with the position
data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated) time is used.
•• OFF: Does not transmit the time information.
•• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day,
Hour, and Minute format.
•• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour,
Minute, and Second format.

6-38
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Sentence (Default: GGA) GPS Message

[MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA > [MENU] > GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA >
GPS Sentence GPS Message
Selects sentences to be transmitted in the GPS mode Enter a GPS message of up to 20 alphanumeric
to transmit position data. Set to between RMC, GGA, characters. (p. 6-21)
GLL, VTG, GSA, and GSV.
NOTE: When you do not want to send a message,
NOTE: Set the GSV sentence to OFF when delete the entered message.
sending the GPS message to conventional digital
transceivers. (p. 6-4) GPS Information
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them.
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Information
LLInformation Displays the GPS satellite direction, elevation angle,
•• Up to 4 GPS sentences can be set at a time. satellite number, and receiving status. (p. 6-11)
•• Displays “ ” when the sentence is set to ON.
•• “VTG,” “GSA,” and “GSV” sentences are not transmitted
when your position has been manually set.

TIP: Contents of GPS sentence

The Time Stamp is displayed based on the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.

GPS Time
Date COG SOG
Sentence Lon/Lat Alt Stamp Status 2D/3D
(UTC) (True) (knot)
(UTC)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔
VTG ✔ ✔
GSA ✔ ✔
GSV

Sentence Others
RMC Magnetic variation, Mode Indicator
Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation, Age of Differential GPS data,
GGA
Differential reference station ID
GLL Mode Indicator
VTG COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA PRN number of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of satellites in view,
GSV
Satellite information (ID, Elevation, Azimuth, S/N)

6-39
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Position RX screen (Received position data of the other station)

Depending on the caller’s TX mode or TX format, the
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Position displayed items and these meanings are different. The
Your current position, received position, GPS Memory, following lists describe the items for each category.
or GPS Alarm position information is displayed. No data is displayed when no position data is received
(p. 6-6) on your transceiver.
Rotating [DIAL] to select the MY, RX, MEM, and ALM
screens. <1. When the caller’s TX mode is NMEA>
Displays the caller’s direction from
MY screen (MY Position) Compass*
your location.
Compass* Displays your direction. Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude.
Course Displays your direction heading. Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude.
Latitude Displays your latitude. Displays the grid locator based on
Longitude Displays your longitude. GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location.
Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of your ALT Displays the caller’s altitude.
location. Displays the caller’s distance from
DST
ALT Displays your own altitude. your location.
SPEED Displays your speed over the ground. Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign.
Displays current time received from Displays the caller’s direction over
TIME COURSE
the GPS. the ground.
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed.
LLWhen “GPS Select” is set to “Manual,” the screen
displays only latitude, longitude, altitude, GL (Grid Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
locator), and time (internal clock). acquired the position data.

<2. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position

(Mobile station)>
Displays the caller’s direction from
Compass*
your location.
Displays the caller’s D-PRS
Symbol
symbol.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude.
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude.
Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude.
Displays the caller’s distance from
DST
your location.
Displays the caller’s call sign
Call sign
(with SSID).
Displays the caller’s direction over
COURSE
the ground.
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed.
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the position data.

* You can change the display type in the Quick Menu

window.
6-40
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Position (continued)

<3. W
hen the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position <4. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Object/
(Base station)> Item>
Displays the caller’s direction from Displays the Object/Item’s direction
Compass* Compass*
your location. from your location.
Displays the caller’s D-PRS Displays the Object/Item’s D-PRS
Symbol Symbol
symbol. symbol.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude. Latitude Displays the Object/Item’s latitude.
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude. Longitude Displays the Object/Item’s longitude.
Displays the grid locator based on Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of the GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location. Object/Item’s location.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude. ALT Displays the Object/Item’s altitude.
Displays the caller’s distance from Displays the Object/Item’s distance
DST DST
your location. from your location.
Displays the caller’s call sign Object/Item name Displays the Object/Item’s name.
Call sign
(with SSID). Displays the caller’s call sign
Call sign
POWER Displays the caller’s TX power level. (with SSID).
HEIGHT Displays the caller’s antenna height. Displays the Object/Item’s direction
COURSE
GAIN Displays the caller’s antenna gain. over the ground.

Displays the direction of the caller’s SPEED Displays the Object/Item’s speed.
DIRECT
antenna was pointing. Displays the Object/Item’s TX power
POWER
Displays the time that the caller level.
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the position data. Displays the Object/Item’s antenna
HEIGHT
height.
Displays the Object/Item’s antenna
GAIN
gain.
Displays the direction that the
DIRECT
Object/Item’s antenna was pointing.
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
sent the Object’s data.

LLWhen the Object or Item is disabled, “KILLED” is

displayed.

* You can change the display type in the Quick Menu

window.
6-41
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Position (continued)

<5. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Weather> MEM screen (GPS memory position)
Displays the caller’s direction from Displays GPS Memory channel’s
Compass* Compass*
your location. direction from your location.
Displays the caller’s D-PRS Displays GPS Memory channel’s
Symbol Latitude
symbol. latitude.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude. Displays GPS Memory channel’s
Longitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude. longitude.

Displays the grid locator based on Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of the GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location. GPS Memory channel.

Displays the caller’s distance from Displays GPS Memory channel’s

DST DST
your location. distance from your location.

Displays the caller’s call sign Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign GPS memory name
(with SSID). SSID).

Displays the temperature of the LLYou can change the GPS Memory in the Quick Menu
Temperature
caller station’s area. window.
Displays the humidity of the caller
Humidity ALM screen (GPS alarm position)
station’s area.
Displays the rainfall of the caller Displays GPS Alarm area’s
RAIN Compass*
station’s area. direction from your location.

Displays the wind direction of the Latitude Displays GPS Alarm area’s latitude.
WIND DIR
caller station’s area. Displays GPS Alarm area’s
Longitude
Displays the wind speed of the longitude.
WIND SPD
caller station’s area. Displays the grid locator based on
Displays the barometric pressure of GL the latitude and longitude of the
BARO GPS Alarm area.
the caller station’s area.
Displays the time that the caller Displays the GPS Alarm area’s
GPS Time Stamp DST
acquired the position data. distance from your location.
Displays “RX,” GPS memory
group name, or GPS memory
GPS Alarm
name specified for the GPS Alarm
function.

LLYou can change the GPS Alarm in the Quick Menu

window.

* You can change the display type in the Quick Menu

window.
6-42
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Memory Alarm Select (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Memory [MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Select
The transceiver has 300 GPS memories to save the Selects the target positions for the GPS Alarm
received position data, or often-used position data, function.
with an alphanumeric memory name. •• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
The channels can be divided into the “(No Group)” •• RX: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target
group and each Memory group (A to Z) for easy (the last received position) enters
Memory management. your active alarm range.
•• Group: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target
The display of the GPS MEMORY screen (positions in the GPS Memory, or the
GPS Memories not assigned to any selected GPS Memory Group) enters
(No Group)
group your active alarm range.
GPS Memories assigned to the •• Memory: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target
A ~ Z: Group Name (the entered position in the GPS
selected group.
Memory) enters your active alarm
GPS Memory Groups (A ~ Z) range.
GPS Memory Group name
GROUP NAME
(Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) Alarm Area (Group) (Default: 0.25′)

LLYou can edit the GPS Memory Group name. (p. 6-25) [MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Area (Group)
Sets the GPS active alarm range.
GPS Memories When a target enters this set active alarm range, the
GPS memory name GPS Alarm sounds, and the GPS Alarm icon blinks.
NAME
(Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) LLWhen “Alarm Select” is set to “Group,” this setting is
enabled.
DATE Saved date
TIME Saved time
Ranges differ, depending on the Latitude/
LATITUDE Saved position (latitude) Longitude unit setting.
LONGITUDE Saved position (longitude)
ALTITUDE Saved altitude •• Latitude/Longitude = ddd°mm.mm′
Ranges: 00.08′ to 59.99′ (0.01′ steps)
The group letter and the name of
GROUP •• Latitude/Longitude = ddd°mm′mm″
the group
Ranges: 00′05″ to 59′59″ (0′01″ steps)
LLWhen you save the received position data on the GPS •• Latitude/Longitude = ddd.dddd°
POSITION screen, the received station’s call sign is used Ranges: 0.0014° to 0.9999° (0.0001° steps)
as the GPS Memory name. LLPushing D-pad() moves the cursor to the tenths and
LLIn the Quick Menu window, you can edit the GPS Memory hundredths place digits, or the thousandths and ten
contents, such as the GPS Memory name. thousandths place digits.

Example:
When a target enters the active alarm range, the GPS
Alarm sounds, and the GPS alarm icon blinks.
N
Point A 0�25′ 0�25′
0�25′

Your location
0�25′

Point B

Point C
Sounds 3 beeps�

6-43
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Default: Both) GPS Logger (Default: ON)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Alarm > [MENU] > GPS > GPS Logger
Alarm Area (RX/Memory) Turns the GPS Logger function ON or OFF.
Selects the GPS active alarm range. This function logs the position, altitude, course, speed,
When a target enters the active alarm range, the GPS and number of satellites being used.
Alarm sounds, and the GPS alarm icon blinks. •• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
LLWhen “Alarm Select” is set to “RX” or “Memory,” this •• ON: The transceiver automatically logs GPS data.
setting is enabled. (p. 6-43) Once this function is turned ON, the GPS
•• Limited: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps, and data will be continuously logged until turning
the GPS Alarm icon blinks when the it OFF, even if the transceiver power is turned
target enters the 500 meters range. OFF, then ON again.
•• Extended: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps, and LLThis function requires a microSD card (User supplied).
the GPS Alarm icon blinks when the LLWhen “GPS select” is set to “OFF” or “Manual,” this
target enters the 1-kilometer range. function does not save the log.
•• Both: The transceiver sounds a beep, and TIP: The log data is saved on the microSD card. The
the GPS Alarm icon blinks when the file name is automatically created, as shown below:
target enters the 1-kilometer range •• Log start date and time: 1st November 2021 15:30:00
and sounds 3 beeps, and the icon •• Filename: 20211101_153000.csv
blinks when it enters the 500 meters
range. When the target exits the
Record Interval (Default: 10sec)
500 meters range but is still in the
1-kilometer range, the icon continues [MENU] > GPS > GPS Logger > Record Interval
to blink, but no beeps sound. Sets the GPS Logger function record interval to 1, 5,
10, 30 seconds, or 1, 5, or 10 minutes.
Example:
When a target station enters the active alarm range Record Sentence
(500 meters or 1 kilometer range, depending on the (Default: ✔ RMC/ ✔ GGA/ ✔ VTG/ ✔ GSA)
setting), the GPS Alarm sounds, and the GPS Alarm
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Logger > Record Sentence
icon blinks.
Sets the GPS Logger function record sentence to
Extended range N RMC, GGA, VTG, or GSA.
approximately 1 km, 1094 Y
•• Displays “ ” when the sentence is set.
Limited range
approximately 500 m, 547 Y NOTE: Select at least one sentence, otherwise an
error beep will sound.
Your location

<<GPS Logger Only>>

Target
[MENU] > GPS > GPS Logger >
station <<GPS Logger Only>>
You can turn ON the GPS Logger Only mode.
Sounds a beep� Sounds 3 beeps� Only the GPS Logger is functioning in this mode, and
the transceiver does not transmit or receive it.
LLInformation
•• BE SURE to insert a microSD card.
•• Set “GPS Select” to “ON.” (p. 6-30)
•• To cancel the mode, restart the transceiver.

6-44
6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS items

GPS Auto TX (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > GPS > GPS Auto TX
Selects an option for the GPS automatic transmission
function.
This function automatically transmits the current
position data received from a GPS receiver and any
entered GPS message at the set interval.

•• OFF: Does not automatically transmit the position

data. (When you push [PTT], the transceiver
transmits the position data.)
•• 30 sec to 30 min:
Transmits the current position data at the
selected interval (30 seconds, or 1, 3, 5, 10,
or 30 minutes).

6-45
Section 7 VOICE TX FUNCTION
NOTE: See the Basic manual Voice TX function��7-2
Section 6 for details on how to DD Recording the voice audio��7-2
insert or remove a microSD card DD Transmitting the recorded voice audio��7-3
and precautions. VOICE items��7-4

7-1
7 VOICE TX FUNCTION

Voice TX function
The Voice TX function transmits the recorded audio D
DRecording the voice audio
that is on the microSD card, one time or repeatedly,
for up to 10 minutes at the set interval. [MENU] > VOICE > Record
This function is convenient to repeatedly call CQ, or 1. Push [MENU].
for other events. 2. Select “VOICE.”
You can assign the [Voice TX] key function to an 3. Select “Record.”
optional microphone key or optional Bluetooth
headset. (pp. 12-18, 12-34)

NOTE: BE SURE to insert a microSD card into the

transceiver.

4. Hold down [PTT] to record.

Displayed
while
recording Recording time
Audio level

LLInformation
•• Hold the microphone 5 ~ 10 cm (2 ~ 4 inches) from
your mouth, then speak at your normal voice level.
•• The maximum record time is 1 minute.
•• Only 1 voice memory can be recorded.
TIP: On the VOICE TX RECORD screen,
push [QUICK], then select “Clear” to clear the
recorded audio.

5. Push [ENT] to confirm the recorded voice.

•• The voice is played back.

Displayed
while playing Total time
Play back time

LLIf you hold down [PTT], the recording starts again.

In this case, the previous recorded audio will be
overwritten.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

7-2
7 VOICE TX FUNCTION

Voice TX function

D
DTransmitting the recorded voice audio
NOTE: BE SURE to insert a microSD card into the LLInformation
transceiver. •• While transmitting, the SD card icon blinks.
•• When you select “<<Repeat TX>>,” the transceiver
repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio for up to 10
[MENU] > VOICE > <<Single TX>>
minutes at the interval set in “Repeat Time.”
[MENU] > VOICE > <<Repeat TX>> ([MENU] > VOICE > TX Set > Repeat Time)

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “VOICE.”
3. Select “<<Single TX>>” or “<<Repeat TX>>.”
•• <<Single TX>>:
The recorded voice audio is transmitted only once.

•• Any of the following action cancels the transmission.

- Pushing [PTT]
- Turning OFF the transceiver, then turning it ON again.
- Pushing any key (except for [VOL] and [ ])
•• After the second transmission, the transmission continues
•• <<Repeat TX>>: pausing, if receiving a signal, even if “Busy Lockout” is set
The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted. to “ON.”
([MENU] > SET > Function > Busy Lockout)
However, if the squelch is manually opened in the
FM mode, the voice audio is repeatedly transmitted,
according to the “Repeat Time” setting.
•• You can select whether or not to output the TX voice
audio from the speaker.
([MENU] > VOICE > TX Set > TX Monitor)

Blinks

TIP: To transmit the recorded voice audio in the

Quick Menu window, push [QUICK], then select
Transmission is “Voice TX.”
paused

7-3
7 VOICE TX FUNCTION

VOICE items
Record <<Single TX>>
[MENU] > VOICE > Record [MENU] > VOICE > <<Single TX>>
Up to 1 minute of audio can be recorded onto a The transceiver transmits the recorded voice audio
microSD card for voice transmission. (p. 7-2) only once.
The transceiver can save only 1 voice audio. LLYou can also select “Single TX” in the Quick Menu
LLBE SURE to insert a microSD card. window.
LLWhile recording a QSO, you cannot use this function. ([QUICK] > Voice TX > Single TX)

Repeat Time (Default: 5sec) <<Repeat TX>>

[MENU] > VOICE > TX Set > Repeat Time [MENU] > VOICE > <<Repeat TX>>
Sets the Repeat Time to between 1 and 15 seconds The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
(in 1 second steps). voice audio for up to 10 minutes, according to the
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded “Repeat Time” setting.
voice audio for this set interval. LLInformation
•• You can also select “Repeat TX” in the Quick Menu
NOTE: The recorded voice audio is repeatedly window.
transmitted for up to 10 minutes. If 10 minutes ([QUICK] > Voice TX > Repeat TX)
•• If 10 minutes passes while transmitting, the transceiver
passes while transmitting, the transceiver
continues to transmit until the complete voice audio
continues to transmit until the complete voice audio
transmission is finished.
transmission is finished. •• Any of the following action cancels the transmission.
- Pushing [PTT]
- Turning OFF the transceiver, then turning it ON again.
TX Monitor (Default: ON) - Pushing any key (except for [VOL] and [ ])

[MENU] > VOICE > TX Set > TX Monitor

Turns the TX Monitor function ON or OFF.
•• OFF: The TX voice audio is not heard from the
speaker.
•• ON: The TX voice audio is heard from the speaker.

7-4
Section 8 RECORDER FUNCTION
NOTE: See the Basic manual Recording a QSO audio��8-2
Section 6 for details on how to Playing back a recorded audio��8-3
insert or remove a microSD card Changing the QSO recorder settings��8-4
and precautions.
Deleting the audio folder/file��8-5
DD Deleting an audio folder��8-5
DD Deleting an audio file��8-6
Viewing the file information��8-7
Using the Voice Recorder function��8-9
DD To start recording��8-9
DD Playing back a recorded audio��8-10
DD Deleting an audio folder�� 8-11
DD Deleting an audio file��8-12
DD Viewing the file information��8-13
Playing back the recorded audio on the PC��8-14
RECORD items��8-15

8-1
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Recording a QSO audio

NOTE:
•• You must insert a microSD card into the transceiver
before recording audio.
•• The recording function is continuously ON, even if the
transceiver is turned OFF then ON again.

To start recording To stop recording

1. Push [QUICK]. 1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “<<REC Start>>.” 2. Select “<<REC Stop>>.”

•• “Recording started.” is displayed, then returns to the

standby screen.
TIP:
Recording standby •• You can select to record the received audio from
only the MAIN band or both the MAIN and SUB
bands. (p. 8-15)
([MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder
> Recorder Set > REC Operation)
•• When “RX REC Condition” is set to “Always,” the
recording automatically starts when
“<<REC Start>>” is selected. In that case,
The recording starts when you recording continues, even when no signal is
transmit or the squelch opens. received.* (p. 8-15)
While recording, the SD card icon
([MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder
blinks.
> Recorder Set > RX REC Condition)
* The recorded file contains no sound.

LLInformation
•• The recording pauses while no signal is received, and
resumes when a signal is received again.
•• The recording continues until you manually stop
recording, or the card becomes full.
•• If the recording file’s content reaches 2GB, the
transceiver automatically creates a new file, and
continues recording.

8-2
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Playing back a recorded audio

NOTE: Insert the microSD card that contains the TIP: Selecting the record file type to display.
recorded audio file into the transceiver’s slot. In step 6, push [QUICK], then select “Display File”
and select the record file type to display.
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Play Files
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “RECORD.”
3. Select “QSO Recorder.”

•• ALL: Displays all recorded files.

•• A only: Displays only the audio file that was recorded on
the A band.
•• B only: Displays only the audio file that was recorded on
the B band.
4. Select “Play Files.”

The VOICE PLAYER screen description

The number of the file being played back/
The total number of recorded files.

Recording start
date and time Band (A/B)
TX/RX
5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to play. Operating
information
Play back time/
Total time

[RX→CS]
Plays the previous file

[CD] [LO] Fast forwards

LLThe folder is named in the following format: Rewinds
yyyymmdd (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day) [ENT] Pauses or plays
6. Select the audio file to play. [DR] Plays the next file
Recorded time
Fast forward [LO]/Rewind [CD]
•• Hold down to continuously fast forward, or rewind the file.
Band (A/B) •• The default skip time is 10 seconds. If you want to
change it, see page 8-16 for details.
•• You can fast forward or rewind the file by rotating
[DIAL]. The fast forward/rewind time is 1/20 of the total
file time, regardless of the skip time setting.
Total playback time •• If you push [CD] within the first 1 second of the file, the
TX/RX end of the previous file is played back.
Operating mode
Operating frequency Playing the previous file [RX→CS]
•• While the oldest file in the folder is playing back,
•• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file pushing [RX→CS] plays back the same file.
starts to play. •• While the file is paused, pushing [RX→CS] moves to
the beginning of the previous file.
Playing the next file [DR]
While the latest file in the folder is playing back,
pushing [DR] plays back the same file.
Operating information
The operating frequency, mode, and audio category
(RX/TX audio) are displayed.

8-3
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Changing the QSO recorder settings

You can change the recording settings.
See pages 8-15 and 8-16 for details.

Continue to record, even while the squelch is Synchronize the recording to PTT
closed
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC
Recorder Set > RX REC Condition

LLThe default setting is “ON” (Recording is synchronized to

LLThe default setting is “Squelch Auto” (Records only while PTT).
the squelch is open).
TIP: When “PTT Auto REC” is set to “ON”
•• Starts recording not only when [PTT] is pushed, but also
Record the QSO audio as one file when switched to transmit by a speaker microphone
or a Bluetooth headset, by a CI-V command, or by the
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > VOX function.
Recorder Set > File Split •• A signal that is received within 10 seconds after the
squelch is closed is recorded in the same file.

Change the Skip Time

[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
Player Set > Skip Time
LLThe default setting is “ON” (transmit and receive audio
are separately recorded in different files).
LLWhen “RX REC Condition” is set to “Squelch Auto,” an
audio file is created every time the squelch opens. The
received audio is recorded in a separated file.

Separately start or stop recording on the selected

band (MAIN band)
LLThe default setting is “10sec.”
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
Recorder Set > REC Operation

LLThe default setting is “A/B Link” (recording simultaneously

starts on the MAIN and SUB bands).

8-4
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Deleting the audio folder/file

NOTE: A deleted audio file can NOT be recovered.

D
DDeleting an audio folder
NOTE: All audio files in the folder are deleted.

[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Play Files

1. Push [MENU]. TIP: To delete all folders
2. Select “RECORD.” Select “Delete All Folders” in step 7.
3. Select “QSO Recorder.”

4. Select “Play Files.”

5. Select the folder to delete.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Delete.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

8. Select “YES.”

•• The folder is deleted.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

8-5
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Deleting the audio folder/file

D
DDeleting an audio file
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Play Files
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “RECORD.” TIP: To delete all files
3. Select “QSO Recorder.” Select “Delete All” in step 8.
LLIf “Display File” is set to “A only” or “B only,” only
displayed files are deleted.

•• “Display File” is “ALL”

4. Select “Play Files.”

•• “Display File” is “A only”

5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to delete.

•• “Display File” is “B only”

6. Select the audio file to delete.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

7. Push [QUICK].
8. Select “Delete.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

9. Select “YES.”

•• The file is deleted.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
8-6
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Viewing the file information

The recorded audio file contains the recording data.
See page 8-8 for the recorded contents.

[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Play Files 8. Select “File Information.”
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “RECORD.”
3. Select “QSO Recorder.”

4. Select “Play Files.”

9. Rotate [DIAL] to change the screen.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to TIP: To view the folder information
view the information. Push [QUICK] in step 5, and then select “Folder
Information” to view the folder information.

6. Select the audio file to view the information.

Folder name
Total files (total size)
Created date and time

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

7. Push [QUICK].

8-7
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Viewing the file information

File information examples

LLDepending on the recording status, some data may not be displayed.
LLThe file is named in the following format: yyyymmdd_hhmmss
(yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second)

•• TX audio file information •• RX audio file information

Operating information (TX) Operating information (RX)
Recording date and time Recording date and time

MY station position MY station position

DR setting Caller and received repeater

File data RX station position

File data

8-8
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Using the Voice Recorder function

The microphone audio, including audio from an LLDepending on the microSD card capacity, you may
external microphone, can be recorded for your continuously record up to a maximum of about 37 hours.
convenience. If the file size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is automatically
created in the same folder, and the recorded voice audio
NOTE: You must insert a microSD card into the is saved there.
transceiver before recording audio.

D start recording
DTo
NOTE: You cannot record a voice while recording 5. Push [PTT] to start recording.
a QSO. In that case, push [QUICK] in the standby •• The microphone audio recording starts.
screen, and then select “Stop Recording” to stop the
QSO recording.
Recording time
[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Record
1. Push [MENU]. Microphone input level
2. Select “RECORD.”
3. Select “Voice Recorder.”
6. Push [PTT] again to stop.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

TIP: Even if the external microphone or Bluetooth

headset is connected, the internal microphone’s
voice audio is recorded when the transceiver’s [PTT]
is pushed.
4. Select “Record.” To record the external microphone’s voice audio,
hold down the external microphone’s [PTT].
To record the Bluetooth headset’s voice audio, hold
down the Bluetooth headset’s [PTT].

To change the microphone gain level

Push [QUICK] in the VOICE RECORDER screen,
and then select “MIC Gain.”

Remaining time

Microphone gain level

•• The VOICE RECORDER screen is displayed.

8-9
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Using the Voice Recorder function

D
DPlaying back a recorded audio
NOTE: You cannot play back a recorded audio while The VOICE PLAYER screen description
recording a QSO. In that case, push [QUICK] in the The number of the file being played back/
standby screen, and then select “Stop Recording” to The total number of recorded files.
stop the QSO recording.
Recording start
date and time
[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Play Files
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “RECORD.” Play back time/
3. Select “Voice Recorder.” Total time

[RX→CS]
Plays the previous file

[CD] [LO] Fast forwards

Rewinds
[ENT] Pauses or plays
4. Select “Play Files.” [DR] Plays the next file

Fast forward [LO]/Rewind [CD]

•• Hold down to continuously fast forward or rewind the file.
•• The default skip time is 10 seconds. If you want to
change it, see page 8-16 for details.
•• You can fast forward or rewind the file by rotating
[DIAL]. The fast forward/rewind time is 1/20 of the total
file time, regardless of the skip time setting.
5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to play. •• If you push [CD] within the first 1 second of the file, at
the end of the previous file is played back.
Playing the previous file [RX→CS]
•• While the oldest file in the folder is playing back,
pushing [RX→CS] plays back the same file.
•• While the file is paused, pushing [RX→CS] moves to
the beginning of the previous file.
Playing the next file [DR]
LLThe folder is named in the following format: While the latest file in the folder is playing back,
yyyymmdd (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day) pushing [DR] plays back the same file.
6. Select the audio file to play.
Recorded time

Total playback time

•• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file

starts to play.

8-10
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Using the Voice Recorder function

D
DDeleting an audio folder
NOTE: TIP: To delete all folders
•• All audio files in the folder are deleted. Select “Delete All Folders” in step 7.
•• A deleted audio file can NOT be recovered.

[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Play Files

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “RECORD.”
3. Select “Voice Recorder.”

4. Select “Play Files.”

5. Select the folder to delete.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Delete.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

8. Select “YES.”

•• The folder is deleted.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

8-11
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Using the Voice Recorder function

D
DDeleting an audio file
NOTE: A deleted audio file can NOT be recovered.

[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Play Files

1. Push [MENU]. 9. Select “YES.”
2. Select “RECORD.”
3. Select “Voice Recorder.”

•• The file is deleted.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

4. Select “Play Files.”

TIP: To delete all files
Select “Delete All” in step 8.

5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to delete.

6. Select the audio file to delete.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

7. Push [QUICK].
8. Select “Delete.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

8-12
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Using the Voice Recorder function

D
DViewing the file information
[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Play Files
1. Push [MENU]. TIP: To view the folder information
2. Select “RECORD.” Push [QUICK] in step 5, and then select “Folder
3. Select “Voice Recorder.” Information” to view the folder information.

4. Select “Play Files.”

Folder name
Total files (total size)
Created date and time

5. Select the folder that contains the audio file to

view the information.

6. Select the audio file to view the information.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

7. Push [QUICK].
8. Select “File Information.”

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

8-13
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

Playing back the recorded audio on the PC

You can play back the recorded audio on your PC.
LLOperation data is not displayed.
LLWindows 10 is used for these instructions.

Example: P
laying back the audio file on the microSD
card on your PC.

1. Insert the microSD card into the memory card slot 5. Double-click the folder that contains the audio file
or memory card reader on your PC. to play it back. (Example: “20211101”)

Double-Click

microSD To the
card ID-52A/E card reader PC 6. Double-click the file to play it back.
(Example: “20211101_152135A.wav”)
2. Click the “Open folder to view files” option to
access the card.

Double-Click

LLSee the instruction manual of your player for

Click operation details.
LLThe audio file may not play back, depending on the
player.

3. Double-click the ‘ID-52’ folder.

TIP: When “USB Connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,”
and the transceiver is connected to the PC through a
USB data cable, you can directly access the microSD
card that is set in the transceiver from the PC.
Double-Click ([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)

4. Double-click the ‘Voice’ folder.

Double-Click

8-14
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

RECORD items
<<REC Start>> RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > [MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
<<REC Start>> Recorder Set > RX REC Condition
After selecting “<<REC Start>>,” starts QSO Selects whether or not the squelch status affects the
recording. received voice audio recording.
•• “Recording started.” is displayed. •• Always: The transceiver always records the
LLInformation receive voice audio regardless of the
•• BE SURE to insert a microSD card. squelch status.
•• While recording, “<<REC Stop>>” is displayed on the •• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records the receive
QSO RECORDER screen. To stop recording, select voice audio only when a signal is
“<<REC Stop>>.” received (the squelch is opened).
•• Once a recording has started, the recording will continue, When the squelch closes while
even if the transceiver is turned OFF and then ON again. recording, the recording will continue
for 2 seconds, and then pause.
Play Files
File Split (Default: ON)
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Play Files
Displays saved voice data folders. [MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
LLBE SURE to insert a microSD card. Recorder Set > File Split
Turns the File Split function ON or OFF.
Playing back: •• OFF: Once a recording starts, the transceiver
1. Select a folder that contains the file you want to continues to record on the same file.
playback. LLIf the file size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is
2. Select a file to playback. automatically created in the same folder, and the
•• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and starts voice audio is recorded there.
playing back the audio. •• ON: During recording, if transmission and
LLSee page 8-3 for details. reception, or squelch status* (open and close)
3. Push [MENU] to exit the VOICE PLAYER screen. is changed, a new file is automatically created
in the same folder, and the voice audio is
NOTE: saved into a new file.
•• The folder is automatically named, as shown below: * Only when “RX REC Condition” is set to
(Example) “Squelch Auto.”
Recording date: 1st November 2021
Folder name: 20211101
•• The file is automatically named, as shown below: REC Operation (Default: A/B Link)
(Example) [MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder >
Recording date and time: 1st November 2021 15:30:00
Recorder Set > REC Operation
File name: 20211101_153000
•• The voice audio is recorded onto a microSD card, and Selects the recording operation on the dual band
saved in the “wav” format. (“.wav” is not displayed on display.
the transceiver’s screen.) •• A/B Separate: The recording function is separately
•• The recorded voice audio can also be played back on a active/inactive on the selected band
PC. (MAIN band) when the function is
started or stopped.
•• A/B Link: The recording function is
simultaneously active/inactive on
both MAIN and SUB bands when the
function is started or stopped.
 On the single band display,
only displayed band (A or B) is
recorded.

8-15
8 RECORDER FUNCTION

RECORD items

PTT Auto REC (Default: ON) Play Files

[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > [MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Play Files
Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC Plays back the voice audio that is recorded on the
Turns the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or OFF. VOICE RECORDER screen.
LLTransmitting from a speaker microphone or a Bluetooth Push [ENT] to display the folders that contain the
headset, using the VOX function, or sending a CI-V recorded voice audio files.
command also starts recording. LLBE SURE to insert a microSD card.

•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.

•• ON: The recording automatically starts when you MIC Gain (Default: 3)
push [PTT]. [MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder >
The recording stops when: Recorder Set > MIC Gain
•• No signal is transmitted for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
•• No signal is received for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
Sets the internal microphone sensitivity to between 1
LLWhen the transceiver receives a signal within (minimum sensitivity) and 4 (maximum sensitivity) for
10 seconds after releasing [PTT], the recording the Voice Recorder function. Higher values make the
automatically starts. microphone more sensitive to your voice.
•• The operating frequency, Frequency Selecting mode,
or operating mode is changed after releasing [PTT].
Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Skip Time (Default: 10sec) [MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder >
Player Set > Skip Time
[MENU] > RECORD > QSO Recorder > Sets the Skip Timer to 3, 5, 10, or 30 seconds to
Player Set > Skip Time rewind or skip forward for this set period of time when
Sets the Skip Timer to 3, 5, 10, or 30 seconds to you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while
rewind or skip forward for this set period of time when playing the recorded voice audio.
you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while LLSee “The VOICE PLAYER screen description” for
playing the recorded QSO audio. forwarding or rewinding. (p. 8-10)
LLSee “The VOICE PLAYER screen description” for
forwarding or rewinding. (p. 8-3)
DV Auto Reply

Record [MENU] > RECORD > DV Auto Reply

Up to 10 seconds of audio can be recorded for the
[MENU] > RECORD > Voice Recorder > Record Automatic Reply function.
Push [ENT] to display the VOICE RECORDER LLBE SURE to insert a microSD card.
screen, and then push [PTT] to start a voice LLSee page 5-25 for details.
recording. While recording, push [PTT] again to stop
the recording. (p. 8-9)
LLInformation
•• BE SURE to insert a microSD card.
•• This function cannot record a QSO.
•• While recording a QSO, you cannot use this function.

8-16
Section 9 MEMORY OPERATION
General description��9-2
DD Memory channel content��9-2
Selecting a Memory channel��9-3
Selecting a Call channel��9-3
Entering Memory channel contents��9-4
DD Entering into a selected channel��9-4
DD Overwriting to the selected channel��9-5
DD Entering to a blank channel��9-5
Copying Memory content to the VFO��9-6
MEMORY screen��9-7
DD Tree view of the MEMORY screen��9-7
DD Viewing the Memory channel contents��9-7
Copying Memory contents to another Memory channel��9-8
Moving the Memory contents to another channel in a different group��9-9
Inserting a blank channel��9-10
Entering a group/memory name�� 9-11
Selecting a memory name display��9-12
Clearing a Memory contents��9-13

9-1
9 MEMORY OPERATION

General description
The Memory mode enables you to quickly select NOTE: Memory content may be accidentally
often-used frequencies, modes, and other parameters. cleared by static electricity, electric transients,
While operating in the Memory mode, you can and other causes. In addition, it may be cleared
temporarily change the operating frequency, mode, by a malfunction, or during repairs. Therefore, we
and so on, without overwriting the memory channel recommend that you backup the Memory content or
contents. save it onto a microSD card* or a PC.
*User supplied
Memory LLThe CS-52 programming software can also be used
Group Descriptions
channel to backup your memory content. See its instruction
Regular memory channels. manual for details.
Up to 1000 channels can be
00 to 99 00 to 99
separately stored in the 100
memory channel groups.
144 C0/C1 Call channels each of the 144 and
CALL CH
430 C0/C1 430 bands.

D
DMemory channel content
The following information can be entered into the
Memory channels:
•• Operating frequency
•• Duplex ON/OFF
•• Duplex direction (DUP+ or DUP–)
•• Duplex frequency offset
•• Memory name
•• Scan skip setting
•• Tuning step
•• Operating mode
•• Subaudible tone encoder, tone squelch, or DTCS squelch
ON/OFF
•• Subaudible tone frequency, tone squelch frequency, or
DTCS code with polarity
•• Digital code
•• Digital Call sign squelch or Digital code squelch ON/OFF
•• UR station call sign
•• R1/R2 call signs

9-2
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Selecting a Memory channel Selecting a Call channel

In the Memory mode, you can select the Memory Call channels are used for quick recall of most often
channels by rotating [DIAL]. used operating frequencies.
Factory default frequencies and operating modes are
1. Push [MR] to enter the Memory mode. entered into the Call channels. Change these to suit
your operating needs.

1. Hold down [CALL] for 1 second to enter the Call

Channel mode.

LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects

the Memory and Weather Channel modes.
2. Rotate [DIAL].
•• Selects a Memory channel.
LLBlank channels are not selected. 2. Rotate [DIAL].
LLTo select a Memory Group, push [QUICK], and then •• Selects a Call channel.
select “Group Select.”
LLThe Memory channels are commonly used for the A
and B bands. On the B band, if you select a memory
channel that is out of the selectable frequency range,
“ ” is displayed, and the signal cannot be received.

TIP: To sequentially select a channel in a

different group
1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “Channel Select Group Range.”

3. Select “All Groups.”

9-3
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Entering Memory channel contents

After selecting a frequency in the VFO mode, you can
enter it into a selected channel or an automatically
selected blank channel.

D
DEntering into a selected channel

Example: E ntering 146.030 MHz/FM mode into

Channel 11 in Group 01.
1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode. 10. Push [ENT].
2. Push [MODE] to enter the FM mode. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to set a frequency to 146.030 MHz. 11. Select “YES.”

•• Beeps sound and the Memory contents are briefly

4. Hold down [MW] for 1 second. displayed, then returns to the VFO mode.
•• A short and a long beep sound.
5. Select “Write to New CH.”
TIP: In step 7, you can select the following options.
•• NAME:
Displays the Memory name edit screen. (p. 9-11)
•• SKIP:
Displays the SKIP setting items.
•• Group Select:
Displays the GROUP SELECT screen.
6. Push [QUICK]. •• <<Write>>:
7. Select “Group Select.” Enters into the selected Memory channel.
•• <<Insert Write>>:
Inserts a Memory channel above the selected
channel.

8. Select Group “01.”

9. Rotate [DIAL] to select Channel “11.”

9-4
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Entering Memory channel contents

D
DOverwriting to the selected channel D
DEntering to a blank channel
You can write a frequency into a pre-entered channel.
Example: Entering 441.100 MHz/FM mode into a
Example: E ntering 146.330 MHz/FM mode into blank channel.
Channel 11 in Group 01. 1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode.
1. Push [MR] to enter the Memory mode. 2. Push [MODE] to enter the FM mode.
LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects 3. Rotate [DIAL] to set a frequency to 441.100 MHz.
the Memory and Weather Channel modes.
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select Channel 11 in Group 01.

4. Hold down [MW] for 3 seconds.

LLTo select a Memory Group, push [QUICK], and then
select “Group Select.”
3. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode.
4. Rotate [DIAL] to set a frequency to 146.330 MHz.

•• The Memory contents are briefly displayed for 2

seconds, then returns to the VFO mode.

5. Hold down [MW] for 1 second.

•• A short and a long beep sound.
6. Select “Write to Selected CH.”

7. Push [MR].
8. Select “YES.”

•• Beeps sound and the Memory contents are briefly

displayed, then returns to the VFO mode.

9-5
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Copying Memory content to the VFO

It is convenient when you want to operate on a
channel frequency near a Memory or Call channel.

Example: C opying Memory Channel 11 in Group 01

to the VFO.
1. Push [MR] to enter the Memory mode.
LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects
the Memory and Weather Channel modes.
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select Channel 11 in Group 01.

LLTo select a Memory Group, push [QUICK], and then

select “Group Select.”
3. Hold down [MW] for 1 second.
•• A short and a long beep sound.
4. Select “Copy to VFO.”

5. Select “YES.”

•• Beeps sound and copies the selected Memory

contents to the VFO, then returns to the VFO mode.

9-6
9 MEMORY OPERATION

MEMORY screen
On the MEMORY screen, you can easily manage the D
DViewing the Memory channel contents
Memory or Call channel content.
You can view the Memory channel contents on the
MEMORY screen.
D
DTree view of the MEMORY screen
Example: Viewing the contents of Channel 01 in
Group 00.
Memory CH Group 00 [MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH

MEMORY 00 1. Push [MENU].

2. Select “MEMORY” on the second page of the
99 MENU screen.
LLIn the VFO, Memory, or Call Channel mode, you can
Group 99 open the MEMORY screen by holding down [MW] for
1 second, then selecting “Manage Memory.”
3. Select “Memory CH.”
S: SKIP CH*
4. Select Group “00.”
Call CH 144 C0

144 C1

430 C0

430 C1
5. Select Channel “01.”
Your Call Sign

Repeater List

* Skips the set frequency during a scan.

(While a VFO scan is paused and if you want to skip
the frequency, holding down [MW] for 1 second sets
the frequency as the Skip channel.)

•• Channel contents are displayed.

LLRotate [DIAL] to scroll the screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

TIP: To edit, copy, or clear the memory content.

1. Push [QUICK] in step 5.
2. Select “Edit,” “Copy,” or “Clear.”

9-7
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Copying Memory contents to another Memory channel

You can copy the memory content to another Memory
channel.

Example: C
opying Channel 01 in Group 00 to
Channel 06 in Group 00.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. 8. Select the destination channel.
2. Select “MEMORY.”
3. Select “Memory CH.”
4. Select Group “00.”
5. Select Channel “01.”

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Copy.”

•• Beeps sound, and the contents are copied to the

destination channel.
LLIf the selected channel is not blank, a confirmation
dialog is displayed. When you select “YES,” the
Memory contents are overwritten.

TIP: To copy the channel to a different group

In step 6, while “DESTINATION” is displayed, push
[QUICK] and select “Group Select.”

•• The GROUP SELECT screen is displayed.

9-8
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Moving the Memory contents to another channel in a different group

You can move the memory content to another Memory
channel in a different group.

Example: M
oving Channel 01 in Group 00 to Channel
00 in Group 02.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. 11. Select the destination channel.
2. Select “MEMORY.”
3. Select “Memory CH.”
4. Select Group “00.”
5. Select Channel “01.”

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Move.”

•• Beeps sound, and the contents are moved to the

destination channel.
LLChannels other than the one that you moved will
move up.

TIP: To rearrange the display order in the

selected group
In step 7, while “DESTINATION” is displayed, go to
step 11.

8. Push [QUICK].
9. Select “Group Select.”

10. Select the destination group.

9-9
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Inserting a blank channel

You can insert a blank channel between 2 Memory
channels. This function is convenient to organize your
memory channels.

Example: Inserting a blank channel between Channel

00 and 01 in Group 00.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. TIP: To insert a blank group
2. Select “MEMORY.” On the Memory Group screen, select a group and
3. Select “Memory CH.” push [QUICK], then select “Insert Group.”
4. Select Group “00.”
5. Select Channel “01.”

•• A blank group is inserted above the selected group.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Insert.”

•• Beeps sound, a blank channel is inserted above the

selected channel.
LLIf you select channel 99 in step 5, a confirmation
dialog is displayed. When you select “YES,” channel
99 is deleted.

9-10
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Entering a group/memory name

You can assign a name of up to 16 characters to each
channel group (00 ~ 99) and memory channel.

Example: E
ntering “Calling” as a Memory name to
Channel 01 in Group 00.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. 10. After entering, push [ENT].
2. Select “MEMORY.”
3. Select “Memory CH.”
4. Select Group “00.”
5. Select Channel “01.”

11. Select “<<Overwrite>>.”

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Edit.”

12. Select “YES.”

8. Select “NAME.”

•• Beeps sound, then returns to the Memory channel

screen.

TIP: To enter a group name

On the Memory Group list screen, select a group
9. Enter a name. and push [QUICK], then select “Edit Name.”

•• The Group Name edit screen is displayed.

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

9-11
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Selecting a memory name display

While in the memory mode, the entered memory TIP: There are 5 types of Memory name displays.
name can be displayed in different styles. You can
select a display type. •• Freq (Name OFF):
Displays only the frequency.
Example: S electing “Name (Large)” in the Single
band display.
1. Push [MR] to select the Memory mode.
LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects
the Memory and Weather Channel modes.
2. Push [QUICK].
3. Select “Display Type.”
•• Freq (Normal Name):
Displays the large font sized frequency and small font
sized Memory name.
LLIn the Dual band display, select “Freq.”

4. Select a display type.

•• Freq (Large Name):

Displays the large font sized frequency and large font
sized Memory name.
LLYou cannot select in the Dual band display.

LL“Freq (Name OFF)” is set as the default. •• Name (Normal):

Displays the small font sized Memory name and small
font sized frequency.

•• Name (Large):
Displays the large font sized Memory name and small
font sized frequency.

9-12
9 MEMORY OPERATION

Clearing a Memory contents

Contents of entered memories can be cleared
(erased), if desired.
LLThe cleared channel becomes a blank channel.
LLYou can also clear the Skip channels (Group “S”).

NOTE: Cleared memory channel contents cannot be

restored.

Example: C
learing channel 01 in group 00.
[MENU] > MEMORY > Memory CH
1. Push [MENU]. TIP: To Delete a memory channel
2. Select “MEMORY.” In step 7, select “Delete (next CH moves up).”
3. Select “Memory CH.”
4. Select Group “00.”
5. Select Channel “01.”

•• The selected channel is deleted.

LLYou can also delete Memory groups.
LLDO NOT push [ENT]. Select a group, then select “Delete Group.”
6. Push [QUICK].
7. Select “Clear.”

8. Select “YES.”

•• Beeps sound, and the contents are cleared.

9-13
Section 10 SCAN OPERATION
Scan Type��10-2
DD VFO scan��10-2
DD Memory scan��10-2
About Scans��10-4
DD [DIAL] operation during a scan��10-4
DD Squelch setting for a scan��10-4
DD Tuning step for a VFO scan��10-4
DD Scan Skip function��10-4
DD Operating mode during a scan��10-4
DD When a signal is received��10-4
DD Scan Stop Beep function��10-4
VFO Scan��10-5
DD Scan Type��10-5
DD About a Program scan name��10-6
DD About a Program Link scan name��10-6
DD Storing the skip frequencies��10-6
DD Entering Program Scan Edges��10-7
DD About the Program Link Scan��10-8
DD Setting the Program Link function��10-8
Memory Scan��10-9
DD Scan Type��10-9
DD About a Group scan name��10-10
DD Setting the Group Link��10-10
DD Setting the skip channel�� 10-11
Temporary skip function��10-11

10-1
10 SCAN OPERATION

Scan Type
Scanning is a versatile function that can automatically search for signals. A scan makes it easier to locate stations
to contact or listen to, or to skip unwanted channels or frequencies.

D
DVFO scan D
DMemory scan
The VFO scan searches for signals within the The Memory scan searches signals on the
specified frequency range. preregistered memory channels.

Full scan (ALL) ALL scan (ALL)

Repeatedly scans the entire band. Repeatedly scans all memory channels.
Memory Groups (00 ~ 99 and S: Skip CH)
ID-52A/E ID-52A/E
RX frequency RX frequency Scan
lower end upper end 00 01 02 03 98 99 S

Scan
P SKIP P SKIP Jump
Empty groups are skipped
Jump

Selected band scan (BAND)

Band scan (BAND) Scans all memory channels on the same frequency
Repeatedly scans the selected band. band as the selected channel.
Band edge frequency Band edge frequency
lower end upper end
Mode scan (MODE)
PSKIP Scan PSKIP Scans memory channels that are entered with the
same operating mode as the currently selected mode.
Jump LLThe Mode scan scans all memory groups.
(Group 00 ~ 99, S: SKIP CH)
Program scan (P00 ~ P24) Example: S
canning AM mode
Repeatedly scans the selected Program Scan range Memory group 02
(P-Scan Edge 00 ~ 24).
Scan
Lower edge Upper edge AM FM AM DV AM AM
Scan range
PSKIP Scan PSKIP Modes other than AM are skipped
Jump
Jump Group link scan (GROUP LINK)
Sequentially scans the memory groups that are set to
LLAt least one Program Scan range (P-Scan Edges) must link on the MENU screen.
be entered to start a Program scan.
([MENU] > SET > Scan > P-Scan Edge) Memory Groups (00 ~ 99 and S: Skip CH)
See page 10-7 for more details. Scan
00 01 02 98 99 S

Program Link scan (P-LINK 0 ~ 9) Jump

Sequentially scans the Program Scan ranges. The Unchecked groups are skipped
links are set on the MENU screen. LLAt least 2 groups must be checked to start a Group Link
([MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Link) scan. ([MENU] > SET > Scan > Group Link)
LLSee page 10-8 for more details. See page 10-10 for more details.

Program scan edges (Example: P00 ~ P10) Group scan (GROUP 00 ~ 99)
Scan
Scans the Memory channels in the selected group.
P00 P01 P02 P03 P10

Jump

10-2
10 SCAN OPERATION

Scan Type

Duplex (DUP) scan

The Duplex scan searches for signals on both TX
and RX frequencies used in duplex operation
(p. 11-4).
LL“D–” or “D+” is displayed in the Duplex mode.
LLA Duplex scan does not start when the frequency offset
is set to “0.000.00 MHz.”

Tone scan
The Tone scan searches for signals with tone
frequencies or DTCS codes from stations using the
Tone Squelch function.
LLA Tone scan is usable in any VFO, Memory, or Call
channel mode.
LLDuring a scan, rotate [DIAL] to change the scan
direction.
LLSee pages 15-8 and 15-9 about the Tone Squelch
function and DTCS Code Squelch function.

10-3
10 SCAN OPERATION

About Scans
D
D[DIAL] operation during a scan D
DOperating mode during a scan
•• Rotate [DIAL] to change the scan direction during a scan. •• The VFO scan uses the selected operating mode.
•• When the scan is paused, rotate [DIAL] to resume the •• During a Memory mode scan, the operating mode
scan. entered into the channel is used.

D
DSquelch setting for a scan D
DWhen a signal is received
You can change the squelch level to suit your When a signal is received, the scan pauses for this
operating needs. Set the squelch level to open the set period of time. (p. 12-5)
squelch, according to the received signal strength. When a received signal disappears, the scan resumes
LLDuring a scan, rotate [DIAL] while holding down [SQL] for this set period of time. (p. 12-5)
to adjust the squelch level. The scan resumes after LLThese settings can be separately set to A band and B band.
adjusting.
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Pause Timer

[MENU] > SET > Scan > Resume Timer

Blinks

D
DTuning step for a VFO scan
The selected tuning step is applied to the scan.
For a Program scan or Program Link scan, set the
D
DScan Stop Beep function
tuning step in the Program Scan Edge ranges (P-Scan
Edge). The Scan Stop Beep function sounds a beep when a
signal is received.
D
DScan Skip function This function can be turned ON or OFF on the MENU
screen. (p. 12-29)
The skip function speeds up scanning by not scanning
those frequencies set as skip channels. [MENU] > SET > Sounds > Scan Stop Beep
LLThese settings can be separately set to A band and B band.

In the VFO mode

The frequencies that are set as “PSKIP” are skipped
during a scan. (p. 10-6)

In the Memory mode

The frequencies that are set as skip channels “PSKIP”
and “SKIP” are not scanned. (p. 10-11)
LLYou must enter 2 or more Memory channels to start a
memory scan.
TIP: When “Program Skip” is set to OFF, you cannot
use the Program Skip scan function. (p. 12-5)
([MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Skip)

10-4
10 SCAN OPERATION

VFO Scan
1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode. D
DScan Type
2. Push [MODE] to select the operating mode. •• ALL: Full scan
3. Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. •• BAND: Band scan
•• Opens the Scan Type Select window. •• DUP: Duplex scan
4. Select a scan type. (Displayed only when Duplex is set)
•• P-LINK0 ~ 9: Program Link scan
•• P00 ~ 24: Program scan
•• TONE: Tone scan
(For the Tone Squelch scanning)
LLInformation
•• The frequencies that are set as a Skip channel
(PSKIP) are skipped during a scan. (p. 10-6)
•• When “Program Skip” is set to “OFF,” the Skip channel
frequencies are not skipped. (p. 12-5)
([MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Skip)
•• To set a Program Link scan, see page 10-8.
•• To set a Program scan, see page 10-7.
Blinks

TIP:
•• During a scan, rotate [DIAL] to change the scanning
direction.
•• The scan starts. •• During a scan, push [MODE] to select the operating
•• The decimal point and the selected Scan Type icon mode.
blink. •• During a scan, hold down [ ] to turn the Lock
LLWhen receiving a signal, the S-meter displays the function ON or OFF.
received signal strength. •• The scan continuously runs, even if you push [MENU]
5. Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. or [QUICK] during a scan.
•• Cancels the scan. •• You can select a scan type by rotating [DIAL] while
LLPushing [CLR] also cancels the scan. holding down [SCAN]. Release [SCAN] to start the
scan.

10-5
10 SCAN OPERATION

VFO Scan

D
DAbout a Program scan name D
DStoring the skip frequencies
When a Scan name is entered to a Program scan, the You can skip unnecessary frequencies during a scan.
name is displayed in the Scan Type Select window. While a scan is paused and if you want to skip the
(p. 10-5) frequency, you can store it into the Skip channels
LLThe name is not displayed during a scan. group S (00 ~ 99) as a Skip channel (PSKIP).
LLTo enter the name, see page 10-7. The Scan Skip function speeds up a scan.

When the Scan name is entered 1. While a VFO scan is paused, hold down [MW] for
1 second.

When the Scan name is not entered

•• The window, as shown above, is displayed.
2. Select “Adds to SKIP MR Group.”
•• Two short beeps sound.
•• The frequency is stored in the Skip channels group.
•• After storing, the scan resumes.
LLIf there is no blank channel, an error beep sounds,
and the frequency is not stored.

TIP: Once a frequency is set as a Skip channel, the

D
DAbout a Program Link scan name frequency is skipped until you clear the skip setting.
To clear the skip setting, see page 10-11.
When a Program Link scan name is entered, it is LLThe skip setting is also cleared when the Memory
displayed in the Scan Type Select window. channel set as a Skip channel is cleared.
(p. 10-5)
LLThe name is not displayed during a scan.
LLTo enter the name, see page 10-8.

When a Program Link name is entered

When a Program Link name is not entered

10-6
10 SCAN OPERATION

VFO Scan

D
DEntering Program Scan Edges
You can enter the upper and lower frequency edges
for a Program scan.
Each Program Scan range has its tuning step and
operating mode setting.
You can enter up to 25 Program Scan ranges (P-Scan
Edge) on the MENU screen.

[MENU] > SET > Scan > P-Scan Edge

1. Push [MENU]. 8. After editing contents, select “<<Write>>.”
2. Select “Scan” in the “SET” menu. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
3. Select “P-Scan Edge.” 9. Select “Yes.”

4. Select a blank Program scan range “00” ~”24.”

LLDO NOT push [ENT]. LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Edit.” TIP:
•• To clear the Program scan range, select “Clear” in step 6.
•• When scanning a range where the set “TS” or “MODE”
cannot be used, the preset “TS” or “MODE” setting on
each band is applied.

•• The edit screen is displayed.

7. Select “FREQ LOW” or “FREQ HIGH” to enter the
lower edge and higher edge, and then push [ENT].
LLInformation
•• Rotate [DIAL] to select the item, and push [ENT] to
enter the edit screen.
•• Set the lower edge and higher edge by rotating
[DIAL].
Push [VFO/MHz] to select the 1 MHz tuning step.
•• When the “NAME” is entered, it displays on the Scan
Type Select window.
See page iii on how to enter characters.
•• When the “TS” (Tuning Step) and/or “MODE” is
blanked, they have used the current setting on the
VFO mode.
The “TS” and “MODE” must be set to match with your
desired signals.

10-7
10 SCAN OPERATION

VFO Scan

D
DAbout the Program Link Scan D
DSetting the Program Link function
This item sets the Link function for 2 or more [MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Link
Program Scan ranges to sequentially scan during a
Program Link scan. The Program Link scan scans all 1. Push [MENU].
frequencies in the scan ranges. 2. Select “Scan” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Program Link.”
Example settings of the Program Link
Program Scan Program Scan
lower edge upper edge

Program Link 0： 01：144.000−440.000

Edit Name Delete

1：
4. Select a Program Link number “0” ~ “9.”
Blank
...

9：
Program Scan range (p. 10-7)
Program Link number (0 to 9)

LLInformation
•• The Program Link Number screen displays the frequency
range.
•• You can add a Link setting by pushing [QUICK] when 2 or •• The Program Link Number screen displays the
more Program Scan ranges (P-Scan Edge) are entered. preregistered Program Scan ranges.
•• When there is no Program Scan range (P00 ~ P24) LLWhen no Program Scan range is selected, “– Blank –”
entered, “Add” is not displayed after pushing [QUICK]. is displayed.
5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Add.”

7. Select the Program Scan range that you want to add.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all Program scan ranges that

you want are added.
9. Push [ENT] to save the Program Link.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
TIP:
•• To edit the name of the Program Link, push [QUICK]
and select “Edit Name” at above step 4.
•• To delete the registered Program Scan range from the
Program Link, select “Delete” at above step 6.

10-8
10 SCAN OPERATION

Memory Scan
NOTE: You must enter 2 or more Memory channels D
DScan Type
that are not set as Skip channels to start a Memory •• ALL: Full scan
scan. •• BAND: Band scan
•• MODE: MODE scan
1. Push [MR] to enter the Memory mode. •• DUP: Duplex scan
LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects (Displayed only when Duplex is set)
the Memory and Weather Channel modes. •• GROUP LINK: Group Link scan
2. Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. •• GROUP 00 ~ 99: Group scan
•• Opens the Scan Type Select window. •• TONE: Tone scan
3. Select a scan type. (For the Tone Squelch scanning)
LLWhen 2 or more Memory channels that are not set as
Skip channels are entered, the Memory scan is usable.
LLThe channel set as a Skip channel (PSKIP or SKIP) is
skipped during a scan. (p. 10-11)

TIP:
•• During a scan, rotate [DIAL] to change the scanning
direction.
•• During a scan, hold down [ ] to turn the Lock
function ON or OFF.
•• The scan continuously runs, even if you push [MENU]
or [QUICK] during a scan.
Blinks
•• You can select a scan type by rotating [DIAL] while
holding down [SCAN]. Release [SCAN] to start the
scan.
•• The scan starts.
•• The decimal point and “ ” blink.
LLWhen receiving a signal, the S-meter displays the
received signal strength.
4. Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
•• Cancels the scan.
LLPushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.

10-9
10 SCAN OPERATION

Memory Scan

D
DAbout a Group scan name D
DSetting the Group Link
When a group name is entered to a Memory channel You can sequentially scan the memory groups which
group, the name is displayed in the Scan Type Select are set to link on the MENU screen.
window. (p. 10-9) LLIn the default setting, all groups are set to link.
LLThe name is not displayed during a scan.
LLTo enter the name, see page 9-11.
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Group Link
When the Group name is entered 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Scan” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Group Link.”

When the Group name is not entered

4. Select a group, “00” ~ “99,” “S: SKIP CH.”

5. Push [ENT] to turn the Link function ON or OFF.

•• “ ” is displayed when the function is set to “ON.”
LLPush [QUICK] to quickly turn all the groups ON or
OFF.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

10-10
10 SCAN OPERATION

Memory Scan Temporary skip function

D
DSetting the skip channel This function temporarily skips unwanted frequencies
(or memory channels) during a scan for the set
You can set or clear a Skip Channel setting.
period of time or condition, without changing the Skip
The channels that are set as a Skip channel are
Channel setting.
skipped during a scan.
1. While a scan is paused, hold down [MW] for 1
1. Push [MR] to enter the Memory mode.
LLFor only the ID-52A, pushing [MR] each time selects second.
the Memory and Weather Channel modes. 2. Select “Temp Skip Set.”
2. Select the memory channel to be skipped.
3. Push [QUICK].
4. Select “SKIP.”
5. Select an option.

•• Sets the frequency or Memory channel as a Skip

Frequency or Channel.
•• The scan automatically resumes.

TIP:
•• Up to 20 Temporary Skip frequencies or Memory
channels can be set. When the 21st frequency
or Memory channel is set, the oldest setting is
When a Skip channel is set, automatically deleted.
“SKIP” or “PSKIP” is displayed. •• You can also set the Temporary Skip function in the
Quick Menu window.
•• The Temporary Skip function is canceled when the
•• OFF: Cancels the Skip Channel setting. Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5 min) has passed, or
•• SKIP: Skipped during a Memory scan. when selecting “Temp Skip Cancel” in the Quick Menu
•• PSKIP: Skipped during both VFO and Memory window.
scans. ([MENU] > SET > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer)

10-11
Section 11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS
FM Repeater operation��11-2
DD Setting the Repeater frequency�� 11-2
DD Checking the Repeater input signal�� 11-3
DD 1750 Hz tone burst�� 11-3
Duplex operation��11-4
DD Setting the frequency offset�� 11-4
DD Setting the duplex direction�� 11-4
DD Duplex operation�� 11-4
Auto Repeater function��11-5
Off band indication��11-5

11-1
11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

FM Repeater operation
A Repeater receives signals and on one frequency, Repeater
RX: 144900 MHz
and then retransmits them on a different frequency. TX: 145500 MHz
When using a Repeater, the transmit frequency is
shifted from the receive frequency by a frequency
offset.
A Repeater can be accessed using the Duplex
function by setting the transceiver’s offset to the same
value as the Repeater’s offset.
See Section 5 for details on accessing a D-STAR
Repeater. Station A Station B
RX: 145500 MHz RX: 145500 MHz
TX: 144900 MHz TX: 144900 MHz

D
DSetting the Repeater frequency
1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode. 7. Push [QUICK].
2. Push [MODE] to select the FM mode. 8. Select “TONE” and turn ON the Repeater Tone.

•• The TONE icon is displayed.

3. Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency received from a 9. Hold down [PTT] for 2 seconds.
repeater. •• If your transmit signal reached the repeater, after
releasing [PTT], you can hear the repeater’s call sign
in morse codes or its announcement.

Accessing Receiving from

a Repeater a Repeater
▲

TIP: For only the USA version

The Auto Repeater function (p. 11-5)
Push [PTT] for Receives the
automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex 2 seconds Repeater’s call sign
ON/OFF, duplex direction, tone encoder ON/
OFF). When the function is ON, steps 4 ~ 8 are
10. Operate in the same way as a simplex call,
not necessary.
alternately transmit and receive.
LLYou can turn OFF the function and manually set the
repeater settings.
Receive frequency Transmit frequency
([MENU] > SET > Function > Auto Repeater)
Shifts by the
4. Set the offset frequency and the Duplex direction. offset amount
(p. 11-4)

TIP:
•• When the repeater tone frequency or the frequency
•• The Duplex icon is displayed. offset is changed, the tone or offset for Auto Repeater
5. Set the Repeater tone. (Default: 88.5 Hz) function is also changed.
([MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone) •• If the offset value causes the transmit frequency to be
(p. 12-4) out of the band, “OFF BAND” is displayed on the display
6. Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen. when you push [PTT], and transmit is inhibited. (p. 11-5)

11-2
11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

FM Repeater operation

D
DChecking the Repeater input signal D
D1750 Hz tone burst
You can check whether or not that another station’s A 1750 Hz tone is required to access many European
transmit signal can be received directly (not through a repeaters.
repeater), by listening to the repeater input frequency.
For the ID-52E only
Push [PTT] briefly and release, and then hold down
Hold down [SQL] to listen on the repeater input
[PTT] to transmit a 1750 Hz tone burst signal.
frequency.
Display while monitoring 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “DTMF/T-CALL” in the “SET” menu.

LLInformation 3. Select “DTMF Memory.”

•• While monitoring, the status indicator lights green, and an
S/RF meter dot blinks.
•• While monitoring, the displayed frequency automatically
changes to the transceiver transmit frequency (repeater
input frequency).
•• When the other station’s signal can be directly received,
move to a non-repeater frequency, and use simplex.
(Duplex OFF) 4. Select “T-CALL.”

5. Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6. Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency received from a
repeater.
7. Set the offset frequency and the duplex direction.
(p. 11-4)
•• The duplex icon is displayed.
8. While holding down [PTT] to transmit, push [SQL]
to transmit a 1750 Hz tone signal.
•• Accesses the repeater with a short tone burst.
9. Operate in a normal way.
LLIn the same way as a simplex call, alternately
transmit and receive.

11-3
11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

Duplex operation
The duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency D
DSetting the duplex direction
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
1. Push [QUICK].
amount.
2. Select “DUP.”
D
DSetting the frequency offset
NOTE: The frequency offset cannot be changed
when using the DR function.

[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq

1. Push [MENU]. 3. Select the duplex direction.
2. Select “DUP/TONE...” in the “SET” menu. •• OFF: For simplex operation (the receive and
transmit frequencies are the same).
•• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the
receive frequency by the offset amount.
•• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the
receive frequency by the offset amount.

3. Select “Offset Freq.”

4. Rotate [DIAL] to set the offset.

•• Displays “D–” or “D+.”

LLInformation
D
DDuplex operation
•• Set to between 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz. 1. Hold down [SQL] to listen to the transmit
•• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used to frequency to check whether another station is
set the offset. transmitting on it, or not.
•• To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU]. •• The shifted transmit frequency is displayed.
2. Operate in a normal way.
LLIn the same way as a simplex call, alternately
TIP: If the offset value causes the transmit frequency transmit and receive.
to be out of the band, “OFF BAND” is displayed
when you push [PTT], and transmit will be inhibited.
(p. 11-5) NOTE: When the Auto Repeater function is ON, and
the operating frequency is set out of the repeater
output frequency range, the Duplex mode is
automatically canceled.
([MENU] > SET > Function > Auto Repeater)

11-4
11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

Auto Repeater function Off band indication

When the operating frequency falls within the If the transmit frequency is out of the amateur band,
Repeater output frequency range, the Auto Repeater the off band indication, “OFF BAND,” is displayed
function automatically sets the Repeater settings when you push [PTT]. Check the frequency offset or
(Duplex ON/OFF, Duplex direction, Tone encoder ON/ duplex direction in this case. (p. 11-4)
OFF). The Auto Repeater function uses the preset
repeater tone frequency and frequency offset.
NOTE for the USA version transceiver:
When turned ON, the Auto Repeater function
has priority over the manual duplex setting. If the
transmit frequency changes after setting, the Auto
Repeater function may have changed the duplex
setting.

[MENU] > SET > Function > Auto Repeater

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.

3. Select “Auto Repeater.”

4. Select the option to turn ON the Auto Repeater

function.

•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.

•• ON (DUP): Turns ON only the duplex
operation. (Default)
•• ON (DUP, TONE): Turns ON the duplex operation
and Tone encoder.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

Frequency range and offset direction

Frequency range Shift direction
145.200 ~ 145.495 MHz “DUP–” is set
146.610 ~ 146.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
147.000 ~ 147.395 MHz “DUP+” is set
442.000 ~ 444.995 MHz “DUP+” is set
447.000 ~ 449.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
11-5
Section 12 SET MODE
Selecting an item��12-2
DD MENU screen operation��12-2
DD Selecting an item��12-3
DUP/TONE...��12-4
Scan��12-5
Scope��12-7
Call Sign��12-8
My Station��12-9
DV Set��12-10
SPEECH��12-13
DTMF/T-CALL��12-14
QSO/RX Log��12-15
Function��12-18
Display��12-25
Sounds��12-29
Time Set��12-30
SD Card��12-31
Bluetooth Set��12-32
Others��12-36

12-1
12 SET MODE

Selecting an item
You can open the MENU screen by pushing [MENU]. TIP: The MENU screen is constructed in a tree
You can use the MENU screen to set infrequently structure. You may go to the next tree level, or go
changed values or function settings. back a level, depending on the selected item.
In addition to this page, see pages 12-4 through 12-36
for details of each item’s options and default values.

D
DMENU screen operation
Selects an item or option.
Switches between the Goes to the
MENU screen and previous tree
the standby screen. level.

Goes to the previous Goes to the

tree level. next tree level.
Returns to the
[ENT] default setting.
Sets an option.

Selects an item or option.

Simplified description—‘Select’ operation

In this manual, the user’s ‘Select’ operation is
simplified, as described below.

Simplified description:
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “30min.”

Operation:
1. Push [MENU] to open the MENU screen.
2. Push D-pad() to select “30min,” and then push
[ENT].

12-2
12 SET MODE

Selecting an item

D
DSelecting an item
Example: Set “Auto Power OFF” to “30 min.” TIP: To return to the default setting
[MENU] > SET > Time Set > Auto Power OFF 1. Push [QUICK] in step 5.
2. Select “Default.”
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SET.”
3. Select “Time Set.”

•• The setting returns to the default.

4. Select “Auto Power OFF.”

5. Select “30min.”

•• Sets the option, then goes back to a tree level.

(The TIME SET screen is displayed.)
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

12-3
12 SET MODE

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA transceiver version. The default settings may differ,
depending on your transceiver version.

DUP/TONE...
Offset Freq (Default: 0.600.00*) DTCS Code (Default: 023)
[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq [MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > DTCS Code
Sets the frequency offset for Duplex (repeater) Selects a DTCS (both encoder/decoder) code for the
operation to between 0.000.00 and 59.995.00 MHz. DTCS Squelch.
LLPush [VFO/MHz] to select the 1 MHz tuning step. You can select a total of 104 codes (023 ~ 754).
LLThe Duplex shift direction (DUP–/DUP+) (p. 11-4) or the
tuning step is set in the Quick Menu window. •• Selectable DTCS codes
LLWhen the DR function is ON, editing is disabled. 023 072 152 244 311 412 466 631
025 073 155 245 315 413 503 632
* The default value may differ, depending on the frequency 026 074 156 246 325 423 506 654
band (selected as the MAIN band before entering the 031 114 162 251 331 431 516 662
MENU screen) and the transceiver version. 032 115 165 252 332 432 523 664
036 116 172 255 343 445 526 703
043 122 174 261 346 446 532 712
Repeater Tone (Default: 88.5) 047 125 205 263 351 452 546 723
[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone 051 131 212 265 356 454 565 731
053 132 223 266 364 455 606 732
Selects a repeater tone frequency for repeater access 054 134 225 271 365 462 612 734
and other functions. 065 143 226 274 371 464 624 743
You can select 50 tone frequencies (67.0 ~ 254.1 Hz). 071 145 243 306 411 465 627 754

TSQL Freq (Default: 88.5) DTCS Polarity (Default: Both N)

[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > TSQL Freq [MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > DTCS Polarity
Selects a CTCSS tone frequency for the Tone Squelch Selects the DTCS polarity to use for transmitting (TX)
function. and receiving (RX).
You can select 50 tone frequencies (67.0 ~ 254.1 Hz). •• Both N: Normal polarity is used for both TX and RX.
•• TN-RR: Normal polarity is used for TX, Reverse
•• Selectable Repeater Tone/TSQL frequencies polarity for RX.
(Unit: Hz) •• TR-RN: Reverse polarity is used for TX, Normal
67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3 polarity for RX.
69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1 •• Both R: Reverse polarity is used for both TX and
71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7 RX.
74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1
77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7
79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1 Digital Code (Default: 00)
82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6
85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8 [MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Digital Code
Selects the digital code for Digital Code Squelch.
You can select a total of 100 codes (00 ~ 99).
Tone Burst (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > Tone Burst
Turns the Tone Burst function ON or OFF in the FM
mode when using the Tone Squelch function.
•• OFF: When you transmit a signal that superimposes
the CTCSS tone, the other station may hear
a short burst of noise from their receiver, just
after you stop transmitting.
•• ON: When you transmit a signal that superimposes
the CTCSS tone, the function mutes the noise
from being heard in the other station’s receiver.

12-4
12 SET MODE

Scan
Pause Timer (Default: 10sec) Program Skip (Default: ON)
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Pause Timer [MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Skip
Selects the Scan Pause Timer. When receiving a Turns the Program Skip Scan function ON or OFF for
signal, the scan pauses for this set period of time. a VFO scan. This function enables the transceiver to
LLIndividually selectable for A band and B band. skip the unwanted frequencies that are entered as a
•• 2sec ~ 20sec: When a signal is received, the scan Memory channel and are set to “PSKIP.”
pauses for 2 ~ 20 seconds (in 2 LLIndividually selectable for A band and B band.
second steps). •• OFF: The transceiver scans all frequencies.
•• HOLD: The scan pauses on a received •• ON: The transceiver does not scan frequencies set
signal until the signal disappears. as “PSKIP” frequencies.

Resume Timer (Default: 2sec) Group Link (Default: ✔ 00 ~ ✔ 99/ ✔ S: SKIP CH)
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Resume Timer [MENU] > SET > Scan > Group Link
Selects the scan Resume Timer. When a received Selects groups to be scanned during a Group Link
signal disappears, the scan resumes for this set Scan. The Group Link function scans all channels in
period of time. the selected groups.
LLIndividually selectable for A band and B band. Select a group, A ~ Z, and then push [ENT] to turn the
•• 0sec: The scan resumes immediately after Link function ON or OFF.
the signal disappears. LLDisplays “✔” when the function is set to ON.
•• 1sec ~ 5sec: The scan resumes 1 ~ 5 seconds after LLIndividually selectable for A band and B band.
the signal disappears.
•• HOLD: The scan remains paused for the P-Scan Edge
“Pause Timer” setting, even if the
signal disappears. [MENU] > SET > Scan > P-Scan Edge
NOTE: Rotate [DIAL] to resume the scan. You can delete, copy, or edit the upper and lower
frequencies for programmed scans.
The transceiver has a total of up to 25 frequency
ranges (00 ~ 24), and you can set the scan name,
Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5min)
tuning step, and operating mode for each scan edge.
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer LLThe default setting may differ, depending on the
transceiver version.
Selects the effective time of the Temporary Skip
function.
LLIndividually selectable for A band and B band.
LLThis timer is activated for the VFO scan, Memory scan,
and DR scan.
•• 5min/10min/15min: The Temporary Skip channels
are skipped for the set period
of time.
•• While Scanning: The Temporary Skip channels
are skipped until the Scan is
stopped.
•• While Powered ON: The Temporary Skip channels
are skipped until the
transceiver is turned OFF.

12-5
12 SET MODE

Scan

Program Link
[MENU] > SET > Scan > Program Link
Sets the link function for two or more Program Scan
Edge ranges to be sequentially scanned during
a Program Link Scan. The link function scans all
frequencies in the scan range.

Default settings of the Program Link:

Program Link 0： 01：144.000−148.000
Edit Name Delete

1： 02：430.000−450.000
Blank
...

Delete
9：

Program Link number (0 to 9) Program Scan Edge range

LLThe default setting may differ, depending on the

transceiver version.
LLWhen only one Program Scan Edge range is entered, or
there is no Programmed Scan Edge is left, “Add” is not
displayed after pushing [QUICK].

DUP Check During MR Scan (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > SET > Scan > DUP Check During MR Scan
During a Memory scan, selects whether or not to scan
the offset frequency if Duplex is set on the channel.
•• OFF: The offset frequency is not scanned.
•• ON: The offset frequency is also scanned.

12-6
12 SET MODE

Scope
Scope Mode (Default: Center) FIX Mode Center Frequency
[MENU] > SET > Scope > Scope Mode [MENU] > SET > Scope > FIX Mode Center Frequency
Selects the Band Scope display mode. Sets the center frequency of the FIX mode Band
•• Center: Displays signals around the Scope for each band.
operating frequency within the LLThe selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used to set
selected span. the center frequency. To select the tuning step, open the
The operating frequency is always Quick Menu window on the Standby screen.
displayed in the center of the screen. LLTo return to the default setting, push [QUICK], and
then select “Default” on the “Center Freq. (FIX)” or
•• FIX: Displays signals within a specified
“FREQUENCY” screen.
frequency range. LLThe default setting may differ, depending on the
•• Scroll (FIX): Displays signals within a specified transceiver version.
frequency range. When the operating
frequency moves outside of the
screen, the displayed frequency AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band) (Default: OFF)
range is automatically shifted. [MENU] > SET > Scope > AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band)
Selects whether or not to momentarily output the
Displayed Steps (Default: ±15 Steps) received audio during a sweep by the Band Scope
[MENU] > SET > Scope > Displayed Steps function, when using the Dualwatch function or
selecting the AIR band.
Selects the number of displayed steps around the •• OFF: No audio is output during the sweep.
center frequency in the Band scope. •• ON: The received audio is momentarily output
LLThe tuning step depends on the TS setting.
during the sweep.
•• ±15 Steps:

•• ±20 Steps:

Waterfall Function (Default: ON)

[MENU] > SET > Scope > Waterfall Function
Selects whether or not to use the waterfall display in
the single display when the Band Scope function is
ON.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.
•• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.

Waterfall Speed (Default: Fast)

[MENU] > SET > Scope > Waterfall Speed
Selects the waterfall speed.
•• Slow: Sets the Waterfall speed to Slow.
•• Fast: Sets the Waterfall speed to Fast.

12-7
12 SET MODE

Call Sign
Call Sign
[MENU] > SET > Call Sign Step 2. Gateway “R2” setting
Set or view the “UR,” “R1,” “R2,” and “MY” call signs 1. Select “R2.”
to use in the DV mode. LLTo manually enter a call sign, push [QUICK], then
select “Edit.”
When not using the DR function, sets the call signs on
2. Select “GW.”
this screen.
About the RPT2 SELECT screen
For Simplex operation (DV mode)
You can set the “UR” and “MY” call signs. NOT USED* For local area calls
To select the gateway call sign from the
GW
For Duplex (repeater) operation repeater list.
(DV mode/DR function) To select the repeater that has the
Repeater name
You can set only the “MY” call sign when the DR same gateway as the “R1” repeater.
function is ON.

Step 3. Destination “UR” setting

<To manually set the Duplex (repeater) operation> 1. Select “UR.”
LLTo manually enter a call sign, push [QUICK], then
Example: M
aking a gateway CQ call to Kirkland select “Edit.”
repeater (N71H B) from the Hirano repeater 2. Select “Gateway CQ.”
(JP3YHH A), in the DV mode. 3. Select a repeater group where your destination
LLBefore starting to set the call sign, set the frequency of repeater is listed.
your Access repeater and duplex direction on the standby 4. Select a destination repeater.
screen.
About the YOUR SELECT screen
TIP: When the Digital Repeater Set function is ON, To select “CQCQCQ” to make a non-
CQCQCQ
the repeater call sign is automatically set. call sign specific call.
([MENU] > SET > DV Set > Digital Repeater Set) To select “Gateway CQ” to make a call
Gateway CQ*
using the repeater list.
Step 1. Setting the call sign “R1” To select the destination “UR” call sign
Your Call Sign
1. Select “R1.” using the Your Call Sign memory.
LLDO NOT push [ENT]. To select the destination “UR” call sign
RX History
2. Push [QUICK]. using RX History.
3. Select “Edit.” To select the destination “UR” call sign
TX History
4. Rotate [DIAL] to enter the first character. using TX History.
LLSelectable characters are alphanumeric characters
and symbol (“/”). * Not displayed in the Simplex mode.
5. Push D-pad () to move the cursor.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the repeater call
sign of up to 8 characters, including a space.
(Example: JP3YHH A)
7. After entering, push [ENT].
•• Saves the entered repeater call sign.

12-8
12 SET MODE

My Station
My Call Sign TX Message
[MENU] > SET > My Station > My Call Sign [MENU] > SET > My Station > TX Message
The transceiver has a total of 6 memories to save The transceiver has a total of 5 memories to save
your own call signs for use in the DV mode. You can short messages for transmission with your voice
enter a call sign of up to 8 digits. signal in the DV mode.
Also, you can enter a note of up to 4 characters, for Enter a message of up to 20 alphanumeric characters
operating transceiver type, area, and so on. for each memory.
LLSee D-STAR GUIDE in the Basic manual for MY Call Sign LLSee page 5-17 for TX message entry.
entry. LLTo select other TX message, push D-pad() to select
LLTo select another My Call Sign, push D-pad() to select a memory, and then push [ENT] on the TX MESSAGE
a call sign, and then push [ENT] on the MY CALL SIGN screen.
screen.

TIP: To transmit no message, select “OFF.”

12-9
12 SET MODE

DV Set
RX Bass (Default: Normal) Auto Reply (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Tone Control > RX Bass [MENU] > SET > DV Set > Auto Reply
Selects the receive audio bass filter level. Selects an option for the Automatic Reply function in
•• Cut: Reduces low frequencies. the DV mode. This function automatically replies to a
•• Normal: Normal tone balance. call addressed to your own call sign (MY), even if you
•• Boost: Increases low frequencies. are away from the transceiver.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: Replies with your own call sign (MY).
RX Treble (Default: Normal)
(No audio reply is sent)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Tone Control > RX Treble •• Voice: Replies with your call sign (MY) and any
Auto Reply message recorded on the
Selects the receive audio treble filter level.
microSD (up to 10 seconds).
•• Cut: Reduces high frequencies.
LLThe transmitted audio can be monitored.
•• Normal: Normal tone balance. LLIf no microSD card is inserted, or no
•• Boost: Increases high frequencies. message is recorded, only your call sign is
transmitted.
RX Bass Boost (Default: OFF) •• Position: Replies with your own call sign and
transmits your position data using the
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Tone Control > internal GPS receiver.
RX Bass Boost LLWhen “GPS Select” is set to “OFF” or
Turns the Receive Audio Bass Boost function ON or “Manual,” the internal GPS receiver is
temporarily turned ON.
OFF.
LLWhen “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the Automatic Reply
LLThis function is different from the “Boost” setting of “RX
function is automatically turned OFF when you push
Bass.”
[PTT]. When “Position” is selected, the Automatic Reply
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. function is not turned OFF, even if you push [PTT].
•• ON: This function boosts the receive audio bass.

DV Data TX (Default: Auto)

TX Bass (Default: Normal)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Data TX
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Tone Control > TX Bass
Selects whether to manually or automatically transmit
Selects the transmit audio bass filter level. data in the DV mode.
•• Cut: Reduces low frequencies. •• PTT: Push [PTT] to manually transmit data.
•• Normal: Normal tone balance. •• Auto: When data is input from a PC through the
•• Boost: Increases low frequencies. [USB] port, the transceiver automatically
transmits it.
TX Treble (Default: Normal)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Tone Control > TX Treble Fast Data (Default: OFF)
Selects the transmit audio treble filter level. [MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Fast Data > Fast Data
•• Cut: Reduces high frequencies. Selects whether or not to use the DV Fast Data
•• Normal: Normal tone balance. function for data communication in the DV mode.
•• Boost: Increases high frequencies. The DV Fast Data function uses the data and the
audio frames to send data approximately 3.5 times
faster than the normal speed. So, no audio can be
sent.
•• OFF: Sends data at a slow speed
(approximately 950 bps).
•• ON: Sends data at a fast speed
(approximately 3480 bps).
LLEven if “ON” is selected, when you push [PTT], the data
is sent at the slow speed, because the audio frame is
used for the audio transmission.
LLThe GPS data speed is set in “GPS Data Speed.”

12-10
12 SET MODE

DV Set

GPS Data Speed (Default: Slow) DV Auto Detect (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Fast Data > [MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Auto Detect
GPS Data Speed Turns the DV mode Automatic Detect function ON
Sets the GPS data speed when the data is sent using or OFF. When in the DV mode, if you receive a non-
the DV Fast Data function. digital signal, this function automatically sets the
•• Slow: Sends GPS data at slow speed operating mode to the FM mode.
(approximately 950 bps). •• OFF: Turns the function OFF. The operating mode
•• Fast: Sends GPS data at fast speed is fixed to the DV mode.
(approximately 3480 bps). •• ON: Automatically selects the FM mode for
temporary operation.
TX Delay (PTT) (Default: 2sec)
RX Record (RPT) (Default: ALL)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > DV Fast Data >
TX Delay (PTT) [MENU] > SET > DV Set > RX Record (RPT)
Sets the time for when the transceiver returns to The transceiver can record the data of up to 50
receive after sending DV data in the DV Fast Data individual calls. When the received signal includes a
mode using [PTT]. status message (“UR?” or “RPT?”) that is sent back
•• OFF: After releasing [PTT], the transceiver from the access repeater, you can record up to 50
returns to receive. messages, or only the last call, in the Received Call
•• 1 ~ 10sec: After releasing [PTT], the transceiver Record.
sends data using the DV Fast Data •• ALL: Records up to 50 calls.
mode for this set period. •• Latest Only: Records only the last call.
When the TX data is completely sent
within this set period, the transceiver
[RX>CS] Key (Default: Call Sign Capture)
automatically returns to receive.
NOTE: This function is usable only when “DV Data [MENU] > SET > DV Set > [RX>CS] Key
TX” is set to “PTT.” Selects the [RX→CS] Call Sign Capture key operation
when you hold down.
•• Call Sign Capture: While holding down, the RX
Digital Monitor (Default: Auto) History is displayed. After
releasing, the last received call
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Digital Monitor station’s call sign is set to “TO”
Selects a receive mode when pushing [SQL] in the DV (destination).
mode. •• RX>CS List: When you hold down for 1
•• Auto: Receives in the DV mode or the FM mode, second, the RX History is
depending on the received signal. displayed. Rotate [DIAL] to
•• Digital: Receives in the DV mode. select a call sign to set to “TO”
•• Analog: Receives in the FM mode. (destination), and then push
[ENT].

Digital Repeater Set (Default: ON)

BK (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > Digital Repeater Set
[MENU] > SET > DV Set > BK
Turns the Digital Repeater Set function ON or OFF.
When accessing a repeater that has a call sign that The Break-in (BK) function enables you to break
is different from the transceiver’s setting, this function into a conversation, where the two other stations are
reads the repeater’s transmit signal and automatically communicating with call sign squelch enabled.
sets the repeater call sign. •• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. •• ON: Turns ON the function.
LLThe BK function is automatically turned OFF when the
•• ON: Automatically sets the repeater call sign.
transceiver is turned OFF.

12-11
12 SET MODE

DV Set

EMR (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > EMR
The Enhanced Monitor Request (EMR) function
enables all transceivers that receive an EMR signal
in the DV mode automatically to open their squelch to
receive the signal.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: Turns ON the function.
LLThe EMR function is automatically turned OFF when the
transceiver is turned OFF.

EMR AF Level (Default: 19)

[MENU] > SET > DV Set > EMR AF Level
Sets the audio output level when an EMR
communication mode signal is received. When an
EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard at the
programmed level, or the transceiver’s audio level,
whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set to “0.”
NOTE: After an EMR signal disappears, the audio
level will remain at the EMR level. In this case, rotate
[VOL] to adjust the audio level.

12-12
12 SET MODE

SPEECH
RX Call Sign SPEECH (Default: ON (Kerchunk)) DIAL SPEECH (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > SPEECH > RX Call Sign SPEECH [MENU] > SET > SPEECH > DIAL SPEECH
Turns the RX Call Sign Speech function ON or OFF Turns the Dial Speech function ON or OFF.
for calls received in the DV mode. The Dial Speech function announces the frequency or
repeater call sign that is selected by rotating [DIAL].
LLInformation
LLWhen using the DR function, the frequency is announced
•• When the Digital Squelch function is used, the calling
if the Simplex mode is selected or the FM repeater does
station’s call sign is not announced if the received signal
not have a call sign.
is not addressed to your call sign, or does not include a
LLWhen you receive a signal during an announcement, the
matching digital code.
transceiver cancels the announcement, and you can hear
•• When you receive a signal from a repeater (“UR?” or
the received audio.
“RPT?”), the caller station’s call sign is not announced.
•• While scanning, the transceiver resumes the scan during
an announcement. •• OFF: The frequency or repeater call sign is not
•• Even if a note is entered after the call sign, it is not announced.
announced. •• ON: The frequency or repeater call sign is
•• When you receive a signal during an announcement, the announced, 1 second after rotating [DIAL].
transceiver cancels the announcement, and you can hear In the VFO, Memory, or Call Channel mode,
the received audio. the frequency is announced.
When using the DR function, the repeater call
•• OFF: The caller station’s call sign is not sign is announced.
announced, even when a call is
received.
•• ON (Kerchunk): The caller station’s call sign is MODE SPEECH (Default: OFF)
announced only when they make a [MENU] > SET > SPEECH > MODE SPEECH
quick transmission.
Turns the operating mode announcement ON or OFF.
•• ON (All): The caller station’s call sign is
LLDuring a VFO scan, the operating mode is announced
always announced. when you change the mode.
•• OFF: The selected operating mode is not
RX>CS SPEECH (Default: ON) announced.
•• ON: The selected operating mode is announced.
[MENU] > SET > SPEECH > RX>CS SPEECH
Turns the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF. SPEECH Language (Default: English)
The RX>CS Speech function announces the station
call sign that is selected from a Received Call Record [MENU] > SET > SPEECH > SPEECH Language
by pushing [RX→CS]. Sets the speech language to English or Japanese.
LLIf a call is received during an announcement, the received
audio is muted, and the audio is not recorded onto the
microSD card. Alphabet (Default: Normal)

•• OFF: The station call sign is not announced. [MENU] > SET > SPEECH > Alphabet
•• ON: The station call sign is announced. Selects the type of phonetic announcement.
• Normal: Normal code is used.
(Example: A as eh, B as bee)
• Phonetic Code: The Phonetic code is used.
(Example: A as Alfa, B as Bravo)

12-13
12 SET MODE

SPEECH DTMF/T-CALL
SPEECH Speed (Default: Fast) You can set the DTMF tone code and DTMF Memory
channel for DTMF tone operation.
[MENU] > SET > SPEECH > SPEECH Speed See page 15-5 for details.
Sets the speech speed to Fast or Slow.
DTMF Memory (Default: d0)

SPEECH Level (Default: 7) [MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory
Displays a list of the DTMF Memory channels.
[MENU] > SET > SPEECH > SPEECH Level •• T-CALL: 1750 Hz tone burst signal
Sets the Voice Synthesizer audio output level to •• d0 ~ d#: DTMF memory channel list
between 0 (OFF), 1 (minimum) and 9 (maximum).
LLThe voice synthesizer audio output level is linked with the
[VOL] setting from the minimum audio volume up to this DTMF Speed (Default: 100ms)
set level. [MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Speed
Selects the DTMF transmit speed.
•• 100ms: Transmits the DTMF codes at about 100
milliseconds per code
(5 characters per second).
•• 200ms: Transmits the DTMF codes at about 200
milliseconds per code
(2.5 characters per second).
•• 300ms: Transmits the DTMF codes at about 300
milliseconds per code
(1.6 characters per second).
•• 500ms: Transmits the DTMF codes at about 500
milliseconds per code
(1 character per second).

12-14
12 SET MODE

QSO/RX Log
QSO Log (Default: ON) Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep[,] Dec[.])
[MENU] > SET > QSO/RX Log > QSO Log [MENU] > SET > QSO/RX Log > CSV Format >
Selects whether or not to make a communication log Separator/Decimal
on a microSD card. The communication log is made Selects the separator and the decimal character for
on the card, and saved in the “csv” format. the CSV format.
LLThis function requires a microSD card (User supplied). LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
transceiver version.
•• OFF: The QSO Log function is OFF. •• Sep [,] Dec [.]: Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.”
•• ON: The transceiver makes a log on the microSD •• Sep [;] Dec [.]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.”
card. The transceiver starts making a log •• Sep [;] Dec [,]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “,”
when you begin talking.
Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy)
TIP:
•• The folder name is automatically created, as
[MENU] > SET > QSO/RX Log > CSV Format >
[ID-52\QsoLog]. Date
•• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the Selects the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,”
example below: “mm/dd/yyyy,” and “dd/mm/yyyy.”
Log start date and time: 1st November 2021 15:30:00 (y: year, m: month, d: day)
File name: 20211101_153000.csv LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
•• The log contents are not displayed on the transceiver. transceiver version.
•• You can display the log contents on a PC.

RX History Log (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > SET > QSO/RX Log > RX History Log
Selects whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive
history log on a microSD card. The receive history log
is made on a microSD card, and saved in the “csv”
format.
LLThis function requires a microSD card (User supplied).

•• OFF: The RX History Log function is OFF

•• ON: The transceiver makes a DV mode’s receive
history log on the microSD card. The
transceiver starts making a receive history log
when you finish talking.

TIP:
•• The folder name is automatically created, as
[ID-52\RxLog].
•• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the
example below:
Log start date and time: 1st November 2021 15:30:00
File name: 20211101_153000.csv
•• The log contents are not displayed on the transceiver.
•• You can display the log contents on a PC.

12-15
12 SET MODE

QSO/RX Log

The call log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions

TX/RX TX RX Transmission and reception
Date 11/01/2021 13:51:48 11/01/2021 13:51:48 Date and time the call was started.
Frequency 438.010000 438.010000 Operating frequency
Mode DV DV Operating mode (FM/FM-N/DV)
Your latitude (unit: degrees)
My Latitude 34.764667 34.764667
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Your longitude (unit: degrees)
My Longitude 135.375333 135.375333
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Your altitude (unit: meters)
My Altitude 50.5 50.5
Records to one decimal place.
RF Power LOW (Blank) TX output power level
The relative signal strength of the receive signal
S meter (Blank) S0
(in 14 levels)
RPT Call Sign JP3YHJ JP3YHJ A Repeater call sign (DV mode only)
TX Call Sign CQCQCQ (Blank) TX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Call Sign (Blank) JA3YUA A/52 RX Call sign/Note (DV mode only)
Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degrees)
RX Latitude (Blank) 34.764667 (+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.
Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degrees)
RX Longitude (Blank) 135.375333 (+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.
Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: meters)
RX Altitude (Blank) 30.5
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.

12-16
12 SET MODE

QSO/RX Log

The RX log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions

Frequency 438.010000 RX Frequency
Mode DV Operating mode (DV mode is fixed)
Caller JA3YUA A Call sign of the caller station (up to 8 characters)
/ ID52 Note after the call sign (up to 4 characters)
Called CQCQCQ Call sign of the called station
Access repeater call sign of the caller station, or the gateway repeater
Rx RPT1 JP3YHH G
call sign of your local area repeater.
Rx RPT2 JP3YHH A Access repeater call sign of the called station
Message Hello CQ D-STAR! Message included in the received call (up to 20 characters)
Status (Blank) Normal: blank, Uplink: “RPT UP”, Access repeater reply: “UR?” or “RPT?”
Date and time the call was received
Received date 11/01/2021 13:51:48
The format may differ, depending on the setting.
BK * BK call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
EMR * EMR call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
Latitude 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degrees) (+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Longitude 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degrees) (+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Altitude 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: meters) Records to one decimal place.
SSID -A Caller’s SSID, if sent. (0, -1 to -15, -A to -Z)
D-PRS Symbol Car Icon: Converts to text, None: Code
Course 123 Caller’s course (unit: degrees)
Speed 23.5 Caller’s speed (unit: km/h) Records to one decimal place.
Power 49 TX power (unit: watts)
Height 24 Antenna height (unit: meters)
Gain 6 Antenna gain (unit: dB)
Directivity Omni Antenna directivity (Omni, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315, or 360)
Object/Item Name HAM FES Object name or Item name (up to 9 characters)
Data Type Live Object Data type of Object or Item (Live or Kill)
Temperature 20.5 Temperature (unit: °C) Records to two decimal places.
Rainfall 253.75 Rainfall (unit: mm) Records to two decimal places.
Rainfall (24 Hours) 253.75 Rainfall (24 Hours) (unit: mm) Records to two decimal places.
Rainfall (Midnight) 253.75 Rainfall (Midnight) (unit: mm) Records to two decimal places.
Wind Direction 315 Wind Direction (unit: degrees)
Wind Speed 10.0 Wind Speed (unit: m/s) Records to one decimal place.
Gust Speed 10.0 Gust Speed (unit: m/s) Records to one decimal place.
Barometric 1013.0 Barometric (unit: hPa) Records to one decimal place.
Humidity 85 Humidity (unit: %)
GPS Time Stamp 12:00:00 Time data that the caller station acquires along with the position data
Caller is “NMEA”: Records the GPS message
GPS Message Osaka City/ID-52
Caller is “D-PRS: Records the D-PRS comment

12-17
12 SET MODE

Function
Power Save (Default: Auto (Short)) Dial Speed-UP (Default: ON)
[MENU] > SET > Function > Power Save [MENU] > SET > Function > Dial Speed-UP
Sets the Power Save function to reduce the current Turns the Dial Speed Acceleration ON or OFF.
drain and conserve battery power. When the Power The acceleration automatically increases the tuning
Save function is activated, the call sign or the speed when you rapidly rotate [DIAL].
beginning of the signal may not be received correctly. •• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. •• ON: Turns ON the function.
•• Auto (Short): Sets the Power saving time to
“Short.”
Auto Repeater (Default: ON (DUP))
15 ms
Standby [MENU] > SET > Function > Auto Repeater
Reception→ The Auto repeater function automatically turns the
Disabled
75 ms duplex operation and tone encoder ON or OFF.
No signal is received LLThis item is displayed in only the USA version.
for 5 seconds�
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON (DUP): Turns ON the duplex settings
•• Auto (Middle): Sets the Power saving time to only.
“Middle.” •• ON (DUP, TONE): Turns ON the duplex settings
15 ms 15 ms
Standby
and the tone encoder function.

Reception→
～
～

Disabled
75 ms 150 ms Remote MIC Key
↑ 60 s
No signal is received [MENU] > SET > Function > Remote MIC Key
for 5 seconds�
The function assignments for the [A], [B], [], and
•• Auto (Long): Sets the Power saving time to [] keys on the optional HM-75LS remote control
“Long.” speaker microphone can be changed.
See pages 12-19 and 12-20 for the assignable key
15 ms 15 ms
Standby
functions.
•• During RX/Standby: The assigned key function is
Reception→ enabled while receiving or in
～
～

Disabled 300 ms
75 ms the standby mode.
↑ 60 s
No signal is received
(Default: [A]: BAND
for 5 seconds� [B]: VFO/MR
[]: UP
[]: DOWN)
NOTE: The Power Save function is disabled when: •• During TX: The assigned key function is
•• Using an external DC power source.
enabled while transmitting.
•• Scanning.
(Default: [A]: T-CALL
•• Using the DV Gateway function.
•• Using the VOX function. [B]: ---
[]: ---
[]: ---)
Monitor (Default: Push)
TIP: Volume level adjustment while monitoring
[MENU] > SET > Function > Monitor •• When “VOL UP”/“VOL DOWN” are assigned, push
Selects an option for the [SQL] Monitor function. these keys to adjust the volume level.
•• When “VOL UP”/“VOL DOWN” are not assigned, but
(Basic manual Section 3)
“UP”/“DOWN” are assigned, push these keys to adjust
•• Push: Hold down [SQL] to monitor the frequency. the volume level.
Release to stop monitoring. •• When “VOL UP”/“VOL DOWN”/“UP”/“DOWN” are not
•• Hold: Push [SQL] momentarily to monitor the assigned, push []/[] to adjust the volume level, if
frequency and push momentarily again to “Monitor (Push)” or “Monitor (Hold)” is not assigned to
cancel it. []/[].

12-18
12 SET MODE

Function

The assignable key functions

•• During RX/Standby
Function Descriptions
--- No function
UP Push to increase the frequency, Memory channel, repeater, or station call sign.
DOWN Push to decrease the frequency, Memory channel, repeater, or station call sign.
VOL UP Push to increase the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to decrease the volume level.
SQL UP Push to increase the squelch level.
SQL DOWN Push to decrease the squelch level.
Monitor (Push) Hold down to open the squelch. Release to close the squelch.
Monitor (Hold) Push to open or close the squelch.
CALL Push to select a Call Channel mode.
MR (00-00 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select Memory channel 00-00.
MR (00-01 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select Memory channel 00-01.
VFO/MR Push to select the VFO mode and the Memory mode.
DR Push to turn the DR function ON or OFF.
FROM (DR) In the DR screen, push to select “FROM.”
TO (DR) In the DR screen, push to select “TO.”
Push to directly select the Home Channel that is set to the selected mode (VFO/Memory) or DR screen.
Home CH
LLWhile in the Call Channel mode, or when no Home CH is set, an error beep sounds.
BAND Push to select an operating band.
SCAN Push to start the previously selected scan. While scanning, push to stop the scan.
Push to set the frequency to be skipped while scanning.
Temporary Skip
The selected frequencies are temporarily skipped for faster scanning.
Hold down for 1 second to set the last calling station’s call sign to “TO” (destination).
LLIf “[RX→CS] Key” is set to “RX > CS List,” the received call sign is not captured. The RX History list
RX>CS is displayed instead.
LLTo select the call sign in the RX History using the optional remote control speaker microphone,
assign “UP”/“DOWN.”
•• In the VFO, Memory, or Call Channel mode, push to announce the frequency and operating mode.
•• In the DR screen, push to announce the call sign.
SPEECH LLIf the Simplex mode is selected, the frequency is announced.
If the FM repeater is selected, the frequency and operating mode, or the call sign and operating
mode are announced.
•• Push to set the A or B band as the MAIN band.
MAIN/DUAL
•• Hold down for 1 second to turn the Dualwatch function ON or OFF.
MODE Push to select the operating mode.
LOW Push to select the transmit output power.
DUP Push to turn the Duplex mode ON or OFF, and the shift direction to DUP+ or DUP–.
•• In the FM/FM-N mode, push to select the tone type.
TONE/D.SQL
•• In the DV mode, push to select the digital squelch type.
In the VFO mode or on the DR screen, hold down for 1 second to enter the Memory channel contents
MW
to a blank channel.
•• Push to start recording.
REC
•• While recording, hold down for 1 second to stop recording.
•• Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD card once.
Voice TX
•• Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.

12-19
12 SET MODE

Function

The assignable key functions

•• During TX
Function Descriptions
--- No function
VOL UP Push to increase the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to decrease the volume level.
•• Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD card once.
Voice TX •• Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.
LLTo make a repeat transmission, [PTT] must be released after the transmission is started.
T-CALL Push to transmit a 1750 Hz tone.

12-20
12 SET MODE

Function

Key Lock (Default: Normal) Active Band (Default: All)

[MENU] > SET > Function > Key Lock [MENU] > SET > Function > Active Band
Selects the key lock type when the Key Lock function Selects whether or not to enable continuous frequency
is ON. selection of the operating frequency across all bands
using [DIAL].
NOTE: Regardless of the setting, you can still use
•• Single: When you rotate [DIAL] on the band edge,
[ ], [PTT], and [ ] even if the Key Lock function is
the displayed band’s higher or lower
ON.
frequency is selected.
•• Normal: All keys and dials, except [SQL] and [VOL] •• All: When you rotate [DIAL] on the band edge,
are locked. the next band is selected.
•• No SQL: All keys and dials, except [SQL] are locked. The selectable frequencies are set to all
•• No VOL: All keys and dials, except [VOL] are locked. bands, for continuous selection.
•• ALL: All keys and dials are locked. •• HAM: When you rotate [DIAL] on the band
edge, the amateur band’s higher or lower
frequency is selected. You cannot select a
PTT Lock (Default: OFF) frequency out of the amateur band.
LLTo select another band when “Single” is selected, push
[MENU] > SET > Function > PTT Lock
[QUICK], then select “Band Select.”
Turns the PTT Lock function ON or OFF. LLThis setting is for the [DIAL] operation, so all frequencies
To prevent accidental transmissions, this function are scanned.
inhibits all transmissions.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. MIC Gain (Internal) (Default: 2)
•• ON: Inhibits all transmissions.
[MENU] > SET > Function > MIC Gain (Internal)
Busy Lockout (Default: OFF) Sets the internal microphone gain to between 1
(minimum) and 4 (maximum), to suit your operation
[MENU] > SET > Function > Busy Lockout needs.
Turns the Busy Lockout function ON or OFF. Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to
This function inhibits a transmission while receiving a your voice.
signal, or when the squelch is open.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. MIC Gain (External) (Default: 2)
•• ON: Turns ON the function.
[MENU] > SET > Function > MIC Gain (External)
Time-Out Timer (Default: 5min) Sets the external microphone gain to between 1
(minimum) and 4 (maximum), to suit your operation
[MENU] > SET > Function > Time-Out Timer needs.
To prevent an accidental prolonged transmission, Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to
the transceiver has the Time-Out Timer function. The your voice.
function inhibits continuous transmissions longer than
this set period of time.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• 1 to 30 min: The transmission is cut OFF after the
set period of time ends
(1, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes).

12-21
12 SET MODE

Function

VOX (Default: OFF) CI-V Address (Default: A6)

[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX [MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Address
Turns the Voice Operated Transmission (VOX) Sets the CI-V address in hexadecimal code.
function ON or OFF. LLTo distinguish devices, each CI-V transceiver has its own
The VOX function starts transmission without pushing Icom standard address. “A6” is the default address of
[PTT] when you speak into the microphone, and the ID-52A/ID-52E. When 2 or more ID-52A/ID-52Es are
then, automatically returns to receive when you stop simultaneously controlled by a PC, set a different address
for each transceiver between 02 and DF (hexadecimal).
speaking.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: Starts transmission without pushing [PTT] CI-V Baud Rate (SP Jack) (Default: Auto)
when you speak into the microphone. Then
automatically returns to receive when you [MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V >
stop speaking. CI-V Baud Rate (SP Jack)
Sets the CI-V data transfer speed when remotely
controlling the transceiver through the [SP] jack,
VOX Level (Default: 5)
to 4800, 9600, 19200 bps, or Auto. When “Auto” is
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX Level selected, the baud rate is automatically set according
to the controller’s data rate.
Sets the VOX gain level to between 1 and 10, or OFF.
Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive
to your voice. CI-V Transceive (Default: OFF)
•• OFF: Turns OFF the VOX function.
•• 1 ~ 10: 1 (The minimum sensitivity) [MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive
10 (The maximum sensitivity) Turns the Transceive function ON or OFF.
LLTo use the RS-MS1A or RS-MS1I, set to “ON.”
•• OFF: The status is not output.
VOX Delay (Default: 0.5sec)
•• ON: The status is output. When you change
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX Delay a transceiver setting, the same change
is automatically set on other connected
Sets the VOX Delay to 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0
transceivers or receivers, and vice versa.
seconds. The VOX Delay is the amount of time the
transmitter stays ON after you stop speaking, before
the VOX switches to receive. CI-V USB/Bluetooth→REMOTE Transceive
Address (Default: 00)
VOX Time-Out Timer (Default: 3min) [MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V >
CI-V USB/Bluetooth→REMOTE Transceive Address
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX >
VOX Time-Out Timer If you remotely operate your transceiver through a
USB cable or using Bluetooth when “CI-V Transceive”
Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to prevent an accidental
is set to ON, the devices in the same system are also
prolonged transmission. To disable the function, set to
externally controlled through the [SP] jack.
“OFF.”
To prohibit the external control of an Icom transceiver,
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
set this value to other than “00.”
•• 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 15min:
The control signal is output from the [SP] jack.
If a continuous transmission exceeds the set
Select an address between 00 and DF (hexadecimal).
period of time, the transmission is stopped.

Headset Select (Default: Other)

[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > Headset Select
Selects the headset type to be connected.
•• HS-95: Select when using the HS-95.
•• Other: Select when using the HS-94 or HS-97.

12-22
12 SET MODE

Function

USB Connect (Default: Serialport) USB Serialport Function

(Default: CI-V (Echo Back OFF))
[MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect
Selects the mode when connecting the transceiver to [MENU] > SET > Function > USB Serialport Function
a PC with a USB cable. Selects the Serialport function for the USB connection
•• Charge Only: to a data device, PC, and so on.
You can only charge the transceiver using a USB •• CI-V (Echo Back OFF):
cable. The CI-V command is input or output
•• Serialport: through the USB port. Does not send
You can program the transceiver, input/output back the CI-V command input from the
D-STAR data, output GPS information, input USB port.
weather data, and remotely control the transceiver •• CI-V (Echo Back ON):
using the CI-V commands. The CI-V command is input or output
LLInformation
through the USB port. Sends back the
•• You need to install the USB driver. CI-V command input from the USB port.
•• When a PC is connected, the USB connection indicator •• DV Data: The DV data is input or output to the USB
is displayed on the transceiver. port.
•• Select the input/output data type in “USB Serialport
Function.”
•• Confirm that “GPS Select” is set to “ON,” when you output NOTE: When “CI-V (Echo Back OFF)” or “CI-V
the received position data. (Echo Back ON)” is selected, you cannot remotely
([MENU] > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
control the transceiver through the [SP] jack.
•• SD Card Mode:
You can transfer the files between the inserted
microSD card and a PC, using a USB cable.
LLA confirmation dialog is displayed. (p. 2-9) Heterodyne (Default: Normal)
[MENU] > SET > Function > Heterodyne
NOTE: Selects the 1st Local Oscillator frequency.
•• To charge from a PC, set “USB Power Input (Phone,
Depending on a combination of the two operating
Tablet, PC)” to “ON.”
frequencies in the Dualwatch mode, the transceiver
•• Use a data communication compatible USB cable when
“Serialport” or “SD Card Mode” is selected. might generate a spurious signal on a specific receive
•• While in the SD Card Mode, the transceiver works frequency. This may cause the S-meter to fluctuate,
not as a transceiver but as a data storage device. It even when no signal is received, for example.
temporarily stops recording and logging. If this occurs, the Heterodyne function may help. The
Heterodyne function shifts the 1st Local Oscillator
TIP: Download the USB driver and the installation frequency to the opposite side of the signal to change
guide from the Icom website. the frequency combination.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

12-23
12 SET MODE

Function

Battery Pack Select (Default: BP-271/BP-272) LO/CALL Key Actions (Default: Standard)
[MENU] > SET > Function > Battery Pack Select [MENU] > SET > Function > LO/CALL Key Actions
Selects the model of the attached battery pack to Selects whether or not to change the [CALL], [LO],
display the optimized battery status. and [MR] keys operation to the same as the ID-51A/E.
•• Standard: The key’s operations do not change.
•• ID-51 Compatible (CS/LOW):
Battery Pack Confirmation (Default: OFF)
The key’s operation change as described
[MENU] > SET > Function > Battery Pack Confirmation below.
[CALL]: Hold down for 1 second to
Selects whether or not to display the Battery Pack
change the transmit power
Select dialog the first time the transceiver is turned
levels.
ON after reattaching a battery pack.
[LO]: In the DV mode, hold down for
1 second to display the CALL
Charging (Power ON) (Default: ON) SIGN screen.
[MR]: Push to enter the Memory mode,
[MENU] > SET > Function > Charging (Power ON)
and then push again to enter the
Selects whether or not to charge the battery pack Call Channel mode.
when the optional external DC power cable (CP-12L For the ID-52A only
or OPC-254L) is connected to [DC IN], even if the In the Call Channel mode,
transceiver is ON. push to enter the Weather
Channel mode.
USB Power Input (Phone, Tablet, PC) (Default: ON)
[MENU] > SET > Function > [CALL]
USB Power Input (Phone, Tablet, PC) [MR]
Selects whether or not to use a mobile device or a PC
as an external power source. [LO]

Screen Capture [PWR] Key (Default: OFF)

[MENU] > SET > Function > Screen Capture [PWR] Key
Assigns the Screen Capture function to [ ].
•• OFF: [ ] does not act as the Screen Capture key.
•• ON: Pushing [ ] captures the transceiver display
onto a microSD card.

Screen Capture File Type (Default: BMP)

[MENU] > SET > Function > Screen Capture File Type
Sets the file format for the Screen Capture function to
PNG or BMP.

12-24
12 SET MODE

Display
Backlight (Default: Auto (DC IN:ON)) Dim Screen (Default: ON)
[MENU] > SET > Display > Backlight [MENU] > SET > Display > Dim Screen
Selects an option for the transceiver backlight. Selects whether or not to automatically reduce the
•• OFF: The backlight does not light. backlight brightness.
•• ON: The backlight lights continuously. •• OFF: The backlight immediately goes out after the
•• Auto: The backlight lights when you push a key or set period of time in “Backlight Timer.”
rotate [DIAL], and reduces the brightness* •• ON: The backlight brightness automatically changes
after the set period of time in “Backlight Timer.” to the “Brightness (Dim)” level after the set
•• Auto (DC IN:ON): period of time in “Backlight Timer,” and goes
The backlight lights when you push a key or out after the set period of time in “Dim Timer.”
rotate [DIAL], and reduces the brightness*
after the set period of time in “Backlight Timer.” The image of the Dim Screen function
When an external DC power source is Operating No operating
connected, lights continuously. The Dim Screen The Backlight
LLWhen using the GPS Logger Only mode, “Auto” is function is ON� goes out�
automatically selected.
* When “Dim Screen” is set to “OFF,” the backlight goes out
after the set period of time in “Backlight Timer.”
Backlight Timer Dim Timer
(Default: 10sec) (Default: 1min)

Backlight Timer (Default: 10sec) Lights at the Lights at the

“Brightness” level� “Brightness (Dim)” level�
[MENU] > SET > Display > Backlight Timer (Default: 8) (Default: 1)

Sets the Backlight Timer to 5, 10, or 30 seconds.

Depending on the “Backlight” setting, the backlight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
lights for this set period of time, and then automatically
reduces the brightness. Dim Timer (Default: 1min)
LLWhen “Dim Screen” is set to “OFF,” the backlight goes out
after this set period of time. [MENU] > SET > Display > Dim Timer
Sets the Dim Timer to 1, 2, 5, or 10 minutes, or Hold.
Brightness (Default: 8) Depending on the “Dim Screen” setting, the backlight
lights at the “Brightness (Dim)” level for this set period
[MENU] > SET > Display > Brightness of time, and then automatically goes out.
Sets the LCD backlight brightness level to between •• 1/2/5/10min: The backlight goes out after this set
1 (dim) and 8 (bright). period of time.
•• Hold: The backlight does not go out.

Brightness (Dim) (Default: 1)

[MENU] > SET > Display > Brightness (Dim)
Sets the LCD backlight brightness level for the set period
of time in “Dim Timer,” to between 1 (dim) and 7 (bright).
LLSet a lower level than “Brightness.” If you set a higher level
than “Brightness,” the Dim Screen function does not work.
LLYou can check the brightness at each level on the
“Brightness” screen.

Background Color (Default: White)

[MENU] > SET > Display > Background Color
Sets the display background color to Black or White.

Contrast (Default: Standard)

[MENU] > SET > Display > Contrast
Sets the display contrast to Light, Standard, or Dark.
12-25
12 SET MODE

Display

Busy LED (Default: ON) RX Position Display (Default: ON (Main/Sub))

[MENU] > SET > Display > Busy LED [MENU] > SET > Display > RX Position Display
Selects whether or not to light the TX/RX indicator Selects whether or not to display position data in
while receiving a signal, or the squelch is open. To a dialog when the caller station’s position data is
conserve battery power, turn OFF this function. included in the signal received in the DV mode.
LLThe indicator lights red while transmitting, regardless of •• OFF: No data is displayed in a dialog.
the setting. •• ON (Main/Sub):
•• OFF: The indicator does not light, even if a signal is When the caller station’s position data is
received. included in the signal, its data is displayed in
•• ON: The indicator lights green while receiving a a dialog.
signal, or the squelch is open. •• ON (Main Only):
When the caller station’s position data is
RX Call Sign (Default: Normal) included in the signal received in the MAIN
band, its data is displayed in a dialog.
[MENU] > SET > Display > RX Call Sign LLThe time period to display the dialog depends on the “RX
Position Display Timer” setting.
In the DV mode, selects whether or not to display the
call sign and the message of the caller station when a
call is received. RX Position Display Timer (Default: 10sec)
•• OFF: Does not display the caller station’s call
sign and message. [MENU] > SET > Display > RX Position Display Timer
•• Normal: The caller station’s call sign and message Sets the RX position data’s time period to display in a
automatically scroll once, and then dialog.
disappear. •• 5/10/15/30sec: Displays the caller’s position for this
•• RX Hold: The caller station’s call sign and message set period of time.
automatically scroll once, and then the •• Hold: Displays the caller’s position until
call sign is displayed on the transceiver’s you operate the transceiver.
display until the signal disappears.
•• Hold: The caller station’s call sign and message
Reply Position Display (Default: ON)
automatically scroll once, and then the
call sign is displayed on the transceiver’s [MENU] > SET > Display > Reply Position Display
display until the signal disappears.
Selects whether or not to display the caller’s position
When the signal disappears, the call sign
data when the data is included in the Auto Replay
and the message are each repeatedly
signal.
displayed for 2 seconds.
•• OFF: Does not display the caller’s position data.
LLWhen “Normal,” “RX Hold,” or “Hold” is selected, and if
the call sign and name of the caller station is entered in
•• ON: Automatically displays the caller’s position
your memory, the name is displayed after displaying the data.
call sign.
RX Picture Indicator (Default: ON)
RX Position Indicator (Default: ON) [MENU] > SET > Display > RX Picture Indicator
[MENU] > SET > Display > RX Position Indicator Selects whether or not to display the RX Picture
Selects whether or not to display the indicator when Indicator when a picture is included in the received
position data is included in the signal received in the signal.
DV mode. •• OFF: No indicator is displayed, even if a picture is
•• OFF: No indicator is displayed, even though the included in the received signal.
position data is included in the received •• ON: The indicator is displayed when a picture is
signal. included in the received signal.
•• ON: The indicator is displayed when the position LLWhen “RX Call Sign” is set to “OFF,” the indicator is not
displayed, even if a picture is included in the received
data is included in the received signal.
signal.
LLWhen “RX Call Sign” is set to “OFF,” the indicator is not
displayed, even though position data is included in the
received signal.

12-26
12 SET MODE

Display

DV RX Backlight (Default: ON) Single Band Display (Default: Date)

[MENU] > SET > Display > DV RX Backlight [MENU] > SET > Display > Single Band Display
Turns the DV RX Backlight function ON or OFF. Selects to display the date or GPS information at the
In the DV mode, this function turns ON the backlight bottom of the Single band display.
while displaying the calling station’s call sign or a •• Date: Displays the date.
received message. •• GPS Information: Displays the GPS information.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: The backlight automatically lights when
Latitude/Longitude (Default: dddº mm.mm′)
displaying the calling station’s call sign or a
received message. The backlight stays ON [MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit >
while the call sign or message is scrolling. Latitude/Longitude
NOTE: When you set this item to “ON,” set Selects the format to display the position data.
“Backlight” to “Auto” or “Auto (DC IN:ON).”
Altitude/Distance (Default: ft/mi)

TX Call Sign (Default: Your Call Sign) [MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit >
Altitude/Distance
[MENU] > SET > Display > TX Call Sign
Selects the format to display the distance and elevation.
Selects whether or not to display the My or Your call LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
sign while transmitting. transceiver version.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• Your Call Sign: Displays and scrolls the call sign of Speed (Default: mph)
the target station.
•• My Call Sign: Displays and scrolls your own call sign. [MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit > Speed
LLWhen “Your Call Sign” is selected, and if the call sign and
Selects the format to display the speed.
name of the caller station is entered in your memory, the
LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
name is displayed after the call sign, in any DV mode
transceiver version.
except when using the DR function.

Temperature (Default: ºF)

Scroll Speed (Default: Fast)
[MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit > Temperature
[MENU] > SET > Display > Scroll Speed
Selects the format to display the temperature.
Sets the scrolling speed of the message, call sign, or
LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
other text, that are displayed on the screen to “Slow” transceiver version.
or “Fast.”

Barometric (Default: inHg)

Opening Message (Default: ON)
[MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit > Barometric
[MENU] > SET > Display > Opening Message
Selects the format to display the barometric pressure.
Selects whether or not to display the opening LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
message at power ON. transceiver version.
When you set this item to “ON,” Icom logo, MY call
sign, and the model are displayed.

Voltage (Power ON) (Default: ON)

[MENU] > SET > Display > Voltage (Power ON)
Selects whether or not to display the voltage of the
battery or external DC power source at power ON.
NOTE: When the external DC power source voltage
is above 15.6V, “HI Voltage” is displayed. In that
case, immediately disconnect the DC power source.

12-27
12 SET MODE

Display When you set the system language of the

transceiver to Japanese, the transceiver has the
capability to display both English and Japanese
Rainfall (Default: inch) characters. HOWEVER, if you select Japanese, all
[MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit > Rainfall menu items throughout the transceiver system will
be displayed in only Japanese characters. There will
Selects the format to display the amount of rainfall.
be no English item names. Unless you are fluent in
LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
transceiver version.
reading Japanese characters, use this feature with
extreme caution.
If you have change the transceiver’s language to
Wind Speed (Default: mph) Japanese and do not understand the menu system
in the new setting, you will have to change the
[MENU] > SET > Display > Display Unit > Wind Speed
language back to English by doing a partial reset
Selects the format to display the wind speed. of the transceiver CPU. A partial reset will not clear
LLThe default value may differ, depending on the your call sign databases.
transceiver version.
To do a partial reset of the CPU, do the following
steps:
Display Language (Default: English) 1. Push [MENU].
[MENU] > SET > Display > Display Language 2. Select “SET.”
Sets the screen display language to English or
Japanese.
LLThis item is displayed only when “System Language” is
set to “Japanese.”

System Language (Default: English) 3. Select the item (with the “etc” icon) shown below.
[MENU] > SET > Display > System Language
Sets the system language of the transceiver.
•• English: The system language of the transceiver
is English. Only alphabetical characters
(A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9) and symbols (! “ #
$%&‘()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_` 4. Select the bottom item shown below.
{ | } ~) can be displayed.
If Japanese characters (Kanji, Hiragana,
and Katakana) are included, the
display shows “=” or “_” instead of that
character. In that case, you can only
delete “=” or “_” in the transceiver’s edit
mode. 5. Select the upper item shown below.
•• Japanese: The system language of the transceiver
is Japanese. Kanji, Hiragana, and
Katakana characters, and the 2-bytes
symbols can be displayed. To display
such characters in the DR screen or
Menu mode, set “Display Language” to
“Japanese.” LLDO NOT select the lower item. The lower item is
LLWhen this item is set to “English,” “Display Language” is for the All reset function, and the All reset clears all
not displayed. entries and returns all settings to their factory defaults.
6. Select the upper option.

•• When the partial reset is completed, “PARTIAL

RESET” is displayed, then the display automatically
returns to the default screen.
12-28
12 SET MODE

Sounds
Volume Select (Default: All) Beep Level (Default: 3)
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Volume Select [MENU] > SET > Sounds > Beep Level
Select whether or not to adjust the audio output level Sets the beep output level to 0 (OFF) or 1 (minimum)
independently, according to the operating status. ~ 9 (maximum).
•• All: The audio output level for the FM Radio,
A band (VFO A), and B band (VFO B) are
Beep/Vol Level Link (Default: OFF)
adjusted at the same time.
•• FM Radio Separate: [MENU] > SET > Sounds > Beep/Vol Level Link
The audio output level for the FM Radio
Selects whether or not the beep output level can be
is independently adjusted. The audio
adjusted by rotating [VOL].
output level for A band (VFO A) and B
•• OFF: The output level is fixed to the level set in
band (VFO B) are adjusted at the same
“Beep Level.”
time.
•• ON: The output level can be adjusted by rotating
•• Separate: The audio output level for the FM Radio,
[VOL].
A band (VFO A), and B band (VFO B) are
independently adjusted.
Key-Touch Beep (Default: ON)
NOTE: When an EMR signal is received, the audio
output level for A band and/or B band may be set to [MENU] > SET > Sounds > Key-Touch Beep
the selected level in “EMR AF Level,” depending on Turns the confirmation beep ON or OFF.
this setting. •• OFF: No beep sounds.
LLThe audio output level for the FM Radio is not changed,
•• ON: A beep sounds when you push a key.
because the EMR function is for the DV mode
operation.
When “All” or “FM Radio Separate” is selected: Home CH Beep (Default: ON)
The audio output level for A band and B band is set [MENU] > SET > Sounds > Home CH Beep
to the selected level in “EMR AF Level.”
Turns the Home CH Beep ON or OFF.
When “Separate” is selected: •• OFF: No beep sounds.
Either the audio output level for A band or B band •• ON: A beep sounds when you select the Home
that the signal is received on, is set to the selected Channel.
level in “EMR AF Level.” LLIn the VFO or Memory mode, when the Home Channel
frequency or the Home Channel Memory is selected, the
Home CH Beep sounds.
LLIn the DR screen, when the Home Channel Access
FM Radio Level (Default: 0) repeater is set in FROM, the Home CH Beep sounds.
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > FM Radio Level
Sets the initial audio output level difference between Band Edge Beep (Default: OFF)
the FM Radio and the A and B bands when “Volume
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Band Edge Beep
Select” is set to “All.”
•• +5 ~ +1: The FM Radio audio output level is higher Turns the Band Edge Beep ON or OFF.
than the VFO mode audio. •• OFF: No beep sounds.
•• 0: The FM Radio audio output level is the •• ON: A beep sounds when you tune out of, or back
same as the VFO mode audio. into the AIR, VHF, and UHF band’s frequency
•• –5 ~ –1: The FM Radio audio output level is lower range.
than the VFO mode audio.
Scan Stop Beep (Default: OFF)
Earphone Mode (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Scan Stop Beep
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Earphone Mode Turns the Scan Stop Beep ON or OFF.
Turns the earphone mode ON or OFF. •• OFF: No beep sounds.
While in the earphone mode, the audio volume level is •• ON: A beep sounds when a scan stops by
automatically adjusted to the comfortable level when receiving a signal.
the optional earphone is connected to the [MIC/SP]
jack.
12-29
12 SET MODE

Sounds Time Set

Standby Beep (Default: ON (to me:Alarm/High Tone)) DATE
[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Standby Beep [MENU] > SET > Time Set > Date/Time > DATE
Turns the Standby Beep function ON or OFF. Manually set the date to between 2020/01/01 and
This function sounds a beep after a received signal 2099/12/31.
disappears, in the DV mode. LLThe day of the week is automatically set.
•• OFF: Does not sound a beep after a received signal
disappears. TIME
•• ON: Sounds a beep after a received signal
disappears. [MENU] > SET > Time Set > Date/Time > TIME
•• ON (to me:High Tone): Manually set the time that is displayed at the top of the
Sounds a high pitched beep when a received screen. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.
signal that is addressed to your call sign (MY) When “GPS Time Correct” is set to “Auto,” the GPS
disappears. When any other received signal receiver automatically sets the time by calculating the
disappears, a regular beep sounds. received Universal Time of Coordinated (UTC) time
•• ON (to me:Alarm/High Tone): and “UTC Offset.”
Sounds alarm (PiRoPiRoPiRo) when a
received signal that is addressed to your
call sign (MY) disappears. When any other GPS Time Correct (Default: Auto)
received signal disappears, a regular beep [MENU] > SET > Time Set > GPS Time Correct
sounds.
LLThe standby beep sounds even when “Key-Touch Beep” Selects whether or not the time data is automatically
is set to “OFF.” corrected by a received GPS sentence.
LLThe standby beep output level depends on the “Beep •• OFF: Does not correct the time.
Level” setting. •• Auto: Automatically corrects the time by calculating
the received UTC time and the “UTC Offset”
Sub Band Mute (Default: OFF) setting.

[MENU] > SET > Sounds > Sub Band Mute

UTC Offset (Default: ±0:00)
Selects whether or not to mute the SUB band audio
signal while receiving on the MAIN band, and/or [MENU] > SET > Time Set > UTC Offset
sound a beep when a signal disappears on the SUB Sets the UTC offset time to between –14:00 and
band. +14:00.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• Mute: While receiving on the MAIN band,
Auto Power OFF (Default: OFF)
the SUB band audio signal is muted.
•• Beep: When a signal disappears on the [MENU] > SET > Time Set > Auto Power OFF
SUB band, a beep sounds.
Selects whether or not to automatically turn OFF the
•• Mute & Beep: While receiving on the MAIN band,
transceiver after inactivity for this set period of time.
the SUB band audio signal is muted.
LL“AUTO POWER OFF” is displayed and beeps sound
When a signal disappears on the 5 seconds before turning OFF the transceiver. If you
SUB band, a beep sounds. operate the transceiver during this period of time, the
LLWhen you set this item to “Beep” or “Mute & Beep,” a Auto Power OFF timer is reset.
beep sounds, even if no signal is received on the MAIN •• OFF: Does not turn OFF the transceiver.
band.
•• 30/60/90/120min:
Turns OFF the transceiver after inactivity for
this set period of time.

12-30
12 SET MODE

SD Card
Load Setting Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy)
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Load Setting [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export >
Selects the saved data file to load. CSV Format > Date
Selects the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,”
Save Setting “mm/dd/yyyy,” and “dd/mm/yyyy.”
(y: year, m: month, d: day)
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Save Setting LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
Saves the setting data onto a microSD card. transceiver version.

Save Form (Default: Now Ver) Opening Picture

[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Save Form [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Opening Picture

Selects the format to save the settings to a microSD Selects the picture that is displayed at power ON.
LLSee page 15-15 for details.
card.
•• Now Ver: Saves the settings in the current
version format. SD Card Info
•• Old Ver (x.xx - x.xx): [MENU] > SET > SD Card > SD Card Info
Saves the settings in an older version
format indicated in the parenthesis Displays the microSD card capacity and the time
(x.xx = version). remaining for voice recording.
LLIf you select “Old Ver (x.xx - x.xx),” a function that is
added when the transceiver’s firmware format is updated Screen Capture View
will not be saved.
LLYou cannot load a setting file that is saved in the current [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Screen Capture View
version format to an earlier firmware version. Displays the selected screen capture.

Import TX/RX Picture View

[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export > Import [MENU] > SET > SD Card > TX/RX Picture View
Import the Memory channel contents, Radio memory Displays the pictures that are saved on the microSD card.
contents, UR call sign, repeater list, or GPS memory LLThe transceiver cannot display the picture while
data in the CSV format file. transmitting picture data.
LLThe transceiver can display up to 500 pictures.
Export
Firmware Update
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export > Export
Export the Memory channel contents, Radio memory [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Firmware Update
contents, UR call sign, repeater list, or GPS memory Displays the Firmware Update mode.
data in the CSV format file.
Format
Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep[,] Dec[.])
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Format
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Import/Export >
Formats the microSD card.
CSV Format > Separator/Decimal
If you use a brand new microSD card, be sure to
Selects the separator and the decimal character for format it in the transceiver.
the CSV format.
LLThe default value may differ, depending on the
Unmount
transceiver version.
•• Sep [,] Dec [.]: Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Unmount
•• Sep [;] Dec [.]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.”
Unmounts the microSD card.
•• Sep [;] Dec [,]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “,”
Before you remove a card when the transceiver is ON,
be sure to electrically unmount it. Otherwise, the data
may be corrupted or deleted.

12-31
12 SET MODE

Bluetooth Set
Bluetooth (Default: OFF) Headset Function Select (Default: Normal)
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Bluetooth [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Turns the Bluetooth function ON or OFF. Headset Function Select
Selects the PTT and microphone combination when
both the Bluetooth headset and the transceiver
Auto Connect (Default: ON)
microphone are used.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Auto Connect •• Normal: Transmits the audio from the Bluetooth
headset, or the transceiver microphone,
Selects whether or not to automatically connect to the
whichever [PTT] is pushed.
paired Bluetooth device when its power is turned ON.
•• Microphone:
•• OFF: Does not connect to the paired device.
Transmits the audio from the Bluetooth
•• ON: Automatically connects to the last connected
headset.
device.
Transmission is enabled by pushing either
the [PTT] on the Bluetooth headset, or the
Pairing/Connect transceiver microphone. The transceiver
microphone is only used for the PTT
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Pairing/Connect
control.
Searches for the Bluetooth device to connect, or •• PTT: Transmits the audio from the transceiver
display the paired Bluetooth devices in the list. microphone.
LLSee page 13-3 for details. Transmission is enabled by pushing either
the [PTT] on the Bluetooth headset, or the
<<Pairing Reception>> transceiver microphone. The Bluetooth
headset is only used for the PTT control.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > <<Pairing Reception>>
Enters the pairing reception mode. LLThe Bluetooth headset operation for each option is listed
LLSee page 17-7 for details. below.
Option TX control TX audio

AF Output (Default: Headset Only) Normal Enabled Enabled

Microphone Enabled Enabled
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Disabled
AF Output
PTT Enabled (Audio from the microphone is
Selects the AF Output device when a Bluetooth transmitted.)
headset is connected.
•• Headset Only: Outputs audio to only the connected
Bluetooth headset. Auto Disconnect (Default: OFF)
•• Headset & Speaker:
Outputs audio to both the connected [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Bluetooth headset and the Auto Disconnect
transceiver’s speaker. Sets the Disconnect Timer between 0 and 10
seconds, or OFF.
If there is no audio output from the Bluetooth headset,
and there is no key operation for this set period of
time, the Synchronous Connection-Oriented (SCO)
link* is automatically disconnected.
LLThe SCO link is connected when the signal is received, a
beep sounds, or there is a key operation.
* A Bluetooth link for voice communication

12-32
12 SET MODE

Bluetooth Set

RX Priority Setting (LE Device) VOX Level (Default: 5)

(Default: MAIN Band)
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > VOX > VOX Level
RX Priority Setting (LE Device) Sets the VOX gain level to between 1 and 10, or OFF.
Selects the communication priority for the DV Fast Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive
Data and receive audio, when connecting an iOS to your voice.
device (Bluetooth LE (Low Energy)) and a Bluetooth •• OFF: Turns OFF the VOX function.
headset. The Bluetooth LE communication cannot •• 1 ~ 10: 1 (The minimum sensitivity)
be simultaneously used for both DV Fast Data and 10 (The maximum sensitivity)
Headset audio.
LLWhen connecting to an SPP (Serial Port Profile) device
such as a data device or PC, the Bluetooth device VOX Delay (Default: 0.5sec)
functions according to the “Serialport Function” (p. 12-34) [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
setting.
VOX > VOX Delay
•• DV Fast Data: Received audio is not output from
the headset, regardless of the band Sets the VOX Delay time to 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 or
(MAIN or SUB). 3.0 seconds. The VOX Delay is the amount of time the
•• RX Audio: DV Fast Data is not transferred transmitter stays ON after you stop speaking, before
during the received audio is output the VOX switches to receive.
from the headset.
•• MAIN Band: The audio received on the SUB band VOX Time-Out Timer (Default: 3min)
is not output from the headset when
a DV Fast Data is received on the [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
MAIN band. VOX > VOX Time-Out Timer
DV Fast Data that is received on the Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to prevent an accidental
SUB band is not transferred while a prolonged transmission. To disable the function, set to
signal is received on the MAIN band. “OFF.”
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
VOX (Default: OFF) •• 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 15min:
If a continuous transmission exceeds the set
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > period of time, the transmission is cut off.
VOX > VOX
Turns the Voice Operated Transmission (VOX)
function ON or OFF.
The VOX function starts transmission without pushing
[PTT] when you speak into the microphone, and
then, automatically returns to receive when you stop
speaking.
LLTo use the VOX function, the optional Bluetooth headset
is required.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: Starts transmission without pushing [PTT]
when you speak into the microphone. Then
automatically returns to receive when you
stop speaking.

12-33
12 SET MODE

Bluetooth Set

Power Save (Default: OFF) Custom Key (Default: [PLAY]: ---

[FWD]: UP
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > [RWD]: DOWN)
Icom Headset > Power Save
Selects whether or not to operate with the Power Save [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
mode while the optional VS-3 headset is connected. Icom Headset > Custom Key
LLWhen a headset (user supplied) or a data device is Assigns the functions to the Custom Key ([PLAY]/
connected, the Power Save mode is automatically turned [FWD]/[RWD]) on the optional VS-3 headset.
OFF, regardless of this setting. LLSee page 12-35 about the functions.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
•• ON: The Power Save mode is enabled when no
communication or operation is performed for Serialport Function
120 seconds. (Default: CI-V (Echo Back OFF))
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Data Device Set >
One-Touch PTT (Default: OFF) Serialport Function
Sets the serial port function for the Bluetooth SPP
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
(Serial Port Profile) connection to a data device, PC,
Icom Headset > One-Touch PTT
and so on.
Sets the One-Touch PTT function when the optional •• CI-V (Echo Back OFF):
VS-3 headset is connected. Transmits or receives a CI-V command.
This function enables you to transmit without Does not send back the serial data
continuously holding down [PTT]. received from the SPP connection.
LLWhen a headset (user supplied) is connected, this •• CI-V (Echo Back ON):
function is automatically turned ON, regardless of this Transmits or receives a CI-V command.
setting.
Sends back the serial data received from
•• OFF: Transmits while holding down [PTT].
the SPP connection.
•• ON: Pushing [PTT] toggles between transmit and
•• DV Data: Transmits or receives data in the DV
receive.
mode.
Does not input the cloning or weather
PTT Beep (Default: OFF) data entries, or output the GPS data.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Icom Headset > PTT Beep Bluetooth Device Information
Sets the beep sound when you push [PTT] on the [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set >
optional VS-3 headset. Bluetooth Device Information
•• OFF: No beep sounds.
Displays the Bluetooth device information.
•• ON: A beep sounds.

Initialize Bluetooth Device

Custom Key Beep (Default: OFF)
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set >
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Initialize Bluetooth Device
Icom Headset > Custom Key Beep
Initializes the installed Bluetooth unit.
Sets the beep sound when you push the Custom Key
([PLAY]/[FWD]/[RWD]) on the optional VS-3 headset.
•• OFF: No beep sounds.
•• ON: A beep sounds.

12-34
12 SET MODE

Bluetooth Set

The assignable key functions

Function Descriptions
--- No function
UP Push to increase the frequency, Memory channel, repeater, or station call sign.
DOWN Push to decrease the frequency, Memory channel, repeater, or station call sign.
VOL UP Push to increase the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to decrease the volume level.
SQL UP Push to increase the squelch level.
SQL DOWN Push to decrease the squelch level.
Monitor (Push) Hold down to open the squelch. Release to close the squelch.
Monitor (Hold) Push to open or close the squelch.
CALL Push to select a Call Channel mode.
MR (00-00 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select Memory channel 00-00.
MR (00-01 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select Memory channel 00-01.
VFO/MR Push to select the VFO mode and the Memory mode.
DR Push to turn the DR function ON or OFF.
FROM/TO (DR) In the DR screen, push to select “FROM” and “TO.”
Push to directly select the Home Channel that is set to the selected mode (VFO/Memory) or DR screen.
Home CH
LLWhile in the Call Channel mode, or when no Home CH is set, an error beep sounds.
BAND Push to select an operating band.
SCAN Push to start the previously selected scan. While scanning, push to stop the scan.
Push to set the frequency to be skipped while scanning.
Temporary Skip
The selected frequencies are temporarily skipped for faster scanning.
Hold down for 1 second to set the last calling station’s call sign to “TO” (destination).
LLIf “[RX→CS] Key” is set to “RX > CS List,” the received call sign is not captured. The RX History list
RX>CS is displayed instead.
LLTo select the call sign in the RX History using the optional remote control speaker microphone,
assign “UP”/“DOWN.”
•• In the VFO, Memory, or Call Channel mode, push to announce the frequency and operating mode.
•• In the DR screen, push to announce the call sign.
SPEECH LLIf the Simplex mode is selected, the frequency is announced.
If the FM repeater is selected, the frequency and operating mode, or the call sign and operating
mode are announced.
•• Push to set the A or B band as the MAIN band.
MAIN/DUAL
•• Hold down for 1 second to turn the Dualwatch function ON or OFF.
MODE Push to select the operating mode.
LOW Push to select the transmit output power.
DUP Push to turn the Duplex mode ON or OFF, and the shift direction to DUP+ or DUP–.
•• In the FM/FM-N mode, push to select the tone type.
TONE/D.SQL
•• In the DV mode, push to select the digital squelch type.
In the VFO mode or on the DR screen, hold down for 1 second to enter the Memory channel contents
MW
to a blank channel.
•• Push to start recording.
REC
•• While recording, hold down for 1 second to stop recording.
•• Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD card once.
Voice TX
•• Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.
T-CALL Push to transmit a 1750 Hz tone.

12-35
12 SET MODE

Others
Voltage
[MENU] > SET > Others > Information > Voltage
Displays the voltage of the battery pack and external
power source.
LLWhen you attach the Li-ion battery pack, the charge
status of the battery pack and the battery voltage are
displayed.
LLWhen you attach the optional battery case, the battery
case’s terminal voltage is displayed.

Version
[MENU] > SET > Others > Information > Version
Displays the transceiver firmware’s version number.

Clone Mode
[MENU] > SET > Others > Clone > Clone Mode
Enters the clone mode to read or write the CS-52 data
from or to the PC.
LLRestart the transceiver to cancel the clone mode.

Partial Reset
[MENU] > SET > Others > Reset > Partial Reset
Resets operating settings to their default values (VFO
frequency, VFO settings, menu contents).
LLSee page 15-18 for details.

All Reset
[MENU] > SET > Others > Reset > All Reset
Clears all data and returns all settings to their factory
defaults.
Memory channel contents, Repeater list, and so on
will all be cleared, so you will need to rewrite your
operating settings.
LLSee page 15-18 for details.

12-36
Section 13 Bluetooth® OPERATION
Bluetooth® operations��13-2
Turning ON the Bluetooth® function��13-2
Connecting to a Bluetooth® headset��13-3
Headset Settings��13-4
DD AF Output��13-4
DD Headset Function Select��13-4
DD Auto Disconnect��13-5
DD RX Priority Setting (LE Device)��13-5
DD VOX function��13-5
DD About the Icom headset (VS-3)��13-6
Editing the installed Bluetooth® unit name��13-7
Initializing the installed Bluetooth® unit��13-7
The maximum number of paired devices��13-7

13-1
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Bluetooth® operations Turning ON the Bluetooth®

function
You can connect Bluetooth devices to the transceiver
using the Bluetooth function.
LLSee the Basic manual to pair, disconnect, or delete [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Bluetooth
devices. 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
Icom Headset 3. Select “Bluetooth.”
When you connect the VS-3 Bluetooth® headset to the
transceiver, you can wirelessly transmit and receive it.
The VS-3 has a [PTT] switch, so you can transmit in
the same way as using the transceiver’s [PTT] switch.
The VOX function can also be used to select transmit
and receive by using your voice through the headset
to switch between TX and RX.
You can assign a function to the keys on the side 4. Select “ON.”
panel of the VS-3 to remotely operate the transceiver.

Android™/iOS device
When you connect a mobile device to the transceiver
through Bluetooth and using the application, you can
use the extended D-STAR functions such as data
transmission and image transmission.
LLSee page 17-5 for the applications and how to pair the
transceiver with a mobile device. LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

IMPORTANT: The Bluetooth communication range

Headset device
may vary, depending on the environment in which
the device operates. Microwave ovens or Wireless
Optional VS-3 LAN may cause interference.
(Bluetooth Headset) In that case, stop using those devices or increase
the space between the Bluetooth device and the
other devices.
Bluetooth
All Bluetooth devices have a range of use. If the
communication is unstable, use the device within the
ID-52A/E range.
Mobile device

Data device

13-2
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Connecting to a Bluetooth® headset

You can connect an optional Bluetooth headset to the
transceiver.

Step 1. Selecting the pairing mode of the headset.

See the instruction manual of the headset to select
the pairing mode.

Step 2. Searching for the headset (Transceiver)

[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Pairing/Connect
1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select “YES.”
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Pairing/Connect.”

4. Select “Device Search.”

•• After connecting to the headset, is displayed in

the pairing list.
5. Select “Search Headset.”
8. To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

•• Displays the usable headsets in the pairing list.

LLWhile connected to a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth
6. Select a headset to pair.
icon is displayed on the Standby screen.
LLWhen “AF Output” is set to “Headset Only” and the
Bluetooth connection is accidentally disconnected, a
dialog is displayed to select whether or not to output
the audio from the transceiver’s speaker. (p. 13-4)

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

13-3
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Headset Settings
These are settings when using a Bluetooth headset. D
DHeadset Function Select
You can select the PTT and microphone combination
1. Push [MENU].
when either a Bluetooth headset or the transceiver
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
microphone are used.
3. Select “Headset Set.” LLSee page 12-32 for details.

[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
Headset Function Select
•• Normal:
Transmitting the voice from the Bluetooth headset
while pressing [PTT] or the internal microphone’s
voice.
•• Microphone:
Using the Bluetooth headset as a microphone.
LLThe audio from the internal microphone cannot be
transmitted.
LLYou can also transmit by pressing the Bluetooth
headset’s [PTT].
•• PTT:
D Output
DAF Using the Bluetooth headset as a PTT switch.
LLThe audio from the internal microphone is transmitted.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > The audio from the Bluetooth headset cannot be
AF Output transmitted.
LLYou can also transmit by pressing the transceiver’s
You can select the AF Output device. [PTT].
If “AF Output” is set to “Headset & Speaker,” you can
hear audio from both a connected Bluetooth headset The operation of the Bluetooth headset for each
and the transceiver’s speaker. setting is shown in the table below.
LLSee page 12-32 for details.

Setting Transmit operation Audio input

TIP: When “AF Output” is set to “Headset Only,” Normal ✔ ✔
the following dialog is displayed if the Bluetooth
Microphone ✔ ✔
connection is accidentally disconnected.
PTT ✔ (Use internal microphone)

•• YES: The audio is output from the transceiver’s

speaker.
•• NO: The transceiver’s volume level is automatically
set to 0, and the audio is not output from the
transceiver’s speaker.

13-4
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Headset Settings

D
DAuto Disconnect D
DVOX function
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > The Voice Operated eXchange (VOX) function toggles
Auto Disconnect the transceiver between transmit and receive by your
voice. This function provides hands-free operation.
You can set the disconnect timer between 0 and 10 You can use the VOX function with the optional VS-3
seconds or OFF. or a third party’s Bluetooth headset.
If there is no audio signal to the Bluetooth headset, or
no operation is performed for a set period of time, the Depending on the headset, the VOX function may be
receiver automatically disconnects the Synchronous disabled because of the differences in microphones.
Connection-Oriented (SCO) link.
LLWhen a signal is received, or an operation is performed NOTE:
while the SCO link is disconnected, the receiver will •• If the transceiver does not connect to a Bluetooth
automatically reconnect the SCO link again. headset, you cannot use the VOX function through
LLSee page 12-32 for details. Bluetooth, even if “VOX” is set to ON.
BE SURE to check the Bluetooth connection between
the transceiver and the headset before using the VOX
D Priority Setting (LE Device)
DRX function.
•• This setting is used for when using the Bluetooth
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > microphone.
RX Priority Setting (LE Device) See page 15-10 for using the external microphone.

You can select the communication priority for the DV LLSee page 12-33 for details on the setting items and their
Fast Data and receive audio, when connecting an iOS options.
device (Bluetooth LE (Low Energy)) and a Bluetooth
headset.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > VOX
The Bluetooth LE communication cannot be
simultaneously used for both DV Fast Data and
Headset audio. VOX screen
LLWhen connecting to a SPP (Serial Port Profile) device You can turn the VOX function ON or OFF.
such as data device or PC, the Bluetooth devise functions
according to the “Serialport Function” (p. 12-34) setting. VOX Level screen
LLSee page 12-33 for details. You can set the VOX gain level. Higher values make
the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.

VOX Delay screen

You can set the VOX Delay. The VOX Delay is the
amount of time the transmitter stays ON after you stop
speaking, before the VOX switches to receive.

VOX Time-Out Timer screen

You can set the VOX Time-Out Timer to prevent an
accidental prolonged transmission. To disable the
function, set to “OFF.”

13-5
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Headset Settings

D
DAbout the Icom headset (VS-3)
You can set the detailed settings of the optional VS-3
Bluetooth® headset.
Also, you can assign a key function to [PLAY], [FWD],
and [RWD] on the “Custom Key” screen.
LLSee page 12-34 for details on the setting items and their
options. [FWD]
[PLAY]
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set >
[RWD]
Icom Headset
Optional VS-3
Power Save screen Bluetooth® headset
The Power Save function temporarily disconnects the
Bluetooth connection if no communication or operation
is performed for 120 seconds.
The Power Save function is disabled when the VOX
function is ON.

One-Touch PTT screen

The One-Touch PTT function enables you to push
[PTT] to transmit, and then push again to return to
receive.

PTT Beep screen

You can set a beep to sound when you push [PTT] on
the VS-3.

Custom Key Beep screen

You can set a beep to sound when you push [PLAY],
[FWD], or [RWD] on the VS-3.

Custom key screen

You can assign a key function to [PLAY], [FWD], and
[RWD] on the VS-3.

13-6
13 Bluetooth ® OPERATION

Editing the installed Initializing the installed

Bluetooth® unit name Bluetooth® unit
You can edit the transceiver Bluetooth unit’s name. You can initialize the transceiver’s Bluetooth unit.
LLAfter initializing the unit, the edited name remains. You should initialize the unit if you have trouble during
Bluetooth operation.
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > LLAfter initializing the unit, the pairing/connect list is deleted,
but the Bluetooth settings and the unit name remain.
Bluetooth Device Information
The Bluetooth settings return to their factory defaults only
1. Push [MENU]. when you do a Partial Reset or All Reset. (p. 15-18)
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Bluetooth Device Information.” [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set >
Initialize Bluetooth Device
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Initialize Bluetooth Device.”

4. Push [QUICK].
5. Select “Edit Name.”

4. Select “YES.”

6. Enter a name of up to 9 characters*, and then

push [ENT]. (Example: ICOM BT(ID-52)A)
*After “ICOM BT.”

•• The transceiver will automatically restart.

The maximum number of

paired devices
You can pair 2 types of Bluetooth devices: a Headset
and a Data device.

Number of maximum pairing devices

•• Up to 5 Bluetooth headset and data devices such as
Android device can be paired.
(Headset 1~4, Data device 1~4)
•• Up to 2 iOS devices (Bluetooth LE) can be paired.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

Displays the paired

Bluetooth device.

13-7
Section 14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION
NOTE: See the Basic manual About the Share Pictures function��14-2
Section 6 for details on how to Using the Picture screen��14-3
insert or remove a microSD card Preparing a TX picture��14-4
and precautions. DD Transfer from the mobile device through Bluetooth��14-4
DD Save on the microSD card using the PC or mobile device��14-4
Sending the picture��14-5
DD Moving the TX block marker��14-6
DD TX PICTURE SET��14-6
Viewing the pictures��14-7
DD Viewing the RX Picture History��14-7
DD Viewing the TX Picture History��14-7
DD Viewing the pictures in the “Picture” folder��14-8

14-1
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

About the Share Pictures function

With this function, you can send a picture that is saved About the free download software
on a microSD card, and view a received picture. With the ST-4001W (for Windows), ST-4001A (for
Android), or ST-4001I (for iOS), you can add text
LLInformation and cut pictures down to size to send from the
•• You must insert a microSD card into the transceiver. transceiver. When using the ST-4001A or
•• To use this function, first format microSD card using the ST-4001I, the edited picture can be transferred to the
transceiver. transceiver through Bluetooth.
•• You cannot use this function while operating in the Access LLBefore using, read each manual, and use these
Point mode. software according to the instructions.
LLIn this manual, ST-4001W, ST-4001A, and ST-4001I are
NOTE:
described as “Picture Utility software.”
•• Even if no microSD card is inserted into the transceiver,
a picture can be received, but the picture is not saved in
RX Picture History. To transfer a picture to the transceiver
LLA picture received before inserting a microSD card To transfer a picture to the transceiver through
is deleted when you insert an SD card into the Bluetooth, connect your mobile device and your
transceiver. transceiver using the Bluetooth function. (p. 17-5)
•• DO NOT remove the microSD card from the transceiver
while using the Share Picture function. Otherwise, the
card data may be corrupted or deleted.
•• If the card data is not in a supported format, or it is
corrupted, an error dialog is displayed.
In that case, select “YES” to delete the data that is not
in a supported format or corrupted.

About a picture file to use

•• File type*1: JPEG (The file extension is “jpg.”) Mobile device Transceiver
•• Picture size*2: 640 x 480, 320 x 240, or 160 x 120 (px)
•• File size: 200 KB or less
•• File name: up to 23 characters
(except a filename extension)
*1 The transceiver cannot read a file whose extension is
“jpeg,” or a file in the Progressive JPEG format.
*2 The transceiver cannot read a picture that is other than
the specified size, even if its aspect ratio is 4:3.
LLThe transceiver displays only 500 pictures, even if you
save more than 501 pictures onto the microSD card.

14-2
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Using the Picture screen

[MENU] > PICTURE The RX PICTURE screen
1. Push [MENU]. zz Push [ENT] to display the RX PICTURE detail
2. Select “PICTURE.” screen.
•• The Picture screen is displayed. zz Push D-pad() to display the RX Picture history.
LLTo close the Picture screen, push [QUICK], and then (p. 14-7)
select “<<Exit Picture Screen>>.”

Received band TX block marker

RX Picture zone* TX Picture zone Current time

Select to display the Select to display the History number
RX PICTURE screen. TX PICTURE screen. Picture Size
Picture Quality
* When signals that contain picture data are received on the
MAIN and SUB bands at the same time, both pictures are
saved on a microSD card, but a picture is displayed on Received time
only the MAIN band.

In the Quick Menu window, you can select the The TX PICTURE screen
following options. zz Push [ENT] to display the TX PICTURE SET
screen.
Item Action zz Push D-pad() to display the TX Picture history.
Turns OFF the Share (p. 14-7)
OFF
Pictures function.
Turns ON the Share TX block marker
Pictures function.
Picture TX LLThe picture is sent while
Single TX
transmitting. After the
sending is completed, this
function is turned OFF.
Repeat TX The picture is repeatedly sent.
Sends the picture using the DV Fast
<<TX All>>
Data function.
Moves the TX block marker back to the
<<Back To 1st>>
1st block.
<<Exit Picture
Closes the Picture screen.
Screen>>

When a received signal contains picture data

When the received signal contains picture data, the
RX Picture icon is displayed.

RX Picture icon

LLYou can turn OFF the RX Picture icon.

([MENU] > SET > Display > RX Picture Indicator)

14-3
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Preparing a TX picture
There are 2 ways to prepare a TX picture.
•• Transfer from a mobile device using the Picture Utility software, through Bluetooth.
•• Save on a microSD card using the PC or mobile device.

D
DTransfer from the mobile device D
DSave on the microSD card using the
through Bluetooth PC or mobile device
1. Insert a microSD card into the transceiver’s slot, 1. Turn OFF the transceiver, then remove the
and then turn ON the transceiver. microSD card from the transceiver.
2. In the mobile device, open the Picture Utility 2. Insert it into the microSD card drive or a memory
software. card reader* on your PC or mobile device.
LLWhen using an Android device for the first time, pair * User supplied.
the transceiver with your device. (p. 17-7) 3. Copy a picture file, and paste it in the “Picture”
3. Open the Transfer Settings screen. folder (“ID-52” > “Picture”) on the card.
4. Select “Using Bluetooth,” and then set “Transfer 4. Remove the card from your device, and insert it
Devices” to your transceiver. into the transceiver’s slot.
LLWhen using an iOS device for the first time, pair the
transceiver with your device. (p. 17-9) NOTE: Before you remove the SD card, be sure to
LLSee the ST-4001A or ST-4001I instruction manual electrically unmount it. Otherwise, the data may be
for details. They can be downloaded from the Icom corrupted or deleted.
website.
5. Open a picture to transfer using the Picture Utility TIP:
software. •• When “USB Connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,” and the
6. Touch the Transfer ( ) button. transceiver is connected to the PC through a USB data
•• Starts transferring, and the transferred picture is cable, you can directly access the microSD card that is
saved on the microSD card. set in the transceiver from the PC.
LLThe file name is automatically set in the following ([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)
format: yyyymmdd_hhmmss (yyyy: Year, mm: month, •• You can save a received picture in the “Picture” folder
dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second). on the SD card. (p. 14-7)

NOTE: If you cannot transfer the picture, check the

following:

On the transceiver
•• The transceiver is turned ON.
•• The Bluetooth function is ON.
•• The transceiver’s firmware is the latest version.
•• A microSD card is inserted into the transceiver.
•• The transceiver is in a normal operating mode.
LLThe transceiver cannot receive the picture in special
modes, such as the firmware update mode, clone
mode, setting save mode, and import or export mode.

On the device
•• The Bluetooth function is ON.
•• “Transfer Devices” is set to your transceiver.

14-4
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Sending the picture

Step 1. Selecting a picture to send Step 2. Sending the picture
LLYou can retransmit the picture in the TX PICT HISTORY 1. Push [QUICK].
screen. (p. 14-7) 2. Select “Picture TX.”
LLWhen you transfer the picture through Bluetooth, it is
set to “TX Picture.” If it is not necessary to change, go to
“Step 2. Sending the picture.”

[MENU] > PICTURE

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “PICTURE.”
3. Push D-pad() to select the TX Picture zone, and 3. Select “Single TX” or “Repeat TX.”
then push [ENT].

Displayed while the Share

Pictures function is ON.

4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.

LLThe picture is sent while transmitting.
4. Push [ENT] again.
5. Select “TX Picture.” 5. Release [PTT] to receive.

Sending a picture using the DV Fast Data

function
Select “<<TX All>>” in step 2 to send a picture using
the DV Fast Data function.

6. Rotate [DIAL] to select a picture.

LLYou cannot view a picture if it is not in a supported
format (p. 14-2), or is corrupted.
7. Push [ENT].
8. Set “Picture Size,” “Picture Quality,” and
“Receiver.” LLDO NOT select “<<TX All>>” when you send a picture
LLSee page 14-6 about each setting item. to other transceivers that can receive only slow speed
9. To close the TX PICTURE SET screen, push data.
[MENU]. LLWhile transmitting voice audio by holding down [PTT] on
the microphone, the transceiver automatically changes
to the Slow Speed Data mode.

14-5
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Sending the picture

D
DMoving the TX block marker D PICTURE SET
DTX
You can select the block to start sending. This screen is used to set a picture, size, quality, and
LLWhile sending a picture, you cannot move the TX block its intended destination to send.
marker. LLWhile sending a picture, you cannot change the settings.

1. Push D-pad() to select the TX Picture zone, and 1. Push D-pad() to select the TX Picture zone, and
then push [ENT]. then push [ENT].
2. Push [QUICK]. 2. Push [ENT] again.
3. Select “TX Picture Block Select.” 3. Select the setting item.

4. Rotate [DIAL] or push D-pad to move the TX block 4. Select an option.

marker.

LLTo move the TX block marker back to 1st block, push 5. To close the TX PICTURE SET screen, push
[QUICK], and then select “BACK TO 1ST.” [MENU].
5. Push [ENT]. TIP: You can set each item to its default by pushing
6. To close the TX PICTURE screen, push [MENU]. [QUICK], and then selecting “Default” on the Quick
Menu window.

TX Picture
Select the picture to send, saved in the “Picture” folder
(“ID-52” > “Picture”) on the microSD card.
LLWhen you set the TX Picture in the TX PICT HISTORY
screen, “(RE TX)” is displayed before the file name.

Picture Size (Default: 320 x 240)

Set the desired size of a picture to send to “160 x
120,” “320 x 240,” or “640 x 480.”
LLYou cannot select a size larger than the size of the
picture.

Picture Quality (Default: Standard (50%))

Set the quality of a picture to send to “Low (25%),”
“Standard (50%),” or “High (75%).”

Receiver (Default: -----)

Enter the receiver’s call sign to let all stations that receive
the picture know the picture’s intended destination.
NOTE: All stations that receive the signal can see
the picture, even if they are not set as the receiver.

14-6
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Viewing the pictures

D
DViewing the RX Picture History D
DViewing the TX Picture History
When you receive a DV call that has picture data, a When you send a picture, the picture log is saved. Up
received picture log is saved. Up to 50 history data to 50 history data can be saved. When you send the
can be saved. When you receive the 51st picture, the 51st picture, the oldest history data is deleted.
oldest history data is deleted.
NOTE: Confirm a microSD card is in the card slot.
NOTE: Confirm a microSD card is in the card slot.

[MENU] > PICTURE

[MENU] > PICTURE 1. Push [MENU].
1. Push [MENU]. 2. Select “PICTURE.”
2. Select “PICTURE.” 3. Push D-pad() to select the TX Picture zone, and
3. Push D-pad() to select the RX Picture zone, and then push [ENT].
then push [ENT].

4. Rotate [DIAL] to select a TX picture history data.

4. Rotate [DIAL] to select an RX picture history data. 5. Push [ENT].
5. Push [ENT].

•• The RX picture history number, picture size, picture •• The TX picture history number, picture size, picture
quality, the caller’s call sign, receiver set by the caller, quality, the caller’s call sign, receiver, and TX date
and RX date and time are displayed. and time are displayed.

TIP: In the Quick Menu window, you can select the TIP: In the Quick Menu window, you can select the
following options. following options.
•• Zoom Picture: Changes to enlarged display. •• Retransmit: Sets the picture to “TX Picture.”
•• Save: Saves the displayed picture onto the •• Zoom Picture: Changes to enlarged display.
microSD card. •• Delete: Deletes the selected TX picture history data.
 The file name is automatically set in •• Delete All: Deletes all TX picture history data.
the following format: LLYou cannot delete when the selected TX picture
Picyyyymmdd_callsign_xx history data is set to “TX Picture” (RE TX).
(yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day, LLYou cannot set the picture to “TX Picture” while
callsign: the caller’s call sign, transmitting a picture.
xx: serial number).
•• Delete: Deletes the selected RX picture history data.
•• Delete All: Deletes all RX picture history data.

14-7
14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

Viewing the pictures

D
DViewing the pictures in the “Picture”
folder
You can view the pictures saved in the “Picture” folder
on the microSD card.
LLYou cannot view the pictures while sending a picture.
LLTo save the received picture onto the microSD card,
push [QUICK], and then select “Save” on the RX PICT
HISTORY screen. (p. 14-7) Otherwise, the received
picture is not saved in the “Picture” folder on the card.

[MENU] > SET > SD Card > TX/RX Picture View

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “TX/RX Picture View.”

4. Select a picture to view.

LLYou cannot view a picture if it is not in a supported

format (p. 14-2) or it is corrupted.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
TIP: In the Quick Menu window, you can select the
following options.
•• File Information: Displays the file name, size, and
saved date.
•• Delete: Deletes the selected picture.
•• Delete All: Deletes all pictures.

14-8
Section 15 OTHER FUNCTIONS
NOTE: See the Basic manual Band Scope function��15-2
Section 6 for details on how to DD Using the Band Scope function��15-3
insert or remove a microSD card DD Using the Waterfall display��15-3
and precautions. Home Channel function��15-4
DD Setting a Home Channel��15-4
DD Home CH Beep function��15-4
Using the DTMF memory��15-5
DD Entering DTMF code��15-5
DD Monitoring the entered DTMF code��15-5
Transmitting the DTMF code��15-6
DD Transmitting the entered DTMF code��15-6
DD Transmitting a DTMF code (Direct Input)��15-6
DD Selecting the DTMF transmit speed��15-7
Tone squelch operation��15-8
DTCS code squelch operation��15-9
VOX function��15-10
DD Selecting the headset type��15-10
DD Using the VOX function�� 15-11
DD Setting the VOX level�� 15-11
DD VOX-related settings��15-12
Weather channel operation (USA version only)��15-13
DD Selecting a Weather channel��15-13
DD Weather alert function��15-13
Screen Capture function��15-14
DD Setting the Screen Capture function��15-14
DD Capturing a screen��15-14
DD Viewing the captured screen��15-14
Setting the Opening picture��15-15
Cloning��15-16
Resetting��15-18
DD Partial Reset��15-18
DD All Reset��15-18

15-1
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Band Scope function

Use the Band Scope function to visually search a You can select the Band Scope display mode from
specified frequency range around the displayed three modes, the Center mode, the FIX mode, and the
frequency. You can use this function to search for a Scroll (FIX) mode.
signal, and see the relative received signal strength
level.
On the single band display, you can confirm the signal Center mode
strengths over time by the waterfall function. Displays signals around the operating frequency
On the single band display within 137 ~ 174 MHz within the selected span.
and 375 ~ 479 MHz, you can hear the displayed
frequency’s audio during a sweep.
The Band Scope function has 2 sweep types.
•• Single Sweep: Searches the specified
frequency range only once.
The Single Sweep starts from
the lower frequency, and the
sweep stops after reaching the FIX mode
upper frequency. Displays signals within a specified frequency range.
•• Continuous Sweep: Repeatedly searches the LLSet the displayed frequency range on the MENU screen.
specified frequency range. (p. 12-7)
([MENU] > SET > Scope > FIX Mode Center Frequency)
The transceiver’s sweep bandwidth is ± 15* × the
tuning step number, centered on the operating
frequency.
* You can change the displayed steps to ± 20 steps. Edge
([MENU] > SET > Scope > Displayed Steps) Mode icon (Upper frequency)
(FIX mode)
Edge Operating frequency
During a sweep in the Center mode (moves)
(Lower frequency)
Center frequency
(Example: 146.010 MHz) When the operating frequency moves
outside the upper or lower Edge frequency,
“” or “” is displayed in the upper side
corners of the Band Scope screen.

Band Scope Scroll (FIX) mode

display When selecting a Displays signals within a specified frequency range.
Strong level Band Scope zone When the operating frequency moves outside of the
(with a line in orange) screen, the displayed frequency range is automatically
shifted.
Weak level Sweep marker LLSet the displayed frequency range on the MENU screen.
(p. 12-7)
([MENU] > SET > Scope > FIX Mode Center Frequency)

While stopping a sweep

Mode icon
(Scroll (FIX) mode) Operating frequency (moves)
Operating frequency (moves)

15-2
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Band Scope function

NOTE: During the continuous sweep, the noise may D

DUsing the Waterfall display
occur if you bring your hand or body close to the On the single band display, you can turn the waterfall
screen. display ON or OFF.

D
DUsing the Band Scope function
[MENU] > SCOPE
1. Push [MENU].
When selecting a
2. Select “SCOPE.” Band Scope zone
Waterfall
(with a line in orange)
zone

Scale Scale

LLInformation
•• Returns to the standby screen, and starts the •• Higher signal levels are Red, Yellow, Green, Light-blue,
continuous sweep. Blue, and Black (no signal), in that order.
3. Push [QUICK]. •• During a sweep, the scales on both sides of the waterfall
zone are moved with the waterfall. While stopping a
4. Select “Scope Mode.”
sweep, the scales and the waterfall also freeze.
•• You can select the Waterfall speed.
([MENU] > SET > Scope > Waterfall Speed)

5. Select the Band Scope display mode. TIP:

•• Displays the selected display mode, and starts the •• If the tuning step is set too wide, the signals in the
continuous sweep. sweep range may not be displayed (they may be
6. Push [ENT]. skipped), even if they are strong signals. Therefore,
•• Stops the sweep. we recommend that you set the tuning step to 20 kHz
LLPush [ENT] again, to resume the sweep for the or less to use the Band Scope function. See the Basic
Continuous Sweep function. manual Section 3 for details on how to set the tuning
7. When the sweeping stops, rotate [DIAL] to move step.
the sweep marker to a detected signal. •• On the AIR band, you cannot hear the displayed
•• You can hear the signal audio. frequency’s audio during a sweep. When “AF Output
LLWhile the sweep is paused, push [CLR] to turn OFF (DUAL/AIR Band)” is set to ON, the received audio is
the Band Scope function. momentarily output during a sweep, and you will know
that a signal is received without looking at the display.
- You can turn “AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band)” ON or
Band Scope screen operation OFF on the MENU screen. (p. 12-30)
Key Action -T he FM Radio audio output may be interrupted due to
the AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band) function. In that case,
[DIAL] Rotate to select an operating frequency.
set “AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band)” to OFF, or set “Auto
Push to cancel the Band Scope zone Mute” to OFF.
D-pad()
selection. ([MENU] > SET > Scope > AF Output (DUAL/AIR Band))
Push to select the Band Scope zone (with a ([MENU] > FM RADIO > FM Radio Set > Auto Mute)
D-pad()
line in orange).
[ENT] Push to start or stop a sweep.
Push to open the Quick Menu window.
[QUICK] LLWhen selecting the Band Scope zone,
only the Band Scope menu is displayed.
When selecting the Band Scope zone:
•• Push to stop the sweep during a sweep.
[CLR]
•• Push to turn OFF the Band Scope
function while stopping a sweep.
15-3
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Home Channel function

You can set an often-used frequency, Memory
channel, or repeater as a Home Channel in VFO
mode, Memory mode, and DR screen.

D
DSetting a Home Channel D
DHome CH Beep function
1. Select the VFO or Memory mode, or the DR When a Home CH is selected by rotating [DIAL], a
screen to set a Home Channel. beep sounds. You will know the Home CH selection
2. Select a frequency, Memory channel, or an access without looking at the display.
repeater to be set as a Home Channel.
3. Push [QUICK].
4. Select “Home CH Set.”

Beep

5. Select “Set Frequency” (VFO mode), “Set You can assign the [Home CH] key function to
Channel” (Memory mode), or “Set Repeater” (DR an optional microphone key or optional Bluetooth
screen). headset. (pp. 12-18, 12-34)
LLYou can turn OFF the Home CH Beep function on the
MENU screen.
([MENU] > SET > Sounds > Home CH Beep)

•• Sets a Home Channel, then returns to the standby

screen.

TIP: Selecting “Clear” in Step 4 clears the Home

channel setting.

15-4
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Using the DTMF memory

The transceiver can save up to 16 memories of a 24
digit DTMF code.

D
DEntering DTMF code D
DMonitoring the entered DTMF code
You can check and hear the entered DTMF code.
[MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory
1. Push [MENU]. [MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory
2. Select “DTMF/T-CALL” in the “SET” menu. 1. Push [MENU].
3. Select “DTMF Memory.” 2. Select “DTMF/T-CALL” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “DTMF Memory.”
4. Select a DTMF Memory to monitor.

4. Select a DTMF Memory to enter.

LLDO NOT push [ENT].
5. Push [SQL].

LLDO NOT push [ENT].

5. Push [QUICK].
6. Select “Edit.” •• The DTMF code sounds.
•• After sounding, returns to the DTMF MEMORY
screen.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

TIP: You can also check the DTMF code by pushing

[QUICK] and select “DTMF Monitor” on the DTMF
7. Enter a DTMF code, then push [ENT]. MEMORY screen in step 4.
(Example: 123456A)

•• Saves the Memory, and returns to the DTMF

MEMORY screen.
LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

TIP: To clear the entered DTMF code, push [QUICK]

on the DTMF MEMORY screen, then select “Clear.”

15-5
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Transmitting the DTMF code

D
DTransmitting the entered DTMF code DDTransmitting a DTMF code (Direct Input)

[MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory 1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “DTMF TX.”
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “DTMF/T-CALL” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “DTMF Memory.”

3. Select “Direct Input.”

4. Select a DTMF Memory to transmit.

4. Enter a DTMF code, then push [ENT].

(Example: 012345#)
•• The selected DTMF channel is set to transmit.
5. Push [MENU].
•• Exits the MENU screen.
6. While holding down [PTT], push [SQL].

•• Transmits the entered DTMF code.

LLThe DTMF code scrolls during transmission.
LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

•• The selected DTMF code in step 4 is transmitted. TIP: About the 1750 Hz tone
•• Even if you release [PTT], the transceiver keeps When you select “T-CALL” on the DTMF MEMORY
transmitting the code until all the code is transmitted.
screen, a 1750 Hz tone can be transmitted.

TIP: In the standby screen, you can transmit a
DTMF code by pushing [QUICK], selecting “DTMF
TX,” and selecting a code.

While holding down [PTT], push [SQL].

•• The 1750 Hz tone is transmitted.
LLYou can hear the 1750 Hz tone from a speaker.

15-6
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Transmitting the DTMF code

D
DSelecting the DTMF transmit speed
You can select the DTMF transmit speed.
The image of transmitting the DTMF code
[MENU] > SET > DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Speed
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “DTMF/T-CALL” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “DTMF Speed.”
Pi, Po, Pa Pi–, Po–, Pa–

When “100ms” is selected, When “500ms” is selected,

the DTMF transmit speed the DTMF transmit speed
is fast. is slow.

4. Select a transmit speed. (Default: 100ms)

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

15-7
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a Step 2. Using the tone squelch
signal that includes a matching subaudible tone in the 1. Push [QUICK].
FM or FM narrow (FM-N) mode. You can silently wait 2. Select “TONE.”
for calls from other stations using the same tone.
Also, the reversed tone squelch function mutes
the squelch when a signal including a matching
subaudible tone.

Step 1. Setting the tone squelch frequency

[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > TSQL Freq
3. Select the Tone Squelch type.
1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode.
2. Push [MODE] to select the FM or FM-N mode.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to set an operating frequency.
4. Push [MENU].
5. Select “DUP/TONE...” in the “SET” menu.
6. Select “TSQL Freq.”

7. Rotate [DIAL] to set a Tone Squelch frequency,

then push [ENT].
4. Operate normally.
•• You will only hear the audio of stations that are using
the same Tone Squelch frequency. All other signals
will be muted.

LLSet to between 67.0 and 254.1 Hz. About the Tone squelch types indication
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU]. •• TSQL: Enables the Tone Squelch function.
•• TSQL-R: Enables the Reverse Tone Squelch function.
•• TONE(T)/DTCS(R)
(“T-DTCS” is displayed, “T” blinks.):
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the DTCS squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
DTCS code and polarity. (Audio is heard)
•• DTCS(T)/TSQL(R)
(“D-TSQL” is displayed, “D” blinks.):
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching tone
frequency. (Audio is heard)
•• TONE(T)/TSQL(R)
(“T-TSQL” is displayed, “T” blinks.):
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching tone
frequency. (Audio is heard)

15-8
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

DTCS code squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a Step 2. Using the DTCS code squelch
signal that includes a matching DTCS code in the 1. Push [QUICK].
FM or FM narrow (FM-N) mode. You can silently 2. Select “TONE.”
wait for calls from others using the same tone. Also,
a reversed tone squelch function mutes the squelch
when you receive a signal including a matching DTCS
code.

Step 1. Setting the DTCS code

[MENU] > SET > DUP/TONE... > DTCS Code
3. Select the DTCS code type.
1. Push [VFO/MHz] to enter the VFO mode.
2. Push [MODE] to select the FM or FM-N mode.
3. Rotate [DIAL] to set an operating frequency.
4. Push [MENU].
5. Select “DUP/TONE...” in the “SET” menu.
6. Select “DTCS Code.”

7. Rotate [DIAL] to set a DTCS code, then push

[ENT].
4. Operate normally.
•• You will only hear the audio of stations that are using
the same DTCS code. All other signals will be muted.

About the DTCS code types indication

LLSet to between 023 and 754. •• DTCS: Enables the DTCS Squelch function.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU]. •• DTCS-R: Enables the Reverse DTCS Squelch function.
•• DTCS(T) (“DTCS” blinks):
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the function is OFF.
•• TONE(T)/DTCS(R)
(“T-DTCS” is displayed, “T” blinks.):
When you transmit, the selected subaudible
tone is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the DTCS squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching
DTCS code and polarity. (Audio is heard)
•• DTCS(T)/TSQL(R)
(“D-TSQL” is displayed, “D” blinks.):
When you transmit, the selected DTCS code
is superimposed on your normal signal.
When you receive, the tone squelch opens
only for a signal that includes a matching tone
frequency. (Audio is heard)

15-9
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

VOX function
The Voice Operated eXchange (VOX) function toggles NOTE: BE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver when
the transceiver between transmit and receive by your plugging or unplugging the OPC-2006LS into or from
voice. This function provides hands-free operation. the [MIC/SP] jack.
You can use the VOX function with the optional
HS-94, HS-95, or HS-97 headset and the TIP: You can also use the VOX function with the
OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable. Bluetooth headset.
([MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Headset Set > VOX)
See page 13-5 for details.
D
DSelecting the headset type
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > Headset Select ID-52A/E OPC-2006LS
1. Push [MENU]. (Option)

2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.

3. Select “VOX.”

To the HS-94*
[MIC/SP] jack (Option)

* You can also use this function with the optional HS-95 or HS-97.

4. Select “Headset Select.”

5. Select an option.

•• HS-95: Select when using the HS-95.

•• Other: Select when using the HS-94 or the HS-97.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

15-10
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

VOX function

D
DUsing the VOX function D
DSetting the VOX level
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX NOTE: We recommend you set the Microphone
1. Push [MENU]. Gain level to 3, before setting the VOX level.
2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu. ([MENU] > SET > Function > MIC Gain (External))
3. Select “VOX.”
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX Level
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “VOX.”

4. Select “VOX.”

4. Select “VOX Level.”

5. Select “ON.”

5. While speaking into the microphone, rotate [DIAL]

to adjust the VOX level.

6. To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

•• Displays “VOX” when the TX level audio is input.

LLThe VOX level can be adjusted between 1 (minimum)
and 10 (maximum), or turned OFF. (Default: 5)
•• When you connect the HS-94, HS-95, or HS-97 LLHigher values make the VOX function more sensitive
headset, “VOX” is displayed on the standby screen. to your voice.
6. To exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].
LLIf the S-meter does not display the output power
NOTE: While receiving a signal, or sounding a beep,
level, and the transceiver does not transmit, adjust
the transceiver does not switch to transmit by your the VOX delay time.
voice. ([MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX Delay)
LLWhen the VOX function is ON, you can adjust the
VOX level by rotating [DIAL] while transmitting.

15-11
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

VOX function

D
DVOX-related settings
You can set the “VOX Delay” and “VOX Time-Out
Timer” on the MENU screen.

VOX Delay
[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX > VOX Delay
The VOX delay is the amount of time the transmitter
stays ON after you stop speaking. It enables normal
pauses in speaking. (p. 12-22)

VOX Time-Out Timer

[MENU] > SET > Function > VOX >
VOX Time-Out Timer
The VOX Time-Out Timer prevents prolonged
accidental transmission. (p. 12-22)

15-12
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Weather channel operation (USA version only)

There are 10 weather channels for monitoring D
DWeather alert function
the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric
NOAA broadcast stations transmit weather alert tones
Administration (NOAA) weather broadcasts.
before important weather announcements.
When the weather alert function is turned ON, the
selected weather channel is monitored every 5
D
DSelecting a Weather channel
seconds for an announcement.
1. Push [MR] to enter the Weather Channel mode. When an alert signal is detected, the “ALT” and
LLPushing [MR] each time selects the Memory and
the WX channel are alternately displayed, and a
Weather Channel modes.
beep sounds until you change the mode or weather

channel, turn OFF the Weather Alert function, or turn
OFF the transceiver.
The previously selected (used) weather channel
is checked periodically during standby, or while
scanning.

1. Push [QUICK].
2. Rotate [DIAL] to select a weather channel.
2. Select “Weather Alert.”
•• Displays the selected weather channel number
(“WX-01” ~ “WX-10”).

3. Select “ON.”

•• Turns ON the Weather Alert function, and “WX” is

displayed.

15-13
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Screen Capture function

You can capture the transceiver display onto a D
DViewing the captured screen
microSD card. Most of the screens used in this
manual are captured using this function. [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Screen Capture View
However, some displays cannot be captured. 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.
D
DSetting the Screen Capture function 3. Select “Screen Capture View.”
[MENU] > SET > Function >
Screen Capture [PWR] Key
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Screen Capture [PWR] Key.”

•• The capture list is displayed.

•• The latest screen capture is at the bottom of the list.
4. Select the desired screen capture to display it.

4. Select “ON.”

•• The screen capture is displayed.

LLWhile a screen capture is displayed, you can scroll
through all the screen captures by rotating [DIAL].
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

Checking the file information and deleting a file
1. Select the screen capture that you want to view
D
DCapturing a screen or delete.
LLDO NOT push [ENT].
1. Display the desired screen to capture.
2. Push [ ] to capture the screen. 2. Push [QUICK].
•• The captured screen is saved onto the card. 3. Select an item from “File Information,” “Delete,”
and “Delete All.”

[ ]
•• File Information: Displays the file name, size,
and date of the selected screen
capture.
•• Delete: Deletes the selected file.
•• Delete All: Deletes all files.

15-14
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Setting the Opening picture

You can set a picture that is displayed at power ON. Step 2. Setting the displayed picture
(Transceiver)
NOTE: To set the displayed picture, a microSD card
(user supplied) is required. [MENU] > SET > SD Card > Opening Picture

About a picture file to use 1. Push [MENU].

•• File type: 24 bit bitmap 2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.
(The file extension is “bmp.”) 3. Select “Opening Picture.”
•• Picture size: 320 x 280 (px)
•• File name: Up to 23 characters
(except the filename extension)

Step 1. Saving a picture on the microSD card

(PC)
1. Copy a picture file into the “OpeningPicture” folder 4. Select a picture to display.
(“ID-52” > “OpeningPicture”) on the microSD card.
LLSee page 2-5 for detail.
2. Insert the microSD card into the transceiver.

•• The selected picture is displayed.

5. Push [ENT].
LLTo select the picture again, push [CLR].
•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
6. Select “YES.”
•• The transceiver will automatically restart, and the
selected picture is displayed.

To hide the picture at power ON

Select “<<Cancel Opening Picture Setting>>” in step 4.

LLThe selected picture can be displayed even if:

•• No microSD card is inserted.
•• You do a Partial Reset or All Reset.

15-15
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Cloning
The transceiver has a data cloning capability. This LLRecorded voice memories are not included in the cloning
function is useful when you want to copy all of the data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice memory,
settings and entered contents from one insert the microSD card into a sub transceiver, or make a
ID-52A/ID-52E to another. This section describes the copy onto the sub transceiver’s microSD card using a PC.
LLAssumes that the microSD card has already been
cloning method using a microSD card.
inserted into the transceiver.

Step 1. S
aving the master transceiver’s setting Step 2. Remove the microSD card from the master
data onto the microSD card. transceiver, then insert it into the sub
transceiver.
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Save Setting
1. Turn OFF the master transceiver.
1. Push [MENU]. 2. Remove the microSD card from the master
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu. transceiver.
3. Select “Save Setting.” 3. Insert the card into the sub transceiver, then turn
ON the sub transceiver.

Master Sub
4. Select “<<New File>>.”

NOTE:
•• Turn OFF the transceiver before you insert or remove
the microSD card.
•• DO NOT turn OFF the transceiver while saving or
loading the setting data. Otherwise, the data may be
corrupted or deleted.

TIP: The setting data is saved in the “icf” file format

that is used in the CS-52 programming software.
When the saved data on a card is copied to a PC,
you can edit it with the programming software.
For details, refer to the CS-52 instructions that can
be downloaded from the Icom website.

(Continue the steps on the next page.)

LLThe file name is automatically set in the following
format: Setyyyymmdd_xx
(yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day, xx: serial number).
5. Push [ENT] to save the file with the displayed name.
•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
6. Select “YES.”

•• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then

returns to the SD CARD screen after the saving is
completed.
LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

15-16
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Cloning

Step 3. L
oading the setting data into the sub
transceiver.
[MENU] > SET > SD Card > Load Setting
1. Push [MENU]. 7. Select “YES.”
2. Select “SD Card” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Load Setting.”

•• Starts checking and loading the data file.

•• After loading, “COMPLETED!” is displayed.
8. Restart the transceiver to operate with the new
4. Select a data file to load into the transceiver. setting.

5. Select the loading content.

•• ALL:
Loads all Memory channels, settings on the MENU
screen, and the Repeater List into the transceiver.
•• Except My Station:
Loads all Memory channels, setting on the MENU
screen except MY call signs, and the Repeater List
into the transceiver.
•• Repeater List Only:
Loads only the Repeater List into the transceiver.
6. Select “YES” or “NO.”

•• YES:
The skip settings of the Repeater List are retained.
(p. 5-39)
•• NO:
The skip settings of the Repeater List are cleared.

15-17
15 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Resetting
Occasionally, erroneous information may be NOTE for the All reset: After performing an All
displayed. This may be caused by static electricity or reset, you cannot use the DR function because
by other factors. the Repeater List contents are also cleared. We
If this problem occurs, turn OFF the transceiver. After recommend you save the setting data onto a
waiting a few seconds, turn ON the transceiver again. microSD card, or to your PC using the CS-52
If the problem still exists, perform a Partial reset. programming software before performing an All
If the problem still exists after performing a Partial reset. After the All reset is finished, load or write the
reset, perform an All reset. saved data into your transceiver.

D
DPartial Reset D Reset
DAll
A Partial Reset resets the operating settings to their An All reset clears all data and returns all settings to
defaults without clearing the following: their factory defaults. Memory channel contents, filter
•• Memory Channel contents settings, and so on will all be cleared, so you will need
•• Call Channel contents to rewrite your operating settings unless you have a
•• Radio Memory contents backup.
•• Scan Edge contents LLThe Bluetooth pairing list and opening picture are not
•• Message data deleted.
•• GPS memory contents
•• Call sign memories
•• DTMF memory contents [MENU] > SET > Others > Reset > All Reset
•• Repeater list 1. Push [MENU].
•• Bluetooth pairing list
2. Select “Others” in the “SET” menu.
•• Opening picture
3. Select “Reset.”

[MENU] > SET > Others > Reset > Partial Reset
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Others” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Reset.”

4. Select “All Reset.”

4. Select “Partial Reset.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

5. Select “YES.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

5. Select “YES.”

•• “ALL RESET” is displayed, and then the display

automatically returns to the default screen.

•• “PARTIAL RESET” is displayed, and then the display

automatically returns to the default screen.

15-18
Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
NOTE: See the Basic manual General��16-2
Section 6 for details on how to DD About updating the firmware��16-2
insert or remove a microSD card DD Checking the firmware version��16-2
and precautions. DD Preparation��16-3
DD Unzipping the firmware folder��16-3
Updating the firmware��16-4

16-1
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

General
D
DAbout updating the firmware D
DChecking the firmware version
You can update the ID-52A/E’s firmware using a Check the firmware version on the VERSION screen.
microSD card. Updating the firmware adds new [MENU] > SET > Others > Information > Version
functions and/or improves performance parameters.
You can download the latest firmware from the Icom 1. Push [MENU].
website. 2. Select “Others” in the “SET” menu.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/ 3. Select “Information.”

IMPORTANT: To update the firmware, first format

your microSD card using the ID-52A/E.
Then copy the downloaded firmware data from your
PC into the “ID-52” folder on the card.

4. Select “Version.”

•• The VERSION screen is displayed.

LLTo exit the VERSION screen, push [MENU].

TIP: You can also check the firmware version when

you turn ON the transceiver.

The firmware version is displayed.

16-2
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

General

D
DPreparation
Access the following URL and download the firmware 6. Select the location where you want to save the
file. firmware, and then click [Save] in the displayed
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/ File Download dialog.
LLThese instructions are based on Microsoft® Windows® 10.

1. Click the “Firmware/Software” link.

Click

2. Enter “ID-52” into the Search box, and then click

[Search].

1 Enter
Click
2 Click
•• The file starts downloading.
3. Click the desired firmware file link. •• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in a
“zip” format folder. Unzip it before use.
4. Carefully read “Regarding this Download Service.”
Click “Agree,” and then click [Download].

D
DUnzipping the firmware folder
1. Right-click the downloaded firmware folder (zip
format).
•• The right-click menu is displayed.
1 Click 2. Click “Extract All...”
2 Click

Click
5. Click “Save as” in the displayed File Download
dialog.
•• After unzipping, a folder is created in the same
location as the downloaded folder.
LLIn the “52*” folder, “52*.dat” is created.
* Represents the release number.

16-3
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Updating the firmware

CAUTION: NEVER turn OFF the transceiver 5. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
while updating the firmware. If you turn OFF the select “YES.”
transceiver, or if a power failure occurs while
updating, the transceiver firmware may be damaged,
and, if so, you will have to send the transceiver back
to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type
of repair is out of warranty, even if the transceiver
warranty period is still valid.

Recommendation!
Fully charging of battery pack before starting the
firmware update is strongly recommended.
This is to avoid failure during the update, caused by
an unexpected power failure.

TIP: BE SURE to unzip the downloaded file.

See the previous page for details.
•• Scroll the screen and read all the precautions.
1. Copy the downloaded firmware data into the •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
“ID-52” folder on to a microSD card. When you select “YES,” the backup file is made on
the microSD card, and then the Firmware selection
screen is displayed.
6. Select the Firmware (Example: 52*).
* Represents the release number.

•• The final confirmation screen is displayed.

LLCarefully read all the displayed precautions.
7. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
select “YES.”

Copy
2. Insert the microSD card into the transceiver.
3. Display the SD CARD screen.
[MENU] > SET > SD Card
4. Select “Firmware Update.” •• The updating starts.
8. When the update is completed, “Firmware
updating has completed.” is displayed in the
dialog.
•• The transceiver will automatically restart.
LLAfter the updating finishes, the operating screen is
displayed.
TIP: When “USB Connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,”
and the transceiver is connected to the PC through a
USB data cable, you can directly access the microSD
card that is set in the transceiver from the PC.
([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)

16-4
Section 17 OPTIONS
Option list��17-2
Optional HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone��17-4
DD Assigning a Remote Control function��17-4
When using an application��17-5
DD About compatible applications��17-5
DD Required items��17-5
DD Download procedures (Android device)��17-6
DD Download procedures (iOS device)��17-6
DD When using a USB cable��17-6
Connecting an Android™ device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®��17-7
DD Pairing with an Android device��17-7
DD Connection��17-8
Connecting an iOS device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®��17-9
DD Pairing with an iOS device��17-9
DD Connection��17-10

17-1
17 OPTIONS

Option list
You can find information for these options on the Icom Speaker microphones
website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/ HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone
LLSome options may not be available, depending on the HM-183LS speaker microphone
transceiver version. Meets IPX7 requirements for waterproof protection
(1 meter, 3.3 ft depth for 30 minutes).

Batteries/Chargers HM-186LS speaker microphone

Meets IPX4 requirements for waterproof protection
BC-167SA/BC-167SD battery charger (Splashing water from any direction).
The same as supplied.
The shape may be different, depending on the charger
version.
Cables
BC-202IP2 rapid charger
+ BC-123SA/BC-123SE (L-shaped type plug) CP-12L cigarette lighter cable
ac adapter With noise filter.
Fuse Coding: FUSE 125V 3A
BC-202IP3L rapid charger Fuse Voltage Rating: 125 Volts
+ BC-123SA/BC-123SE (Straight type plug) Fuse Current Rating: 3 Amperes
ac adapter (For single unit)
+ BC-228 ac adapter (For multiple units) OPC-254L dc power cable
Directly connects to a DC power source.
BP-271 Li-ion battery pack Fuse Coding: FUSE 250V 3A
Voltage: 7.4 V Fuse Voltage Rating: 250 Volts
Discharge capacity: 1150 mAh (minimum), 1200 mAh (typical) Fuse Current Rating: 3 Amperes
Battery life: Approximately 4.25 hours (FM)
CP-23L cigarette lighter cable
BP-272 Li-ion battery pack For BC-202IP2, 12 V
The same as supplied. LLYou cannot connect to the transceiver’s [DC IN] jack.
Voltage: 7.4 V
Discharge capacity: 1880 mAh (minimum), 2000 mAh (typical) OPC-515L dc power cable
Battery life: Approximately 7.25 hours (FM) For BC-202IP2
LLYou cannot connect to the transceiver’s [DC IN] jack.
BP-273 battery case
Uses 3 LR6 (AA) alkaline batteries. CP-25H cigarette lighter cable
For BC-202IP3L, 12 V
BP-307 Li-ion battery pack LLYou cannot connect to the transceiver’s [DC IN] jack.
Voltage: 7.2 V
Discharge capacity: 3050 mAh (minimum), 3150 mAh (typical) OPC-2417 data cable (USB micro-B/USB micro-B)
Battery life: Approximately 12 hours (FM) OPC-2418 data cable (USB micro-B/USB Type-C)

Headsets/Earphones
Others
HS-94/HS-95/HS-97 headset
AD-92SMA antenna connector adapter
+ OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable Connects an antenna or antenna cable that has a BNC
HS-94: Ear hook type connector.
HS-95: Neck and arm type
HS-97 Throat microphone FA-S270C vhf/uhf antenna
OPC-2006LS: Connects the HS-94/HS-95/HS-97 to the The same as supplied.
transceiver for the VOX function.
LC-193 carrying case
HM-153LS earphone microphone LLYou cannot use when the BP-307 is attached to the
transceiver.
HM-166LS earphone microphone
Smaller than the HM-153LS. MB-127 belt clip
The same as supplied.
SP-40 earphone
+ OPC-2144 plug adapter cable VS-3 Bluetooth® headset
When using the SP-40, you need the OPC-2144 slim L type
conversion cable.
17-2
17 OPTIONS

Option List

About the free download software

CS-52 programming software
RS-MS1A (For Android devices) Android application
RS-MS1I (For iOS™ devices) iOS™ application
RS-MS3A (For Android devices) terminal mode/access point mode software
RS-MS3W (For Windows) terminal mode/access point mode software
ST-4001A (For Android devices) picture utility software
ST-4001I (For iOS devices) picture utility software
ST-4001W (For Windows) picture utility software
You can download each manual and guide from the Icom website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
LLBefore using, read each manual and guide, and use it according to the instructions.
To add or expand a function, or to improve the performance, the software version may be upgraded.
Before you update your software version, see the instructions and cautions described on the Icom website.

17-3
17 OPTIONS

Optional HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone

The optional HM-75LS enables you to remotely select
operating frequencies, Memory channels, and other
functions. [A] []
You can assign some functions to the keys on the Microphone
HM-75LS for simple remote control operation. TX indicator
(p. 12-18) A
[PTT]
A
B
B

The HM-75LS has a lock switch on the back to

prevent accidental frequency changes. Speaker [B] []
NOTE:
•• BE SURE to turn OFF the transceiver when plugging or OFF ON
unplugging the HM-75LS into or from the [MIC/SP] jack. LOCK

•• Firmly plug the HM-75LS into the transceiver.

Lock switch Earphone jack
D
DAssigning a Remote Control function
Example: Assigning the “TO (DR)” function to the [A]
key.
[MENU] > SET > Function > Remote MIC Key
1. Push [MENU]. 6. Select “TO (DR).”
2. Select “Function” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “Remote MIC Key.”

4. Select “During RX/Standby.”

5. Select “[A].” •• The “TO (DR)” function is assigned.

LLTo exit the MENU screen, push [MENU].

TIP: To return to the default settings

•• On the “During RX/Standby” screen or “During TX”
screen, push [QUICK] and select “Default All.”
•• On the each key screen, push [QUICK] and select
“Default.”

•• The Assignable function list is displayed.

LLAbout the functions, see pages 12-19 and 12-20.

17-4
17 OPTIONS

When using an application

The following applications are compatible with the Android or iOS device.
See each application’s manual for details.
Download the applications from your device.

D
DAbout compatible applications
The following applications are compatible with ID-52A/
ID-52E. (As of November 2021)

Android device
When using a USB cable
RS-MS1A: You can use the extended D-STAR
•• Android device
functions to exchange pictures or
Android 5.0 or later with the USB host function.
messages or display the received
D-PRS station data on a map
•• Cable (purchase separately)
application.
OPC-2417 data cable (USB micro-B/USB micro-B)
RS-MS3A: You can use the DV Gateway function.
or
ST-4001A: You can make an image to be used
OPC-2418 data cable (USB micro-B/USB Type-C)
for the Share Picture function, and
transfer it to the transceiver. TIP: The USB host function is needed to use a USB
device with an Android device. To check whether or
iOS device not your Android device has the USB host system,
RS-MS1I: You can use the extended D-STAR ask the Android device’s manufacturer.
functions to exchange pictures or
messages or display the received
D-PRS station data on a map When using the Bluetooth function
application. •• Android device or iOS device
ST-4001I: You can make an image to be used Android 5.0 or later with the Bluetooth function.
for the Share Picture function, and or
transfer it to the transceiver. iOS version 12 or later, iPadOS version 13 or later
with the Bluetooth function.
D
DRequired items LLWhen using the RS-MS3A, you cannot connect an
Android device Android device to the transceiver through Bluetooth.
You can use the RS-MS1A/RS-MS3A/ST-4001A with
devices that have Android 5.0 or later installed.
NOTE: Some functions may not work correctly,
LLThe applications have been tested with the Android 5.x.x,
•• depending on other applications installed in the Android
6.x.x, 7.x.x, 8.x.x, 9.0, and 10.0. (As of November 2021)
device.
•• depending on the memory capacity.
iOS device
You can use the RS-MS1I/ST-4001I with devices that
have iOS version 12 or later, iPadOS version 13 or
later installed.
LLThe ST-4001I has been tested with iOS 12 and 13, and
iPadOS 13. (As of November 2021)

Disclaimer
•• The application may not work properly, depending on the
OS version, installed applications, or other reasons.
•• The indications or items may differ, depending on the OS
version or settings.

17-5
17 OPTIONS

When using an application

DDDownload procedures (Android device) D

DWhen using a USB cable
1. Turn ON your Android device.
2. Touch “Play Store.” ID-52A/E
3. Enter the application’s name in the search field. Android device
LLDo not abbreviate the application name to be sure to with the USB
find it. host function
4. Touch “ .”
•• The application’s name will be displayed as the
search result. USB cable
LLIf your Android device does not support the
application, its name may not appear on the search
result.
To the [USB] port To a USB port
5. Touch the application to install.
•• Displays the introduction screen of the application.
LLConnect the USB micro-B connector (for the OPC-2417:
6. Touch <INSTALL>.
with the white tube) to the transceiver and the other
•• Installation starts.
connector to an Android device.
•• After finishing the installation, the icon is displayed on
the screen.
NOTE:
D
DDownload procedures (iOS device) •• Turn OFF the transceiver before connecting or removing
1. Turn ON your iOS device. the cable.
2. Touch “App Store.” •• When an Android device is connected, the USB
3. Enter the application’s name in the search field. connection indicator ( ) is displayed on the
LLDo not abbreviate the application name to be sure to transceiver. If the indicator is not displayed, enable your
find it. Android device to detect the USB device.
LLNo operation is required on a mobile device that
4. Touch “ .”
support automatic detection of the USB devices.
•• The application’s name will be displayed as the
•• When using RS-MS1A, confirm the following items are set.
search result.
([MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V)
LLIf your iOS device does not support the application,
Set “CI-V Address” to the value same as the RS-MS1A
its name may not appear on the search result.
side. (Default: A6)
5. Touch the application to install. LLRS-MS1A side: Application Settings → CI-V settings
•• Displays the introduction screen of the application.
(Default: Transceiver[A6])
6. Touch <GET>. Set “CI-V Transceive” to “ON.”
•• Installation starts.
•• After finishing the installation, the icon is displayed on ([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Serialport Function)
the screen. Set “USB SerialPort Function” to “CI-V (Echo Back OFF).”

([MENU] > SET > Function > USB Connect)

Set “USB Connect” to “Serialport.”
•• When using Access Point mode, RS-MS1A cannot be
used.
•• Remove the USB cable when you do not use the cable.
Otherwise, the battery will be quickly exhausted.

17-6
17 OPTIONS

Connecting an Android™ device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®

Before connecting to an Android device, you must Step 3. Sending a pairing request to the
pair with it. See the next page about connecting to transceiver (Android device)
the transceiver with an Android device using the Select the displayed transceiver Bluetooth unit’s name
RS-MS1A application. to send a pairing request.
•• The Android device starts to send a pairing request.
•• The Android device displays, “To pair with: ICOM
D
DPairing with an Android device BT(ID-52). Make sure it is showing this passkey:
This section describes how to pair with an Android MMMMM.”
device.
NOTE: You may not be able to pair with it, Step 4. Receiving a pairing request (Transceiver)
depending on the Bluetooth device. 1. When the transceiver receives a pairing request,
confirm the displayed passkey is the same as
Step 1. Entering the Pairing Reception mode yours, and then select “CONFIRM.”
(Transceiver)
[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set >
<<Pairing Reception>>
1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “<<Pairing Reception>>.”

•• Pairing starts.
2. Select “Pairing/Connect.”

Turn ON Bluetooth with your Android device

within the displayed period.
When the time runs out, the transceiver exits
the Pairing Reception mode.

Step 2. Turning ON Bluetooth (Android device)

Pairing list
Turn ON Bluetooth with your Android device.
•• The Android device displays the transceiver Bluetooth
unit’s name.
LLYou can confirm the transceiver Bluetooth unit’s name on After the pairing is complete, the
the BLUETOOTH DEVICE INFO screen. Android device name is displayed
(Default: ICOM BT(ID-52)) (p. 13-7) on the pairing list.
LLSee the instruction manual of the Android device for
details.
NOTE: When you pair with a third party’s data
device, entering a PIN code or passkey may be
required. See the instruction manual of the data
device for details on how to enter a PIN code or
passkey.
17-7
17 OPTIONS

Connecting an Android™ device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®

D
DConnection
This section describes how to connect an Android TIP: To connect to the Android device from the
device to the transceiver, using the RS-MS1A transceiver
application. When the RS-MS1A is started on the Android device,
Before connecting, pair the transceiver with the you can connect to the device from the transceiver.
Android device. (p. 17-7)
LLWhen using the ST-4001A application, the transceiver [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Pairing/Connect
and Android device are automatically connected while 1. Push [MENU].
transferring a picture. 2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the SET menu.
3. Select “Pairing/Connect.”
Step 1. Preparing for the connection (Transceiver) 4. Select the Android device name displayed in the
pairing list.
[MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive 5. Select “YES.”
Set “CI-V Transceive” to ON to control the transceiver •• Displays “MMM Connecting...”
and the RS-MS1A with CI-V commands. ( “MMM” is the Bluetooth name of the Android
device.)
LLOn the PAIRING/CONNECT screen, “ ” is
Step 2. Starting the RS-MS1A (Android device) displayed on the data device icon.
Touch the RS-MS1A to start.
LLSee page 17-6 for details on downloading the RS-MS1A. NOTE: If you cannot connect, check that the same
CI-V address is set in the transceiver and the RS-
MS1A.
Step 3. C
onnecting to the transceiver You can see the CI-V setting as described below:
(Android device) Transceiver
Touch the transceiver’s Bluetooth unit name displayed “CI-V Address” in the MENU screen.
on the RS-MS1A. ([MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Address)
•• Starts to connect. (Default: A6)
LLWhen your call sign has not been entered in the RS-MS1A:
transceiver, you should enter it before you connect. “Application Settings” → “CI-V settings”
LLAfter the connection has been made, the transceiver (Default: Transceiver[A6])
displays “MMM Connected.,” and the Bluetooth icon is
displayed.
Displayed

LLOn the PAIRING/CONNECT screen, “ ” is displayed.

Device name
Displayed while connecting

17-8
17 OPTIONS

Connecting an iOS device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®

Before connecting to an iOS device, you must pair with it. Step 3. Sending a pairing request to the transceiver
(iOS device)
D
DPairing with an iOS device 1. On the application, touch “Scan.”
This section describes how to pair with an iOS device. •• For the RS-MS1I, the item is displayed in “Other” >
“Bluetooth Connection.”
NOTE: •• For the ST-4001I, the item is displayed in “Transfer
•• You cannot pair with an iOS device in its Settings app.
Device List.”
To pair with an iOS device, use Icom application.
(“...” > Transfer Settings > Using Bluetooth >
•• You may not be able to pair with it, depending on the
Transfer Device List)
Bluetooth device.
•• The iOS device displays the transceiver Bluetooth
NOTE: When using the RS-MS1I unit’s name.
Before connecting, check that the following items are LLYou can confirm the transceiver Bluetooth unit’s
correctly set. name on the BLUETOOTH DEVICE INFO screen.
•• Set “CI-V Transceive” to ON in the transceiver. (Default: ICOM BT(ID-52)) (p. 13-7)
([MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive) 2. Select the displayed transceiver Bluetooth unit’s
•• Set the same CI-V address in the transceiver and the name to send a pairing request.
RS-MS1I. •• The iOS device starts to send a pairing request.
Transceiver: •• After the pairing has succeeded, “Pairing is
“CI-V Address” in the MENU screen. complete.” is displayed.
([MENU] > SET > Function > CI-V > CI-V Address)
(Default: A6)
About the transceiver’s display
RS-MS1I:
•• “Application Settings” → “Select the default” After the connection has been made, the transceiver
(Default: Auto Select) displays “MMM Connected.” and the Bluetooth icon
•• “Application Settings” → “CI-V address” is displayed.
(Default: Auto Setting) (“MMM” is the Bluetooth name of the iOS device.)
Displayed
Step 1. Starting the application (iOS device)
1. Turn ON Bluetooth in your iOS device.
LLSee the instruction manual of the iOS device for details.
2. Touch the application’s icon to start.

Step 2. Entering the pairing reception mode

(Transceiver) LLOn the PAIRING/CONNECT screen, “ ” is displayed.

[MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > <<Pairing Reception>>

1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the “SET” menu.
3. Select “<<Pairing Reception>>.”

Device name
Displayed while connecting

Send a pairing request to the transceiver (step. 3) within the

displayed period. When the time runs out, the transceiver
exits the Pairing Reception mode.
17-9
17 OPTIONS

Connecting an iOS device to the transceiver through Bluetooth®

D
DConnection
This section describes how to connect to a paired TIP: To connect to the iOS device from the
transceiver from an iOS device. transceiver
Before connecting, pair the transceiver with the iOS When the RS-MS1I is started on the iOS device, you
device. (p. 17-7) can connect to the device from the transceiver.
LLWhen using the ST-4001I application, the transceiver
and Android device are automatically connected while [MENU] > SET > Bluetooth Set > Pairing/Connect
transferring a picture. 1. Push [MENU].
2. Select “Bluetooth Set” in the SET menu.
Step 1. Starting the RS-MS1I (iOS device) 3. Select “Pairing/Connect.”
4. Select the iOS device name displayed in the
Touch the RS-MS1I to start.
pairing list.
LLSee page 17-6 for details on downloading the RS-MS1I.
5. Select “YES.”
•• Displays “MMM Connecting...”
Step 2. C
onnecting to the transceiver (“MMM” is the Bluetooth name of the iOS device.)
(iOS device) LLOn the PAIRING/CONNECT screen, “ ” is
displayed on the data device icon.
1. Touch “Other.”
2. Touch “Bluetooth Connection.”
3. Touch the displayed transceiver Bluetooth unit’s
name to connect.
•• Starts to connect.
LLWhen your call sign has not been entered in the
transceiver, enter it before you connect.
LLIf the connection has been made, the transceiver
displays “MMM Connected.,” and the Bluetooth icon
is displayed.
Displayed

LLOn the PAIRING/CONNECT screen, “ ” is displayed.

Device name
Displayed while connecting

17-10
How the World Communicates

IC-905 ENG Advanced 0
No ratings yet
IC-905 ENG Advanced 0
215 pages
IC-9700 ENG AM 1a
No ratings yet
IC-9700 ENG AM 1a
197 pages
Nokia 9000 en
No ratings yet
Nokia 9000 en
126 pages
Icom IC-91A - AD Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
Icom IC-91A - AD Instruction Manual
131 pages
About This Instruction Manual (PDF Format) : Move To The Previously Read Page
No ratings yet
About This Instruction Manual (PDF Format) : Move To The Previously Read Page
59 pages
Topcom Mira 200 Manual de Usuario
No ratings yet
Topcom Mira 200 Manual de Usuario
19 pages
Motorola gp380 Handleiding Portofoonheadsetsnl
No ratings yet
Motorola gp380 Handleiding Portofoonheadsetsnl
60 pages
iF4GT/GS iF3GT/GS: Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
iF4GT/GS iF3GT/GS: Instruction Manual
16 pages
IC-F3G F4G Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
IC-F3G F4G Instruction Manual
16 pages
Lbi 38732e PDF
No ratings yet
Lbi 38732e PDF
112 pages
GP 380
No ratings yet
GP 380
60 pages
Astra OFFICE35 PHONE MANUAL
No ratings yet
Astra OFFICE35 PHONE MANUAL
79 pages
IC-F5062D Instructions
No ratings yet
IC-F5062D Instructions
2 pages
Airband - IC-A16 Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
Airband - IC-A16 Instruction Manual
22 pages
Nokia 9000 Manual
No ratings yet
Nokia 9000 Manual
106 pages
Downloaded From Manuals Search Engine
No ratings yet
Downloaded From Manuals Search Engine
204 pages
Motorola gp580
No ratings yet
Motorola gp580
62 pages
Professional Radio: User Guide
No ratings yet
Professional Radio: User Guide
46 pages
GP388
No ratings yet
GP388
54 pages
Motorola v120 Manual
No ratings yet
Motorola v120 Manual
134 pages
918
No ratings yet
918
64 pages
Zonton 999 PDF
100% (1)
Zonton 999 PDF
23 pages
IC 7100 AdvancedInstructions
No ratings yet
IC 7100 AdvancedInstructions
379 pages
Newland
No ratings yet
Newland
34 pages
IC 3FGX Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
IC 3FGX Instruction Manual
32 pages
Icom IC-F5400D OpS MAn
No ratings yet
Icom IC-F5400D OpS MAn
189 pages
Intermec cn51 Windows Embedded Handheld 6 5 Users Manual 775642
No ratings yet
Intermec cn51 Windows Embedded Handheld 6 5 Users Manual 775642
156 pages
Icf3161 Series
No ratings yet
Icf3161 Series
40 pages
Hyperion 1300g: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Hyperion 1300g: User's Guide
168 pages
KX TG2361 PDF
No ratings yet
KX TG2361 PDF
80 pages
Linear Imaging Scanner
No ratings yet
Linear Imaging Scanner
116 pages
Scalarider G9 Manual en
No ratings yet
Scalarider G9 Manual en
22 pages
M100evo Quick Start Guide User Manual Rev02 3
No ratings yet
M100evo Quick Start Guide User Manual Rev02 3
28 pages
AV Navigation: XNV-770BT XNV-660BT
No ratings yet
AV Navigation: XNV-770BT XNV-660BT
240 pages
You Can Find The Most Up-To-Date User Guide at
No ratings yet
You Can Find The Most Up-To-Date User Guide at
66 pages
User Manual 2735
No ratings yet
User Manual 2735
33 pages
IC 7610 Instruction Manual PDF
No ratings yet
IC 7610 Instruction Manual PDF
80 pages
User Manual 1987033 PDF
No ratings yet
User Manual 1987033 PDF
147 pages
Scalarider G4 Manual English PDF
No ratings yet
Scalarider G4 Manual English PDF
27 pages
Gigaset E455 Manual Small
No ratings yet
Gigaset E455 Manual Small
65 pages
Aircraft Communication Guide
0% (1)
Aircraft Communication Guide
2 pages
Icom IC-V8 Instrutction Manual
No ratings yet
Icom IC-V8 Instrutction Manual
80 pages
AF 16 46 User+Manual PDF
No ratings yet
AF 16 46 User+Manual PDF
17 pages
Texas Instruments TI-99/4A User's Reference Guide
No ratings yet
Texas Instruments TI-99/4A User's Reference Guide
204 pages
A120 Manual Full
No ratings yet
A120 Manual Full
41 pages
User Manual Gigaset SL3 Professional On HiPath 4000
No ratings yet
User Manual Gigaset SL3 Professional On HiPath 4000
121 pages
Ic 2gxat Manual
No ratings yet
Ic 2gxat Manual
78 pages
Icom-Radios-A25 A25e Im Web 4 PDF
No ratings yet
Icom-Radios-A25 A25e Im Web 4 PDF
53 pages
TaoTronics Laser Barcode Scanner User's Manual
No ratings yet
TaoTronics Laser Barcode Scanner User's Manual
32 pages
Sony Audio System Manual
No ratings yet
Sony Audio System Manual
260 pages
HT1250LS PDF
No ratings yet
HT1250LS PDF
110 pages
Motorola Dp4801ex User Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Motorola Dp4801ex User Guide PDF
128 pages

Id-52a e Eng Advanced 1

Uploaded by

Id-52a e Eng Advanced 1

Uploaded by

ADVANCED MANUAL

VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER 1 ATTACHING ACCESSORIES

ID-52A 2 USING a microSD CARD

5 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

6 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

11 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

14 SHARE PICTURES FUNCTION

16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

ABOUT THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE MANUAL (As of November 2021)

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES OF ADOBE® ACROBAT® READER®

•• Keyword search •• Find screen

Click to open the find or

•• Printing out the desired pages. •• Read Out Loud feature.

ENTERING AND EDITING TEXT

Selects the character

HOW TO ENTER TEXT

•• The Edit screen is displayed.

•• A confirmation dialog is displayed.

•• The Memory name is overwritten.

Attaching the antenna Attaching and detaching the battery

To detach Hand strap

About data saved on a microSD card

•• The transceiver’s settings •• Your (UR) call sign memory

Saving settings onto a microSD card

•• While saving, a progress bar is displayed. When saving

3. Select “Save Setting.” Overwriting a current file:

4. Select “<<New File>>.”

Saving with a different file name

3. Select “Save Setting.”

4. Select “<<New File>>.”

5. Hold down [CLR] to delete the characters.

6. Enter a file name, and then push [ENT].

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

•• While saving, a progress bar is displayed. When saving

Loading the saved files on the microSD card

4. Select a data file to load into the transceiver.

5. Select the loading content.

Backing up data saved on the microSD card onto a PC

Setting •• QsoLog folder

•• ID-52 folder •• VoiceRec folder

•• Csv folder •• VoiceTx folder

Backing up data saved on the microSD card onto a PC

•• ‘ID-52’ folder is displayed.

6. To remove the card, click the remove media icon

7. When “Safe To Remove Hardware” is displayed,

TIP: When “USB Connect” is set to “SD Card Mode,”

Importing or exporting a CSV format file

Example: Importing the Your Call sign memory.

8. To complete importing, restart the transceiver.

5. Select “Your Call Sign.”

Importing or exporting a CSV format file

•• Displays the FILE NAME screen.

LLSee page iii on how to enter characters.

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

5. Select “Your Call Sign.”

•• Exports the setting data.

Overwriting the current file:

About the SD Card mode

5. Select “SD Card Mode.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

•• The free space and the recording time on the

LLWhile charging, the charging icon “ ” and

Black: _ *1 The shape is different, depending on the version.

To the [USB] port To a USB port

Charging with the BC-202IP2 optional rapid charger

Transceiver + battery pack

The CP-23L or OPC-515L BC-202IP2 Charging indicator

Charging with the BC-202IP3L optional rapid charger

LLTo connect the power adapter to the

Connecting BC-202IP3L together

External DC power operation

About the optional battery case

The approximate battery life:

BP-273 Alkaline battery D

Specifications for the battery charger and battery packs

TIP: The FM Radio Memory channel contents,

ABOUT THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE MANUAL (As of November 2021)

•• OFF: You can select the memory in the Memory mode.

FM Radio memory contents Power Save (FM Radio) (Default: ON)

Auto Mute (Default: 2sec)